← Volver a la ficha del textoGoogle
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world’s books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that’s often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book’s long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non- commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google’s system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google “watermark” you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can’t offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book’s appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google’s mission is to organize the world’s information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world’s books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at jhttp : //books . qooqle . com/
HANDBOOK OB PALI.
BEING
AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR,
A CHRESTOMATHY, AND A GLOSSARY.
COMPILED BY
0. FRANKFURTER, Ph.D.
WILLIAMS AND NORGATE,
14, HENRIETTA STREET, COYENT GARDEN, LONDON;
and 20, SOUTH FREDERICK STREET, EDINBURGH.
1883.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
TO THE REVEREND
RICHARD MORRIS, LL.D., M.A.,
YICE-PBESIDENT OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY,
AS A TOKEN
OF FRIENDSHIP AND RESPECT.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
CONTENTS
Preface
PAGE
. . ix
Pali Bibliography .
XV
Part I.
Alphabet
1
Pronunciation
1
Classification of Letters .
2
Vowels ....
2
Short Vowels
3
Long Vowels
5
Nasal Vowels
7
Interchange of Vowels .
• •
7
Consonants .
• •
7
Phonetic Changes .
• •
8
Compound Consonants .
11
Sandhi ....
21
Euphonic Changes
24
Declension .
25
Declension of Nouns
29
Comparison .
41
Declension of Pronouns .
42
Numerals
47
Cardinals .
47
Ordinals
49
The Verb
51
Present System .
53
Modes of the Present Tense
58
Perfect System .
.
60
Aorist and Imperfect .
.
61
Future
.
66
Conditional
.
67
Participles, Infinitives,
Gerunds „
69
Indeclinables
.
70
Adverbs
.
70
Prepositions .
.
73
Compounds .
•
74
Part II.
Saranagamanam (Khuddaka Nikaya) 81
D asasikkhapadaip. ,, „ 81
PA OR
Samanera Parham (Khuddaka Nikaya) 82
Dvatimsakaram ,, ,, 82
Paccavekkhana (Anguttara Nikaya) 82
D asadhammasuttam „ ,, 83
Mahamangalasuttam (Khuddaka
Nikaya) 84
Ratanasuttam (Khuddaka Nikaya) . 85
KaranTyamettasuttam „ „ 88
Khandhaparittam(AnguttaraNikaya) 89
Mettasuttam ,, „ 90
Mettanisamsam (Jataka) . .91
Moraparittam „ . . 92
Candaparittam (Samyutta Nikaya) . 92
Suriyaparittam ,, ,, .93
Dhajaggaparittam „ „ .94
Mahakassappattherabo j j hah gam
(Samyutta Nikaya) . . 96
Girimanandasuttam (Samyutta
Nikaya) 97
Atiinatiyasuttam (DTgha Nikaya) . 101
Dhammacakkappavattanasuttaip
(Samyutta Nikaya) . . 109
Mahasamayasuttam (DTgha Nikaya) 112
Alavakasuttam (Samyutta Nikaya) . 118
Parabhayasuttam(KhuddakaNikaya) 120
Vasalasuttam » ,, 122
Kaslbharadvaj asuttam ,, „ 125
Saccavibhangam (Majjhima Nikaya) 127
Arunayatisuttam (Samyutta Nikaya) 133
Deyadahasuttam „ M 136
A Collection of Kammayacas . . 142
Part III.
Glossary 152
Tables of Alphabets : —
Sinhalese Alphabet.
Burmese Alphabet.
Kambodian Alphabet.
Comparatiye Table of Alphabets.
b
ed by CjOO^Ic
PREFACE.
The Handbook of Pali which I place before my readers
consists of three parts, an Elementary Grammar, a Chresto-
mathy, and a Glossary.
I have called the grammar an elementary one, because no
attempt has been made to distinguish the different periods
in the development of the language. To write a scientific
grammar of Pali, it would be necessary not only to have
recourse to the different so-called ancient Prakritic dialects,
but also to the modern Aryan languages of India, more
especially Mahrathi. I believe Mahrathi to be, if not the
daughter of Pali, at least more closely allied to it than
any other of the Indian vernacular tongues; and among
these I include also Sinhalese. In fact, a scientific Pali
grammar can, in my opinion, only be written as part of a
comparative grammar of the Aryan languages of India.
I have called this work a Handbook of Pali. This requires
some explanation. I am well aware that Professor Forch-
hammer, in his report of the Rangoon High School, 1879-
1880, has shewn conclusively, as did the late Professor
Childers before him, that Pali means only Sacred Texts.
Professor Forchhammer, quoting from Burmese books, says :
“ The Tipitaka Pali was written by means of the Magadha-
bhasha;” and again, “The Pali of the Tipitaka may be
preached by means of any language.” He goes on to
remark that “a Pali grammar and a Pali dictionary must
ed by CjOCK^Ic
X
TREFACE.
appear to the Burmans as an incomprehensible misnomer,
or at best what to us would be a Bible dictionary or a
grammar of the New Testament.” I believe the examples
are not very well chosen. In a grammar of the New Testa-
ment we expect to find the New Testament Greek. A
Bible dictionary would mean a cyclopaedia, in which one
can find information on any Bible subject.
I could have chosen “ Handbook of Magadhi” as a title
of the book; but this would imply more than is actually
given in the book. Under such a title one would expect
to find a grammar of the Magadhese Inscriptions and of
the Magadhi of the drama. Moreover, in calling it a
Handbook of Magadhi, I should have committed myself to
a definite statement about the country in which the language
of the Buddhist Scriptures was spoken. Pali means for
European scholars the sacred language of the Buddhist
Scriptures, and as a matter of convenience this designation
ought to be kept until conclusive proofs are adduced
to shew in which part of India this Prakrit dialect was
spoken. We have moreover the excellent authority of
Subhuti, who calls his Abhidhanappadipika a Pali dictionary,
and his Namamala a work on Pali grammar.
As a reading-book I have chosen the Paritta. The text
is based on a MS. in the British Museum (Or. 1092), written
in Sinhalese characters. Besides this I had several printed
Burmese copies, and one printed Sinhalese copy of the book.
They however vary in the selection they give. None
contains all the extracts given in the reading-book. Part
of the Paritta has, as is well known, been published by the
late Professor Childers, and by the late M. Grimblot, with
notes and translations by M. Leon Feer. Some of the
suttas which in the “ Extraits du Paritta ” are given as
ed by CjOCK^Ic
PREFACE.
XI
belonging to the Sutta Nipata occur also in the Samyutta
Nikaya. The two suttas of the Digha Nikaya were pub-
lished by the late M. Grimblot in the “ Sept Suttas Palis."
I have consulted the MSS. of the individual Nikayas in
constituting the text. The translation of the Sutta Nipata
given by Professor Fausboll in the “ Sacred Books of the
East " was of great service to me in deciding on the merits
of the various readings. I have not seen the “ Ceylon
Friend," in which the late Rev. D. Gogerly has translated
most if not all the suttas belonging to the Paritta. I shall
take an early opportunity of giving a more elaborate account
of the compilation of the book and the different versions
which we have of it.
The other extracts given are “A Collection of Kamma-
vacas." If the Paritta was intended to represent the style
of the Sutta Pitaka, these may be taken as a fairly good
specimen of the Yinaya Pitaka. I also reserve for a later
occasion any mention of the relation of the Kammavacas
to the Yinaya Pitaka, viz. if they stand in the same rela-
tion to the Mahavagga and Cullavagga as the Patimokkha
stands to the Sutta Yibhanga. The text of the Kam-
mavacas is based on MSS. belonging to the Bodleian
Library (Pali 1 and 2). They are written in the square
character, and represent the usual Burmese orthography.
A distinction between linguals and dentals is seldom made,
nor do they write anusvara after i and u. For several
chapters I have consulted other MSS. in the British
Museum, and some belonging to the Liverpool Free Library.
They present the same texts, and are also written in the
square painted character. Whilst examining the Liverpool
MSS., in company with Professor Rhys Davids, to whom
they had been sent by Sir James Allanson Picton for
ed by CjOCK^Ic
XI l
PREFACE.
identification and report, we found that one of them (No.
L 24091) was of especial value, as it contained a few extra
Xammavacas not appearing in the usual text which I have
given in the Chrestomathy. Professor Spiegel and Mr.
Dickson have published part of the text (see Bibliography).
The third part contains the Glossary. I have omitted
in it all proper names. In employing two sorts of type
and hyphens I have tried to distinguish between compound
words and simple ones. Compound words ought all to have
been given under their last member, as is done in Benfey's
Sanskrit Dictionary. This is the only scientific way. The
last member in the Indo-European languages is explained
by the preceding ones, or as the late Professor Benfey put it
in his lectures, “ the defining members always precede
the defined. ,, But as all the second members did not
occur in the glossary, I had to give up this plan, and to limit
myself to using italics for compound words. I employ
capitals, however, for compound words when the individual
meaning of the component parts is another than that of the
whole word ; e. g. addhayogo was printed in capitals for that
reason. I have not attempted to explain the different philo-
sophical terms which occur in the extracts. I give mostly
one translation, and put a 1. 1. (technical term) after them.
Fault may perhaps be found with the explanation of
Nibbanam as the summum bonum of the Buddhists; but
among so many different views it seems ‘to me best neither
to offer an opinion nor to defend one.
I have given the third person singular present of the
verb, and translated this throughout with the infinitive.
The third person singular present, as is well known, has
in Indian grammar the same value as the infinitive of
modern grammar. It is the type given for the verb by the
ed by CjOCK^Ic
PREFACE.
xiii
native grammarians. To give the so-called root did not
commend itself to me — for two reasons. First, — the
principle of the root- theory has been recently, and not
without reason, greatly shaken, so that it would not be wise
to introduce it. Secondly, it is difficult to determine what is
the root of a Pali word. I have given the nominative case
of nouns, and here I think I may deserve some blame.
But, as is shewn in the chapter on declension, through the
working of the phonetic laws none of the declensions keeps
within its own range, and the crude form of a Pali noun is
thus not easily fixed.
I have availed myself on every occasion of all the books
published on Pali grammar, and consulted Childers’s Dic-
tionary of the Pali Language. These works will be found
in the appended Bibliography. I name here more particu-
larly the works of Professors Kuhn and Minayeff, of M.
Senart, of the Terunnanse Subhfiti, and of Dr. Trenckner.
I hope the Tables of Alphabets will be found useful.
In conclusion, I have to thank Dr. Morris for many
valuable suggestions, and for his kindness in looking over
the proof-sheets. I am also indebted to the authorities of
the Bodleian Library, the British Museum, and the India
Office Library, for the courtesy and ready help I have
uniformly received from them.
O. FRANKFURTER.
Oxford, February , 1883.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.
I. PALI LITERATURE.
Turnour, G. Examination of the Pali Buddhistical Annals.
J.A.S. of Bengal, 1837, 1838.
Westergaard, N. L. Codices Indici bibliothecae regioe
Havniensis enumerati et descripti. Copenhagen, 1846.
Hardy, Rev. R. S. List of Books in the Pali and Singha-
lese Languages. J.R.A.S. Ceylon Branch, 1848.
Alwis, J. dk. Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit, Pali, and
Sinhalese Literary Works of Ceylon. Colombo, 1870.
Zoysa, L. de. Catalogue of Pali, Sinhalese, and Sanskrit
Manuscripts in the Ceylon Government Oriental Library.
Colombo, 187 6.
Forchhammer, E., Professor of Pali, Rangoon High School.
Report by, for the year 1879-1880.
Davids, T. W. Rhys. Report on Pali and Sinhalese.
Transactions of the Philological Society, 1875-1876.
Feer, L. Les nouveaux Manuscripts Palis de la biblio-
thSque nationale. Annales de Textreme Orient, 1880.
Morris, Rev. Dr. Richard. Report on Pali Literature,
1875-1880. Transactions of the Philological Society,
1881.
Haas, E. Catalogue of Sanskrit and Pali Books in the
British Museum. London, 1876.
Trubner & Co. Catalogue of leading Books on Pali,
Prakrit, and Buddhist Literature. London, 1881.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
xvi
FALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.
II. TEXTS.
Yinaya Pitakam. One of the principal Buddhist Holy
Scriptures. Edited by Hermann Oldenberg. 5 vols.
London, 1879-1883.
Kammavaca.
Spiegel, F. Kammavakyam, liber de officiis
buddhicorum palice et latine edidit. Bonn,
1841.
Anecdota Palica. Chaps, ii. iii. v.
Leipzig, 1845.
Boehtlingk, 0. Bulletin de TAcademie Imperial©
des Sciences, 1844, No. 22, chap. iv.
Dickson, J. F. Upasampada Kammavaca. J.R. A.S.
1875.
The Pali Manuscript written on
Papyrus, preserved in the Library of the
Armenian Monastery, St. Lazaro. Venice,
1875. (This appears to be a reprint of the
preceding.)
Patimokkha.
Minayeff, J. Pratimoksha Sutra buddijskij sluzeb-
niku izdannyj i perevedennyj. Petersburg,
1869.
Dickson, J. F. Patimokkha, being the Buddhist
Office of the Confession of Priests. J.R.A.S.
1875.
Sutta Pitakam.
DIgha Nikaya.
Grimblot, P. Sept Suttas Palis, tires du DIgha
Nikaya. Paris, 1876.
Childers, R. C. Mahaparinibbanasutta. London,
1878.
Mahasatipatthanasutta. Maulmain, 1881.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
rALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.
XV 11
SUTTA PlTAKAM.
Samyutta Nikaya.
Feer^ H. L. Le Bhikkhuni Samyuttam. M^moires
de la Society d'Ethnographie, Sect. Orient,
1877.
Frankfurter, 0. Buddhist Nirvana and the Noble
Eightfold Path. J.R.A.S. 1880.
Majjhima Nikaya.
Pischel, R. Assalayanasuttam. Edited and trans-
lated. Chemnitz, 1880.
Angtjttara Nikaya.
Morris, Rev. Dr. R. Publications of the Pali Text
Society.
Khuddaka Nikaya.
Fausboll, Y. The Jataka, together with its Com-
mentary. Vols. i. and ii. London, 1877,
1879.
Two Jatakas ; the original Pali text,
etc. London.
Five Jatakas. Copenhagen, 1861.
Ten Jatakas. Copenhagen, 1872.
The Dasaratha Jataka. Copenhagen,
1874.
Zachariae, Th. Die sechszehnte Erzahlung des
Yetalapancavinfati. Contains the Umma-
dantl-jataka. B.B. iv. p. 375.
Weber, A., and Fausboll, Y. Die Sage von der
Entstehung des Sakya und Koliya Ge-
schlechtes. Indische Streifen i. Berlin,
1868.
Fausboll, Y. Dhammapadam, ex tribus codicibus
Havniensibus Palice edidit. Copenhagen,
1855.
Childers, R. C. Khuddaka Patha, with English
translation, etc. J.R.A.S. 1870.
Spiegel, F. Anecdota Palica. Leipzig, 1845.
Contains the Dragasutta of the Sutta Nipata.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
XV111
PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.
SUTTA PlTAKAM.
Khuddaka Nikaya.
Alwis, J. de. Buddhist Nirvana. Colombo, 1871.
Contains extracts from the Sutta Nipata.
Morris, Rev. R. Cariya Pitaka.
Buddhavamsa. (Publications of
the Pali Text Society.)
Feer, H. L. Textes tir£s du Kandjour. 11 livraisons.
Paris, 1864-1871.
Gray, J. Ajjhatta Jaya Mangalam. Rangoon, 1881.
Grimblot, P. Extraits du Paritta, texte et commentaire,
avec introduction, traduction, notes et notices par L£on
Feer. J.A. 1871.
Feer, H. L. E'tudes Buddhiques. J.A. 1870, etc.
Pirit Pota (i.e, Paritta). Colombo, 2411 (1869).
Mahaparitto. Rangoon, 1879.
Mahaparitto. Rangoon, 1881.
Mangalasutta. 2nd ed. Rangoon, 1881.
Mahavamso. In Pali and English, with an Introductory
Essay on Pali Buddhistical Literature. Yol. i. By
G. Tumour. Colombo, 1837.
From the 37th Chapter. Translated and edited
by H. Sumangala and Don Andris de Silva Batuwantu-
dawa. 2 vols. Colombo, 1877.
Dipavamsa. A Buddhist Historical Record. Edited, with
an English translation, by H. Oldenberg. London, 1879.
Dhammakitti. The Dathavamsa, the Pali text and its
translation into English. By Mutu Coom&ra Swamy.
London, 1874.
Hatthavanagallavamsa. The Attanagalluvansa. Trans-
lated from the Pali by J. &’ Alwis, with the Pali text.
Colombo, 1866.
Milindapanho. Being Dialogues between King Milinda
and the Buddhist Sage Nagasena. Edited by Y.
Trenckner. London, 1880.
ed by CjOO^Ic
PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.
XIX
III. TRANSLATIONS.
Clough, Rev. B. The Ritual of the Buddhist Priesthood.
Translated from the original Pali work entitled Karma-
vakya (Miscellaneous Translations from Oriental Writers,
vol. ii. London, 1834).
Beal, Rev. S., and Gogerly, Rev. D. J. Comparative
Arrangement of Two Translations of the Buddhist
Ritual for the Priesthood. London, 1862.
Davids, T. W. Rhys, and Oldenberg, H. Vinaya Texts.
Translated from the Pali. Part I. The Patimokkha ;
the Mahavagga. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of the
East, vol. xiii.)
Davids, T. W. Rhys. Buddhist Suttas. Oxford, 1881.
(Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi. Contains the Maha-
parinibbana Sutta, the Tevijja Sutta, the Mahasudassana
Sutta, the Dhammacakkappavattana Sutta, the Sabba-
sava Sutta.)
Buddhist Birth Stories, or Jataka
Tales. London, 1880.
Weber, A. Dhammapadam (Indische Streifen).
Muller, F. Max. Buddha’s Dhammapada. Translated
from Pali. (Buddhaghosha’s Parables. Translated from
Burmese by H. T. Rogers. London, 1870.)
Dhammapada ; a Collection of Verses,
translated from Pali. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of
the East, vol. x. part 1.)
Hu, Ferd. Dhammapadam traduit en Fran$ais, avec intro-
duction et notes. Paris, 1878.
Swamy, Sir M. Coomara. Sutta Nipata, or the Dialogues
of Gotama Buddha. Translated from the Pali, with
Introduction and Notes. London, 1874.
Fausboll, V. The Sutta Nipata ; a Collection of Discourses,
translated from Pali. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of
the East, vol. x. part 2.)
ed by CjOCK^Ic
XX
PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.
IY. DICTIONARIES, GRAMMARS, AND
GRAMMATICAL PAPERS.
Moggallana Thero, Abhidhanappadipika, with English
and Sinhalese Interpretations, etc. By Waskaduwe
Subhuti. Colombo, 1865.
Childers, R. C. A Dictionary of the Pali Language.
London, 1875.
Clough, B. A Compendious Pali Grammar, with a Copious
Vocabulary in the same Language. Colombo, 1824.
Burnouf, E., and Lassen, Chr. Essai sur le Pali. Paris,
1826.
Observations grammaticales sur quelques
passages de l’essai sur le Pali. Paris, 1827.
Storck, W. De declinatione nominum in lingua Palica.
Berlin, 1858.
Casuum in lingua Palica formatio. Miinster,
1862.
Muller, F. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Pali Sprache.
Vol8. i. ii. iii. Vienna, 1867-1869.
Minayeff, J. Grammaire Palie, traduite par St. Guyard.
Paris, 1874.
Kuhn, E. W. A. Beitrage zur Pali Grammatik. Berlin, 1875.
Tore, A. Die Flexion des Pali in ihrem Verhaltnis zum
Sanskrit. Christiania, 1881.
Trenckner, V. Pali Miscellany. Vol. i. London, 1879.
Goldschmidt, S. Prakritica. Strassburg, 1879.
Balavataro. Pandita Devarakkhitacariyena Samsodhito.
Colombo, 1869 [2412 a.b.].
Kaccayana.
Alwis, J. de. Introduction to Kaccayana’s Grammar
of the Pali Language. Colombo, 1863.
Kuhn, E. W. A. Kaccayanappakaranae specimen.
Halle, 1869.
„ „ specimen
alterum. Halle, 1871.
ed by CjOO^Ic
PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.
xxi
Ka CCA YANA.
Mason, F. The Pali Text of Kachchayano’s Grammar,
with English Annotations. Toongoo, 1871.
Sen art, E. Kaccayana et la literature grammaticale
du Pali. 1” Partie. Paris, 1871.
SIlavamsa. Kaccayana’s Dhatumanjusa. Edited, with
a translation in Sinhalese and English, by Deva-
rakkhita. Colombo, 1872.
Waskaduwe Subhuti. Namamala, or a Work on Pali
Grammar. Ceylon, 1876.
Sumangala. Declension and Conjugation of Pali Words.
Edited by M. Gunaratana. Ceylon, 1873.
Sangharakkhita Thera. Subodhalankara. (Pali Studies,
by Major G. E. Fryer.) Calcutta, 1875.
Yuttodaya. Edited, with trans-
lation and notes, by Major G. E. Fryer. Calcutta, 1877*
Yuttodaya, die Pali Metrik des
herausgegeben von J. Minayeff. Melanges Asia-
tiques, vi.
Childers, R. C. On Sandhi in Pali. J.R.A.S. n.s. iv.
p. 309.
Dakkh in Pali. K.B. viii. p. 150.
The Prakrit Dekkh. K.B. vii. p. 450.
Pischel, R. Die wurzeln pekkh, dakkh und dekkh in
Prakrit. K.B. vii. p. 453.
Weber, A. Zur Yerstandigung. K.B. vii. p. 458.
Pischel, R. Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiii. p. 423.
Jacobi, H. Yocaleinschub in Pali. K.Z. xxiii. p. 594.
Zimmer, H. Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiv. p. 220.
Oldenberg, H. Bemerkungen zur Paligrammatik. K.Z.
xxv. p. 314.
Goldschmidt, S. Prakritische Miscellen. K.Z. xxv.
pp. 436, 610. Z.D.M.G. xxxii. p. 99.
Pischel, R. Pali acchati. B.B. iii. p. 155.
Die de9lcabdas bei Trivikrama. B.B. iii.
p. 255.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.
abl. = ablative.
acc. = accusative.
adj.= adjective.
adv. = adverb.
aor.=aorist.
atm.=atmane.
caus. = causative,
comp., cp.= compare,
cond. = conditional,
conj. =con j unction.
dat.= dative.
f.=fem.
foil. = folio wing.
fr. = from.
fut.= future,
gen. = genitive.
ger.= gerund.
Imperat. = Imperative,
inf. = infinitive,
instr. = instrumental.
loc.= locative.
ra.= masculine.
n. = neuter.
num.= numeral,
opt. = optative.
p. f. p. = participle of the
future passive,
p. p.= participle present.
p p.p.=participle of the per-
fect passive.
par.=parasmai.
part. = particle.
pa88.= passive.
pers.=person.
pe=peyyalo, etc.
pi. = plural,
prep. = preposition.
pres. = present.
pret. = preterite,
sep. = separately,
sing. = singular.
I. t.= technical term.
voc. = vocative.
J. A.= Journal Asiatique.
J. R. A. S. = Journal of the
Royal Asiatic Society.
B. B. = Bezzenberger, bei-
trage sur kunde der indo-
germanischen sprachen.
K. B.= Kuhn’s Beitrage.
K.Z = Kuhn’s zeitschrift fiir
vergleichende sprachfor-
schung.
Z. D. M. G. = Zeitschrift d.
deutschen raorgenlan-
dischen gesellschaft.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
PART I.
A N ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR.
§ 1. THE ALPHABET.
Pali, the sacred language of the Buddhists, is written,
according to the countries from which the MSS. come, either
in Sinhalese (Ceylon), Burmese (Burma), or Kambodian
(Siam) characters. The system of writing in the original
characters is syllabic and consonantal (as will be seen from
the appended table).
To transliterate these characters the following system is
now mostly adopted :
Vowels : a a
a
u u e
0
Nasal vowels: am
im
um
Consonants : k
kh
9 gh
hy
c
ch
j jh
£
t
th
d (I) dh
(M) &
t
th
d ' dh
n>
P
ph
b bh
m
y
r
l V
8
h
§ 2. PRONUNCIATION.
The vowels are pronounced in the Continental way. The
short a has mostly the indistinct sound as in English but .
The nasal vowels are now pronounced in Ceylon and Burma
l
ed by CjOCK^Ic
2
rALI GRAMMAR.
like the guttural nasal in English hang . e and o are
metrically always long, but 'pronounced short before two
consonants.
The consonants are pronounced in the manner known from
Sanskrit grammar.
c is English ch.
h is the Spanish n and French ng in campagne.
v is pronounced as English or French v, except when
preceded by a consonant in the same syllable, in which case
it has the sound of English w.
The aspirated letters, surd and sonant, are pronounced as
the corresponding non-aspirates followed by h .
The sound of the nasal is defined by the letter which
follows it, cf. English hang , hand , bench , hemp .
§ 3. CLASSIFICATION OF LETTERS.
All the vowels and consonants are arranged by the native
grammarians under the following classes : —
1) a k kh g gh h and h are considered gutturals (kanthaja).
2) i c chj jh n and y are termed palatals ( taluja ).
3) u p ph b bh m are termed labials ( otthaja ).
4) t th d (/) dh {lh) n r are termed linguals ( muddhaja ). 1
5) t th d dh n l are termed dentals (< dantaja ).
6) e is termed gutturo-palatal (kanthataluja).
7) o is termed gutturo-labial (kanthotthaja).
8) v is termed dento-labial (dantotthaja ) .
§ 4. TOWELS.
1) Pali being one of the Indian dialects, is best con-
sidered in comparison with one of those dialects of which the
grammar is already firmly established, viz. Sanskrit.
1 In the Sacred Books of the East, edited by Prof. Max Muller, the palatals
are printed, like gutturals, in italics, and the cerebrals likewise as dentals in
italics, thus : k kh g gh n, t th d dh n.
This transliteration seems to imply that the palatals arise always from the
gutturals, and that they stand in the same relation to these as the linguals stand to
the dentals. This is, however, not the case in Pali.
The system adopted in this handbook is used in most of the texts published up to
the present time, such as Dr. Oldenherg’s edition of the Yinayapitaka, Prof.
Fausboll’s Jataka, and also in Childers’s Dictionary of the Pali Language.
ed by CjOO^Ic
SHORT VOWELS.
3
2) In comparing Pali with Sanskrit forms, it must always
be kept in mind that Sanskrit is not to be regarded as the
parent language: but as the dialect which best represents
the primitive Aryan speech, to which Sanskrit and Pali stand
in the relation of elder and younger sisters.
In comparing the Pali vowels with those of Sanskrit, we
find that Pali has no written characters for the r and l vowels.
It has not the diphthongs ai au, and lacks the long nasal
vowels.
We find therefore in Pali three short vowels a i u , and five
long vowels a i u e o, and three nasal vowels am im um, which
are also considered long, and which are technically called
niggahlta.
As to the accent, which plays such a conspicuous part in
Yedic Sanskrit, no accented texts have been handed down.
It is, however, clear that Pali possessed a free accent
just as much as Sanskrit, and every other Aryan language.
It is now the fashion in Ceylon and Burma to give the accent
to the long syllable in every word.
A syllable is considered long, if it contains one
of the long, or nasal vowels, or a short vowel
followed by two consonants.
A Pali word may only end in a vowel or nasal vowel.
For exceptions see the chapter on Sandhi.
§ 5. SHORT YOWELS.
In comparing the Pali vowels with those of Sanskrit, it will
be seen that the short vowels a i u correspond as a rule to
those of Sanskrit.
A short vowel followed by two consonants corresponds to
a Sanskrit long vowel ; thus we have : — maggo Skr. marga
‘path’; majjaro Skr. marjara ‘cat’ ; ratti Skr. ratri ‘night’;
saddhim Skr. sardham ‘ with 9 ; ikkhati Skr. Ikshati ‘ to
look ’ ; kitti Skr. klrti ‘ fame ’ ; tittham Skr. tlrtha ‘ landing-
place ’ ; dhutto Skr. dhurta ‘ gamester ’ ; muttam Skr. mutra
‘ urine ’ ; mttam Skr. sutra.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
4
PALI GRAMMAR.
An original long vowel following a simple consonant
can arbitrarily be shortened by doubling the consonant.
This seems only to be graphic, as in the metre no difference
is made between a form bahunnam and bahunam , gen. plur.
m. and n. of balm ‘ much/ or allapo and alapo ‘ speech/
In the gen. plur. m. and n. of the numerals tinnam pancan -
nam channam the forms with doubled nasals are in use.
The syllable ya is changed to i. Among the examples
given is nigrodho for Skr. nyagrodba, majjhimo for Skr.
madhyamd. The process called samprasarana.
In the same way va is contracted into u in such words as
latukikd Skr. latvaka ‘ quail/
§ 6. Pali has, as was shown above, no written character
corresponding to the Sanskrit r and l vowels.
It is a well-known fact that those two vowels originate in
Sanskrit and other languages for the most part through the
abbreviation of a syllable which contains an r or / through
the influence of the accent.
Theoretically, therefore, one would expect to find in Pali
a short syllable containing an r or l element. This r or l
element may be inherent in the vowel. We find a whole
syllable with the consonant r to represent the Sanskrit vowel.
r, practically speaking, therefore, is represented in Pali by
one of the short vowels a i u or by the consonant r in con-
junction with one of the vowels a i u , which in this case are
vowel fractures (svarabhakti).
There is no fixed rule for the use of these vowels, and in
different, sometimes in the same, texts, they are used in-
differently in the case of the same word, and the divergency
in the use of these vowels shows that they were employed in
a merely tentative way to indicate the sound in writing.
1) a=r in kato Skr. krta ‘ made ’ ; ganhati Skr. grhnati ‘ to
seize ’ ; mato Skr. mrtd ‘ dead * ; tanha Skr. trshna * lust/
2) i—r in isi Skr. rshi ‘a sage* ; kicco Skr. krtyd ‘ what is to be
done , ; pittham pitlhi Skr. prshtha ‘back * ; inarn Skr. rnd ‘debt/
3) M=r in samvuto Skr. samvrtd ‘restrained’; uju Skr. rju
‘ straight/
4) r=r in iritvijo Skr. rtvij ‘a priest’; iru Skr. rc ‘hymn’;
ed by CjOO^Ic
LONG VOWELS.
5
bruheti Skr. brmhayati ‘ to increase ’ ; braha Skr. brhdnt
‘ great 9 ; rukkho Skr. vrkshd * tree/
5) r—a or i or u in the same word :
migo mago Skr. mrga ‘ antelope 9 ; accho ikko Skr. rksha
‘bear*; pathavi puthuvi Skr. prthivi ‘earth*; sati samuti Skr.
smrti ‘ thought 9 ; vuddhi vaddhi Skr. vrddhi ‘ increase/
The long r vowel is of later development in Sanskrit, and
has therefore no equivalent in Pali. ^
The so-called root klip, the only one which contains an
l vowel, in Sanskrit becomes kappati.
§ 7. In comparing Pali words with corresponding Sanskrit,
in several instances a difference in the vowels is to be found.
This is generally the case in unaccented syllables,
and the reason for such a practice lies in assimila-
tion. In several instances, however, words are used with
both vowels.
muti mati Skr. mati ‘ mind 9 ; pana puna Skr. punar ; puriso
puruso Skr. purusha ‘ man 9 ; acchu Skr. ikshu ‘ sugar-cane/
Pukkuso Skr. Pukkaja ; Kondanno Skr. Kaundinya ;
candima Skr. candr&mas ‘ moon 9 ; saddhim Skr. sardham ;
jigucchati Skr. jugupsati * to dislike * ; timisarn tamisam
Skr. tamisra ‘ darkness 9 ; Timihgalo Timihgilo Skr. Timingila ;
nitthubhati nutthubhati Skr. nishthiv * to spit out 9 ; muca-
lindo Skr. mucilinda ‘ a tree 9 ; ayasma Skr. ayushmant
‘ venerable 9 ; kutumbam kutimbam Skr. kutumba ‘ family/
Where a difference in the vowel takes place in conjunction
with one of the semivowels or nasals, the vowels only desig-
nate a partial vowel, such as in gam Skr. guru, Greek /3apv.
§ 8. LONG YOWELS.
The long vowels a l u agree with the corresponding
Sanskrit, with the exception above stated, that a long vowel
followed by two consonants is represented in Pali by
a short one.
1) a: a= a ‘the prep. , sadhu Skr. sadhu ‘good’; data
Skr. datr ‘ giver/
2) I : iti Skr. Iti 6 calamity 9 ; gitam Skr. glta 4 a song ’ ;
jicitam Skr. j I vita ‘life/
ed by CjOO^Ic
6
PALI GRAMMAR.
3) u : uno Skr. una ‘ deficient ’ ; supo Skr. supa ‘ broth ’ ;
mulho Skr. mudha ‘ foolish/
§ 9. The long vowels e and o correspond to the Skr. diph-
thongs e and o, and sometimes to the diphthongs at au.
They combine therefore guna and vrddhi of i and u, and
they go back to these vowels accordingly, before a compound
consonant.
1) e: *ti Skr. eti ‘he goes’; ekam Skr. eka ‘one’; hetu
Skr. hetu ‘cause/
jeguccho ‘ contemptible ’ goes back to jiguccha ; kelaso
‘ suffering from a cutaneous complaint ’ to kilaso.
ediso eriso edikkho erikkho ‘ such ’ to idam.
gelannam ‘ sickness ’ to gilano, in which, however, the i is
svarabhakti for Skr. glana,
2) E=Skr. ai :
Eravam Skr. Airavana.
etihyam Skr. aitihya ‘ traditional instruction/
ekagariko Skr. aikagarika ‘ a thief/
3) aya is contracted to e in the middle of a word ; katheti=
kathayati ‘ to relate ’ ; jeti—jayati ‘ to conquer/
4) e arises out the contraction of avi in e.g . thero Skr.
sthavira ‘ an elder/
1) o: okam Skr. okas ‘a house’; ojo Skr. ojas ‘splendour’;
lobho ‘ covetousness ’ from lubhati Skr. lobha ‘ to be greedy ’ ;
moho Skr. moho ‘ delusion ’ ; doso Skr. dosha ‘ blemish/
pothujjaniko ‘ belonging to an unconverted person,’
puthujjano ; this latter stands for Skr. prthak. A form
puthujjaniko 9 however, is also given.
2) o=Skr. au :
opammam Skr. aupamya ‘comparison.’
orabbhiko Skr. aurabhrika ‘ a shepherd.’
odariko and odaro Skr. audarika ‘ greedy/
3) ava is contracted to o in the beginning of a word ; the
fuller form is almost always also in use: otaro and avataro
‘ descent ’ ; okdro avakaro ‘ vileness.’
4) o sometimes arises from the vocalisation of v and its
combinations with d as hoti=.bhavati and dhovati Skr.
\/dhav ‘ to wash/
ed by CjOO^Ic
CONSONANTS.
7
§ 10. THE NASAL VOWELS.
The nasal of every class, if preceded by a vowel, may
arbitrarily become niggahita. They correspond in every
respect to Sanskrit.
For a nasalized vowel, a simple long one can be substituted:
siho ‘lion’ for Skr. simha; visati Skr. vimfati. sam very
often becomes sa : sarago ' possessed of passion/
Every one of the five nasals can, before any other con-
sonant or nasal, become niggahita. The MSS. vary greatly
in the expression of the nasals : amho, anno, ‘ other/ pamha ,
panha and panha 'question/ In very many cases the long
vowel and the nasalized vowel appear in the same word.
In later texts a short vowel is often nasalized : nagaram
becomes nahgaram. This seems, however, a mistake of the
Sinhalese copyists.
§ 11. INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS.
By the side of bhiyo bhiytyo— Skr. bhuyas we find yebhuyyo
yebhuyo, which is a contraction of yad+ bhuyas.
Skr. a appears as u in the last part of such compounds as
addhagu katahhu, which stand respectively for Skr. adhvaga
and krtajila.
In merayam 'intoxicating liquor/ Skr. maireya, second e
appears in Pali as d. In milakkho Skr. mleccho the Pali
preserves the older form. It stands for mlaska.
We sometimes find the gunated forms of words in Pali by
the side of Sanskrit ungunated.
§ 12. CONSONANTS.
The consonants are divided by the native grammarians
into ghosava ' sounding/ and aghosa ' surd/ They are : —
Ghosa va : g, gh, h ; j, jh, n ; d, dh , n ; d, dh, n ; b, bh, m ;
y, r, l, v, h.
Aghosa : k, kh ; c , ch ; t, th ; t, th ; p, ph ; s.
The simple consonants of Pali mostly agree with those of
Sanskrit and the other Indo-European languages.
ed by CjOO^Ic
8
PALI GRAMMAR.
The Gutturals, Palatals, Linguals, Dentals, Labials, as well
as the semivowels and « and A, correspond in Sanskrit and
Pali.
Pali possesses all the consonants of Sanskrit, with the excep-
tion of the palatal and lingual sibilant; the last of which is even
in Sanskrit of late origin, and occurs only in the numeral
8hash and its derivatives, and in a few words in conjunction
with the linguals according to phonetic rules. The dental
sibilant 8 takes the place of the three sibilants of Sanskrit.
However, the aspirated surd palatal is found in, e g .
chakam Skr. 9 akrt ‘ dung ' ; ehdpo Skr. cava ‘ young of an
animal 9 ; chaco Skr. §ava ‘ a corpse. 1
Skr. shash, which goes back to a form svaks, is represented
in Pali by the form cha and dial.
§ 13. PHONETIC CHANGES.
None of the changes pervades the whole grammar ; they
only take place optionally, and can scarcely be called con-
sistent. In most instances the leading motive for the change
is euphony or false analogy; in many instances also two
forms occur, of which one preserves intact the form known
from Sanskrit grammar.
General Remarks.
1) For Skr. mleccha Pali has milakkho ‘a stranger/ Here
the Pali form is the older one, just as in bhisakko Skr. bhishaj
‘ physician/
2) Palatals, in conjunction with one of the semivowels
y , v, become sometimes dentals.
3) Cerebrals l , /A, can optionally be substituted for d, dh,
in the middle of a word between vowels, the difference only
being graphic, e.g.
khidda kila Skr. krlda ‘ play 9 ; mulho mudho Skr. mudha
‘foolish'; dalho Skr. drdha ‘firm/
4) Through the influence of r, vowel or consonant, and
8 and A, the dentals are sometimes made cerebrals, e.g .
dahati Skr. \/dah ‘ to burn 9 ; daddho Skr. dagdhd ‘ burnt/
ed by CjOO^Ic
PHONETIC CHANGES.
9
ha to Skr. hrta ‘ seized ’ ; pati Skr. prati ‘ to/
upatthapanam Skr. upasthapana ‘ providing/
5) lz=d is substituted sometimes for n, e.g. mulalo Skr.
mrnala ‘ lotus-fibre 9 ; vein venu Skr. venu * bamboo/
6 ) An interchange between d and r takes places, e.g . in
ekadasa ekarasa ‘ eleven , ; ediso eriso ‘ such/
7) The mutes of one class are occasionally used for the
mutes of another :
Pakudho and Kakudho .
kipilliko and kipillako Skr. pipllika ‘ ant/
gadduhano Skr. dadrughna ‘ good for leprosy/
takkollam Skr. kakkola ‘ bdellium/
samputito sahkutito sahkucito from Skr. \/kut or \/kuc
‘shrivelled * ; cikicchati and tikicchati Skr. cikits ‘to care';
jighaccha dighaccha Skr. jighatsa ‘ hunger/
8 ) For sonants the surds appear : —
patu Skr. pradur (in comp.).
akilasu Skr. aglasnu ‘ healthy/
chakalo Skr. chagala ‘ a he-goat/
palikho paligho Skr. parigha ‘ an iron beam/
mudihgo mutihgo Skr. mrdanga ‘ a kettle-drum/
thakam Skr. sthagana ‘ covering/
chdpo Skr. 9 a va ‘ young of an animal/
paldpo Skr. palava ‘ chaff/ perhaps through the influence
of paldpo Skr. pralapa ‘ nonsense/
avapurati and apdpurati Skr. ava+ \/ vr ‘to open/ Several
derivatives of sad show t in the place of d .
9) An interchange between surd and sonants takes
place, e.g. :
Sagala Skr. Qakala ; elamugo Skr. edamuka ‘ deaf and
dumb/
Nighandu Skr. Nighantu.
For the cerebral t in such instances l appears, e.g.
alaviko Skr. atavika ‘ dwelling in forests 9 ; cakkavalam and
cakkabalo for Skr. cakravata and cakrabala.
10) We find v interchanged with p in the same word, and
vice versd. This last change seems only graphic, e.g.
kavi kapi Skr. kapi ‘ a monkey/
ed by CjOO^Ic
10
PALI GRAMMAR.
11) A change takes place sometimes between the sonant
aspirates, for which the aspirate h is substituted.
lahu laghu Skr. laghu ‘ light ’ ; hoti by the side of bhavati
Skr. bhavati ; but also idha and iha for Skr. iha ‘ hither/
where the original form is, perhaps, preserved in Pali.
12) n and l are frequently interchanged in Pali, e.g.
nangalam lahgalam Skr. langala ‘a plough’; pilandhanam
Skr. pinaddha ‘ an ornament.’
Semivowels.
1) y is inserted in a word to avoid hiatus after a consonant
has been elided between two vowels, e.g . khayito P.P.P. from
khadati Skr. \/khad ‘ to eat ’ ; sayaniyo from sayati for Skr.
svadate ‘ to taste.’
For the same reason it appears as if y was interchangeable
with v in such words as avuso voc. to ayasma, where it stands
for auso.
2) y is interchangeable with r in antararati and antarayati
‘ to run into danger ’ Skr. antaraya ‘ danger, impediment ’ ;
naharu Skr. snayu ‘ a sinew.’
3) r is interchangeable with /, e.g. taluTio taruno Skr. taruna
‘ tender ’ ; cottalisafn cattarisam Skr. catvarim 9 at ‘ forty ’ ;
further in some of the numerals where r is interchanged with
d, telasa terasa and tedasa Skr. trayodagan ‘thirteen.’ jaldbu
corresponds to Skr. jarayu ‘womb ’ ; halidyabho haliddo and
hari correspond to Skr. haridrabha and hari ‘ yellow.’
4) Purindado , an epithet of Indra, corresponds to a Skr.
Purandara, the change being due to false etymology, just as
i a palibodho ‘obstacle/ where two roots have been confounded.
5) For r is substituted occasionally, and the former is
generally the original sound : kira Skr. kila ‘ they say ’ ;
arammanam Skr. alambana ‘ support, basis ’ ; aranjaro Skr.
alinjara ‘ waterpot.’
6) We find / for Skr. d in bubbulam budbuda ‘a bubble.’
Nasals.
The MSS. greatly vary in the expression of the nasals.
No fixed rules can therefore be given, as also the native
ed by CjOO^Ic
COMPOUND CONSONANTS.
11
grammarians are at variance in this respect. It may,
however, be stated that r, h and s cerebralize a dental nasal,
which then is interchangeable with the palatal nasal.
§ 14. COMPOUND CONSONANTS.
In the beginning of every Pali word only vowels, simple
consonants, or consonants in conjunction with the semivowels
y , v , r, occur. Assimilation is the commonest means of effecting
this change. This assimilation, of course, considerably alters
the shape of a word, and therefore, when a word commences
with a vowel or simple consonant in Sanskrit, in Pali also
a vowel or simple consonant appears; whereas, if a double
consonant, otherwise than in conjunction with y, r, v, com-
mences a word, the corresponding word in Pali takes a
different form.
The same rules which apply to the beginning of a word
also apply to the middle of a word. Here, also, conjunct
consonants, belonging to different classes, are avoided
through the help of assimilation, or through the insertion
of a vowel.
The rules of assimilation apply to the beginning of a word
as well as to the middle, and if, at the beginning of a word,
a simple consonant is exhibited, the word takes in com-
position always the two sounds from which the simple sound
originated.
The chief rule for assimilation is, that of two consonants
the former is entirely assimilated to the latter. The two
sounds , if the one was a surd , the other a sonant , are assimilated
(viz. the final letter is assimilated to the following initial ) ;
a perfect assimilation takes place , so that the two sounds
are not only made to belong to one class, but also to the
same order . In Pali itself it will be sufficient if the last of
these processes is pointed out, as the first has taken place in
common with other Indian dialects, anterior to the
fixing of the Pali language.
A second means of avoiding conjunct consonants was the
insertion of a vowel between two letters. This could only
ed by CjOCK^Ic
12
TALI GRAMMAR.
take place when one of the letters was a semivowel or a nasal,
in either of which the part of a vowel (svarabhakti) is
already inherent.
It remains now to consider the Phonetic changes which
take place in the word itself :
1) It is self-evident that when two consonants belonging
to the same class meet together, they are preserved intact, e.g.
cittam Skr. citta ‘ mind, thought ’ ; lajja Skr. lajja ‘ shame 9 ;
annam Skr. anna ‘ food/
2) Mutes + Mutes are Assimilated.
k+t =tt lattakam Skr. laktaka ‘a red dye’; mutta Skr.
mukta ‘pearl 9 ; mutto Skr. mukta ‘ released/
k+th^tth sittham Skr. siktha ‘bee’s wax’; sat t hi Skr.
sakthi ‘ thigh/
g-\-dh—ddh duddho Skr. dugdha ‘milked/
g+bh=bbh pabbharo Skr. pragbhara ‘a cave/
d+g =gg sagguno Skr. sadguna ‘good quality’; puggalo
Skr. pudgala ‘ individual/
d+gh—ggh ngghoso Skr. udghosha ‘proclamation’; uggharati
Skr. ud+\/ghr ‘to open.’
d+b =bb bubbulam Skr. budbuda ‘a bubble.’
d+bh=bbh abbhuto Skr. adbhuta ‘ wonderful, mysterious/
p-\-t -=tt tatto Skr. tapta ‘ burnt.’
b+j —jj khujjo Skr. kubja ‘limping.’
b+d = dd saddo Skr. 9 abda ‘ sound/
b+dh—ddh laddho Skr. labdha ‘ taken/
3) Mutes+ Nasals.
k +w
k +m
9 +n
gh + n
ASSIMILATION.
sakkoti
rumma
naggo Skr. nagnd
‘ naked ’
aggi
aggha Skr. aghnat ‘ not
killing.’
SVARABHAKTI.
sakunati Skr. faknoti ‘to be
able/
rukuma Skr. rukma ‘ gold.’
aggini gini Skr. agni ‘ fire.’
ed by CjOO^Ic
SEMIVOWELS.
13
ASSIMILATION. 8VARABHAKTI.
j -\-n anna Skr. ajna. ‘ command/
nati Skr. jnati ‘kinsman/
d +m kudumalo Skr. kudmala ‘an
opening bud/
t +n sappatto Skr. sapatna
‘hostile/ ratanam Skr. ratna ‘jewel/
gahapatani Skr. grhapatnl
‘ housewife/
t +m atta atumd Skr. atman ‘self/
th mattho Skr. mathna
‘ shaking/
d +m chaddam Skr. chadman
‘ roof/ padumam Skr. padma ‘ lotus/
dh+m idhumam Skr. idhma ‘fire-
wood/
p +n pappoti papunati Skr. prapnoti ‘he
obtains/
4) Nasal + surd remains mostly unchanged.
However, by the side of amba Skr. amba ‘mother/ we
have amnia, and by the side of panca ‘ five/ pannasa and
j oannasa Skr. pancafat ‘ fifty/ where the nn is probably due
to the influence of s.
Further, bhanako ‘a jar 9 by the side of bhandakam
‘ a utensil 9 Skr. bhanda.
5) Of two nasals the first is assimilated to the second, e g. :
ninnam Skr. nimna ‘ depth/
iammam Skr. janman ‘birth/
Semivowels.
6) No fixed rules can be given, y, after gutturals, palatals,
labials, and the sibilant 8, is either preserved or assimilated,
always so that the semivowel is assimilated to the preceding
consonant (not as is the case with mutes in conjunction with
mutes where the first sound is assimilated to the second) or
a vowel is inserted between the mutes and the semivowel.
An example will suffice :
Sakiyo Sakyo Sakko Skr. Qakya.
ed by CjOO^Ic
14
PALI GRAMMAR.
7) j is made through the influence of y arbitrarily a dental
in dosino Skr. jyotsna * a moonlit night/ but we have also
junha ; daddallati Skr. jajvalyate ‘ to blaze/
jya and jiya Skr. jya ‘ a bowstring/
8) The preposition abhi before vowels becomes abbha. We
have, of course, simple assimilation. Is gheppati pass, to
\/grah ‘to take 9 = Skr. grbhyateP
9) Iq conjunction with the sibilants we have :
alasiyam alasyam alassam Skr. alasya ‘ sloth/
8dlo Skr. 9 yala ‘ brother-in-law/
10) The dentals in conjunction with y are palatalized or
kept intact.
c and ch sometimes represent the surd dentals when
followed by y and /, and jh, the sonant dentals in con-
junction with y. The dental nasal +y is also palatalized,
becoming nn.
The preposition adhi before vowels becomes ajjha ; ati in
the same way acc ; iti ‘thus’ becomes icc. A form atyappo , is
of frequent occurrence, this form, however, only shows i=y
before a vowel.
Other examples are :
paccuso Skr. pratyusha ‘ dawn 9 ; sacco Skr. satya ‘ true 9 ;
cago Skr. tyaga ‘ abandoning J ; majjam Skr. madya ‘ strong
drink’; majjho Skr. madhya < middle , 5 hajjo Skr. hrdya ‘dear/
11) r, in conjunction with y, is either assimilated or both
letters are preserved intact with intervening vowel. If
assimilation takes place, r is always assimilated to y, thus
we find yy, not rr, which never occurs in Pali.
Cpr. ariyo and ayyo Skr. arya and arya ‘ noble/
bhariya and bhayya Skr. bharya ‘ wife/
kariyo and kayyo Skr. karya ‘ that ought to be done/
12) In a few instances r+y is assimilated to ll, as in
pallahko Skr. paryanka ‘ couch/
13) l+y is either preserved or y is assimilated to I =11.
kalyano and kallano Skr. kalyana ‘ fortunate/
sallo Skr. $alya ‘ an arrow ’ ; nallako Skr. 9 alyaka ‘ a
porcupine/
14) tf+y is differently treated if it begins a word or if it
is in the middle of a word.
ed by CjOO^Ic
SEMIVOWELS.
15
vy, according to Burmese and Siamese manuscripts, be-
comes by, whilst the Sinhalese write vy throughout at the
beginning of a word, vyamo or byamo Skr. vyama 'a fathom/
This is often assimilated to v : mlo Skr. vyala ‘ snake/
In the middle of a word it is either written by, vy, or
with assimilation bb, or, though less frequently, yy .
From kavi ( a wise man, a poet/ kabbam and kavyam Skr.
kavya ' poetry/
pattabbo , but also pattayyo and pattabyo Skr. praptavya
' attainable/
The preposition vi becomes by before vowels.
15) h+y appears as yh , just as for h+v, the metathesis vh
takes place. Besides this, we have assimilation and svarabhakti.
asayho Skr. asahya ' unendurable/ The participle P.P.
from lehati is leyyo Skr. lehya ‘ to lick ' ; hiyo and hiyyo
appear for Skr. hyas ' yesterday/
16) r before gutturals, palatals, cerebrals, dentals, labials
and the sibilant s is mostly assimilated.
saggo Skr. svarga ' heaven ' ; digho Skr. dirgha ' long/ but
digghika ‘ an oblong pond 9 ; maggo Skr. marga ‘ path ’ ;
kakkatako Skr. karkataka ‘ a crab/ In sakkhara Skr. 9 arkara
* a potsherd/ we find aspiration.
accati Skr. \/arc * to honour 9 ; ajjavam Skr. arjava ‘ recti-
tude 9 ; maijaro Skr. marjara ‘ a cat 9 ; nijjaro Skr. nirjara
* free from decay'; khajju Skr. kharju 'itching'; gajjati
Skr. \/gaij ‘ to roar ' ; mucchd Skr. murcha 'fainting.'
pakinnako Skr. prakirnaka ' miscellaneous ' ; unno Skr. urna
' wool ' ; vanno Skr. varna ' colour.'
Before dentals assimilation takes place, and the dental is
sometimes altered to a cerebral. The MSS., however, differ
greatly in the use of dental and cerebral letters.
We have kitti Skr. klrti 'fame'; kevatto Skr. kaivarta
' fisherman ' ; vattati and vattati Skr. \/vrt ; addho and addho
Skr. ardha ' half.'
sappo Skr. sarpa ' a snake ' ; tappati Skr. y/trp ' to be
glad ' ; gabbho Skr. garbha ' womb ' ; dabbho Skr. darbha
' kufa grass ' ; dharnmo Skr. dharma ' law ' ; kammam Skr.
karman ' action ' ; Nammada Skr. Narmada ' Nerbudda.'
ed by CjOO^Ic
16
PALI GRAMMAR.
17) r+t?=W: nibbanarn Skr. nirvana (a technical term) ;
gabbo Skr. garva * pride ’ ; pabbato Skr. parvata * mountain ’ ;
ubbi ‘ earth 9 Skr. urvl.
18) r+A. In this combination both letters are preserved
with or without an inserted vowel: araha Skr. arhant; tarahi
tarhi Skr. tarhi ‘ then 9 ; garahati Skr. \/garh ‘ to blame/
19) If r follows gutturals, it is either assimilated or a
vowel is inserted, and both letters are preserved. In case of
assimilation the guttural is optionally aspirated.
cakkam Skr. cakra ‘a wheel 9 ; akkodho Skr. akrodha ‘mild-
ness 9 ; kujjhati Skr. \/krudh ‘ to be angry 9 ; gahati Skr.
Vgrah ‘ to take 9 ; ghdyati Skr. yj ghra ‘ to smell 9 ; aggo Skr.
agra ‘first’; kiriya kriya Skr. kriya ; khidda kila Skr. krida
‘ play/
20) For r followed by a palatal cpr. vajiro Skr. vajra
‘thunderbolt/ and pajiro Skf. pajra ‘firm/
21) Dentals followed by r are either assimilated or preserved
intact, r sometimes aspirates a preceding dental. Optionally,
also, the dental is changed to a cerebral. many instances
we find three forms :
kutra, kuttha , kutta Skr. kutra ‘ where 9 ; gattam Skr. gatra
‘ limb ’ ; mttu satthu Skr. 9 atru ‘ enemy 9 ; bhadro bhaddo Skr.
bhadra ‘ good 9 ; giddho Skr. grdhra ‘greedy’; Damilo Skr.
Dravida ; dravo davo Skr. drava ‘ liquid ’ ; chuddho khuddho
Skr. kshudra ‘ mean/
22) After labials, r is assimilated: pati Skr, prati (a prep.) ;
pa Skr. pra (in compos.) ; pano Skr. prana ‘ breath 9 ; piyo
Skr. priya ‘ dear ’ ; bhamo Skr. bhrama ‘ whirling 9 ; sappanno
Skr. sa+prajna ‘ wise/
br is preserved in Brahma Skr. Brahman ; braviti Skr.
Vbru ‘to speak/
mr is assimilated in the beginning : makkheti Skr. \/mrksh
‘ to anoint’ ; miyyati miyati Skr. v/nar ‘ to die.’
For mr in the middle of a word, cfr. ambo Skr. amra ‘ the
mango tree ’ ; iambo Skr. tamra ‘ copper.’
23) in the beginning of a word is assimilated to v, in
the middle of a word it always becomes bb.
rajati Skr. \/vraj ‘ to walk ’ ; but pabbajati Skr. pra+ \/vraj
ed by CjOO^Ic
SEMIVOWELS.
17
‘to go forth ’ ; vajo Skr. vraja ‘a cow-pen ’ ; subbato Skr.
suyrata ‘ conscientious ’ ; tibbo Skr. tlvra ‘ sharp/
24) r, after sibilants, is assimilated :
savako Skr. fravako ‘ pupil, follower * ; sassu Skr. fvayru
* mother-in-law 9 ; assu Skr. a9ru ‘ a tear 9 ; sunoti Skr. /9m
‘to hear 9 ; asso Skr. a9ra ‘ corner’ ; assavo Skr. asrava ‘ dis-
charge ’ ; but siri Skr. qrl ‘ fortune/ with svarabhakti.
25) For h+r, cp. hiri Skr. hrl ‘ shame ’ ; ahirika Skr. ahrl
‘ shamelessness ’ ; rosso Skr. hrasva ‘ short ’ ; rahado Skr.
hrada ‘ a pool/
26) l is assimilated before gutturals and labials.
phaggu Skr. phalgu ‘ reddish/
appo Skr. alpa ‘little ’ ; kappo Skr. kalpa ‘ period of time ’ ;
jappo Skr. jalpa ‘ word, speech ’ ; goppho Skr. gulpha ‘ ancle/
27) Through metathesis gumbo Skr. gulma ‘ thicket ’ ;
simbaU Skr. 9almali ‘ cotton-tree/
28) For l+v cp. kibbisam Skr. kilvisha ‘fault’ ; billo, but
also beluvo Skr. bilva and bailava ‘ the vilva-tree ’ ; khallato
Skr. khalvata ‘ bald ’ ; pallalam Skr. palvala ‘ small tank.’
29) l after gutturals shows svarabhakti in kileso Skr. kle9a
‘ sin ’ ; kilissati Skr. \/kli9 ‘ to suffer ’ ; kilomakam Skr.
kloman 1 right lung ’ ; kilamati Skr. \Zhlarn ‘ to be tired ’ ;
gilano Skr. glana ‘ faded ’ ; and from this an abstract
gelannam is formed, see § 9. akilasu Skr. aglasnu ‘ healthy.’
Without svarabhakti kleso ‘ sin.’
30) For l after labials cp.
pilavo Skr. plava ‘ a kind of duck ’ ; pihakam Skr. pllhan
‘ spleen ’ ; piluvati and plavati Skr. \/plu ‘ to float ’ ; plavo
Skr. plava ‘ a raft.’
ambiio Skr. amla ‘sour’; milakkho Skr. mleccha ‘stranger.’
31) After r, / is assimilated in dullabho Skr. durlabha.
32) For l after sibilants cp.
siloko Skr. 9loka ‘ stanza ’ ; silesumo semho Skr. 9leshman
‘ phlegm ’ ; silittho Skr. 9lishta ‘ adhering ’ ; silaghd Skr.
9lagha ‘ praise ’ ; asilesa Skr. a9lesha ‘ name of a lunar
mansion.’
33) For h+l cp. hilddati, hilado , hilito Skr. \/hlad ‘to
be glad.’
2
ed by CjOO^Ic
18
PALI GRAMMAR.
34) v, in conjunction with gutturals in the middle of a
word is assimilated : thus pakko Skr. pakva ‘ cooked/ In the
beginning of a word, kathito Skr. \/kvath ‘ boiled.’
35) For v after palatals cp. jalati ‘to blaze,’ and the
intensive daddallati Skr. j&jvalyati.
36) v after cerebral: kinnam Skr. kinva ‘ yeast.’
37) V AFTER DENTALS.
1) t+ v : tvam, tuvam, tam Skr. tvam ‘thou’; tarati Skr.
\/tvar ; taco Skr. tvac ‘skin, bark.’ In cattaro Skr. catvaras
‘ four,’ and in ittaro Skr. itvara ‘ going,’ we have assimila-
tion. In caccaro Skr. catvara ‘ a court ’ v was changed into
y, which then palatalized the t. The gerundial suffixes
tvana and tva are mostly preserved, but sometimes tvana
is contracted into tuna. Iritvijo Skr. rtvij ‘an officiating
priest.’
2) d+v. dlpo Skr. dvlpa ‘an island’; doso Skr. dvesha
‘hatred’; saddalo Skr. cadvala ‘grassy.’ For Skr. dvi, as
separate numeral, the forms dve and duve occur; in com-
position, however, dvi, di, du and bd : barasa Skr. dvada 9 an
‘ twelve ’ ; bavisati Skr. dvavimjati.
3) dh+v=zdh: dhajo Skr. dhvaja ‘flag’; dhamseti corre-
sponds to Skr. \Zdhvams ‘to fall, to perish,’ and in composition
viddhamseti ; dhani Skr. dhvani ‘ sound ’ ; addha Skr. adhvan
‘ path.’
38) v after sibilants is mostly assimilated :
asso Skr. a§va ‘ horse ’ ; bhassaro Skr. bhasvara ‘ brilliant.’
In the beginning of a word sv is sometimes preserved. We
find also svarabhakti and assimilation, sami and mvami Skr.
svamin ‘ lord.’ «a Skr. fvan * dog,’ has the following forms
besides : sono, suno , sano, svano and suvano. svannam and
8orinam correspond to Skr. svarna ‘ gold.’ 8aggo Skr. svarga
‘ heaven, paradise,’ but the adjective sovaggiko . sve, sure Skr.
jvas * yesterday ’ ; sotthi and suvatthi Skr. svasti ‘ health.’
39) Through metathesis h+v has become vh in jivha Skr.
jihva ‘tongue ’ ; savhayo Skr. sahvya ‘ called, named.’
gabbharam Skr. gahvara ‘ cavern.’
40) Sibilants in conjunction with the surd letters.
Following or preceding the surds, the sibilants are always
ed by CjOO^Ic
SIBILANTS.
19
assimilated ; mostly an aspiration of this combination takes
place.
Skr. ksh becomes kkh and cch ; some of the words exhibit
both forms. Skr. shk and sk =kkh.
1) cakkhu Skr. cakshus ‘ eye ’ ; Rakkhaso Skr. Rakshasa ;
rukkho Skr. vrksha ‘ tree 9 ; bhikkhu Skr. bhikshu * a mendi-
cant’; khalati Skr. \Zskhal ‘ to tumble’; khandho Skr. skandha
‘shoulder’ ; khattiyo Skr. kshatriya ‘ member of the second
caste ’ ; khayo Skr. kshaya * decay ’ ; khipati Skr. \/kshIv
‘ to spit.’
2 ) kaccha Skr. kaksha ‘ a girdle ’ ; kucchi Skr. kukshi
‘ belly ’ ; chama Skr. kshama ‘ earth.’
3) akkhi acchi Skr. akshi ‘ eye ’ ; ikko, accho , and with a
singular assimilation iso and isso Skr. rksha * bear ’ ; khuddo
chuddho Skr. kshudra ‘ small ’ ; chano khano Skr. kshana
* moment, a festive time ’ ; pakkho paccho Skr. paksha
‘ a wing ’ ; khuro Skr. kshura ‘ razor ’ ; cullo, culo , culo Skr.
kshulla € small ’ ; sakkato Skr. samskrta ‘ Sanskrit ’ ; nikko
Skr. nishka € a golden ornament ’ ; nikkeso Skr. nishkega
• bald.’
4) Skr. 5 c =cch: acchariyo Skr. aweary a ‘ wonderful ’ ; paccha
Skr. pajeat ‘ behind ’ ; vicchiko Skr. vi^cika ‘ a scorpion ’ ;
nicchinati Skr. nis+ \/ci ‘to ascertain.’
5) ts and ps become alike cch.
bibhaccho Skr. blbhatsa ‘ loathsome ’ ; cikicckati tikicchati
Skr. cikitsati ‘ to cure ’ ; dicchati Skr. ditsati (desid. to
\/da) ; macchari Skr. matsarin ‘ selfish.’
acchara Skr. apsaras ‘ a nymph ’ ; lacchati Skr. lipsati
(desid. to \/labh).
6 ) sht 8hth=tth: titthati Skr. tishthati ‘to stand’; yittho Skr.
ishtd P.P.P. to \/y a j *to sacrifice’; attha Skr. ashtan ‘eight’ ;
chattho Skr. shashtha ‘sixth’; bhattho Skr. bhrashta ‘fallen’ ;
mattho and matto Skr. mrshta * polished ’ ; bhattho and bhatto
Skr. bhrshta * fried.’
7) leddu ‘ a clod of earth,’ is supposed to stand for Skr.
loshta. The modem vernaculars, however, show the forms
lendu and leddu.
8 ) Skr. st and sth are generally represented by tth. This
ed by CjOO^Ic
20
PALI GRAMMAR.
may optionally be cerebralized. atthi Skr. asthi ‘bone';
atthi Skr. asti ‘ to be * ; hatthi Skr. hastin ‘ elephant/ and
without aspiration atto Skr. asta ‘ thrown.*
9) In the beginning of a word cp. thakanam Skr. sthagana
* covering * ; thambho Skr. stambho ; thanam Skr. sthana
‘ standing/ and other derivatives from y/atha with cerebrali-
zation ; thero Skr. sthavira ‘ priest * ; thupo Skr. stupa
‘ a tope * ; thevo and chevo * a drop/ to Skr. -v/stip, and
perhaps chambhati Skr. \/ stambh ‘to amaze*; khanu Skr.
sthanu ‘ stump of a tree/
10) In conjunction with the labials the sibilants are assimi-
lated ; sometimes an aspiration takes place. The characters
for p, ph being very much alike in Siamese, Burmese and
Sinhalese MSS., it is very difficult to say if this is more than
graphic.
11) pha8so Skr. sparga ‘touch*; phusati Skr. -v/sprf ‘to
touch*; puppham Skr. pushpa ‘flower*; by the side of pupphito
a form phumto occurs, both going back to Skr. pushpita
‘ flowering.*
12) bappo Skr. vashpa ‘ a tear * ; apphota Skr. asphota
‘jasmine*; nippapo Skr. nishpapa ‘free from sin*; nippato
Skr. nishpava ‘ winnowing, clearing * ; nipphadanam ‘ ac-
complishment/ to nipajjjati Skr. nis+\/pad; nipphalo Skr.
nishphala ‘ fruitless.*
41) Groups of nasals with sibilants following are treated in
different ways : 1) The group is preserved intact ; 2) be-
tween the sibilant and the nasal a vowel is inserted ; 3) the
sibilant is changed to A, and metathesis takes place. In the
beginning of a word assimilation may take place.
In several instances a word appears under more than one form.
1) 8%neho sneho Skr. sneha ‘ friendship * ; nisneho ‘ without
love * ; 8inanam nahdnam Skr. snana ‘ bathing * ; siniddho
niddho Skr. snigdha ‘ oily * ; sunha 8U7iisa husa Skr. snusha
‘ sister-in-law * ; Sineru Neru Meru Sumeru probably belong
together, and point to a form Sneru.
2) panhi Skr. pr 9 ni ‘ variegated * ; panho Skr. pra 9 na
* question * ; tanka tasina Skr. trshna ‘ lust * ; kanho kasino
Skr. krshna ‘ black * ; unho Skr. ushna ‘ hot.*
ed by CjOO^Ic
SANDHI.
21
3) sitam mihitam Skr. smita ‘ smile * ; massu Skr. 9 ma 9 ru
‘ beard 9 ; gimho Skr. grlshma ‘ summer 9 ; asma amha Skr.
a§man ‘stone*; semho silesumo Skr. §leshman ‘phlegm*; rasmi
rarmi Skr. ra 9 mi ‘ a ray of light * ; ramsima Skr. ra 9 mimat
‘ radiant * ; apamaro apazm&ro Skr. apasmara ‘ epilepsy.*
4) In the oblique case of the pronoun sm is optionally
changed into mh f and thus also in the form of the verb,
subst. amhi asmi amhe asme.
42) In combination with nasals, h shows svarabhakti or
metathesis.
ganhati Skr. grhnati ‘ to grasp * ; hanute hnute Skr. hnute
‘to conceal oneself * ; cihanam cinham Skr. cihnana ‘mark,
sign * ; jimho Skr. jihma ‘ crooked.*
43) Groups of three or more consonants are treated like
those consisting only of two. Assimilation takes place, in
some instances svarabhakti.
uddham ubbham Skr. urdhvam ‘upwards.* The repre-
sentation is, of course, due to the different assimilation which
took place ; just as in disva, and less frequently datthu , for
Skr. drshtva \/dr 9 ; uddhumayati (pass.) Skr. ud+V^hma ‘to
be blown up * ; tikkino tikkho tinho Skr. tlkshna ‘ sharp * ;
sanho Skr. 9 lakshna ‘smooth*; junha dosino Skr. jyotsna
‘ moonlight * ; kasino Skr. krtsna ‘ entire * ; satti Skr. 9 astri
‘knife*; idattayam=idam + traya ; lacchati Skr. lapsyati fut. to
yjlabh ; checchati fut. to chindati Skr. \/chid ‘ to cut*; macco
Skr. martya ‘ mortal * ; maccho Skr. matsya ‘ fish * ; alio Skr.
adra ‘wet*; vatumam vattam Skr. vartman; itthi itthi thi Skr.
strl ‘ woman.’
44) Three consonants are only allowed in conjunction with
the semivowels.
§ 15. SANDHI. 1
In the preceding paragraphs the phonetic changes which
take place in the midst of a word have been considered.
It remains now to be seen what changes take place in the
1 Cpr. On Sandhi in Pali by the late R. C. Childers, Journal Royal Asiatic
Society, 1879.
ed by CjOO^Ic
22
PALI GRAMMAR.
sentence. None of the Sandhi rules known from Sanskrit
grammar as imperative are so in Pali. We have of course
only to deal with external Sandhi in Pali, as internal Sandhi
has been treated under the heading of phonetic changes , to
which it properly belongs.
In prose the MSS. differ greatly in the use of Sandhi, and
whilst, for instance, Burmese and Siamese MSS. prefer
writing khvaham , the Singhalese MSS. separate the words
into kho aham. In verse Sandhi of course takes place
according to the exigencies of the metre. Later texts, such
as the Dipavama, take great liberties, omitting whole
syllables, etc.
The following tables will show the most frequent changes
that occur : —
VOWEL SANDHI.
VOWELS IN COMBINATION WITH VOWELS.
a+a=a: ndhosi=ma ahosi.
a+ a + conjunct consonant : na 9 tthi=na atthi ; pana
ahham—pan' ahham.
a+a+ conjunct consonant =a : ndssa=.na assa.
a before a is rarely elided. Such elision generally takes
place before aham ( 1/ ay am ‘ this/ and the forms of the
verb atthi 4 to be/
a-\-d=a : taddyam—tada ay am ; taddsi~tada asi.
d+i=e: bandhuss ’eva=bandhussa iva.
d+ti=o : nopeti=na upeti.
a+iti=a : Tissdti vacancna= Tissa iti.
a+pi=dpi : ajjdpi=ajja.
d+u=u : cdbhayam=ca ubhayam ; tadupcP = tada upa -
sammanti.
a+i=a (elision of i): yena 9 me—yena ime . This elision
seems only to take place in case of the pronoun idam.
a+i or u=i or u (elision of a) : pahay 9 imam=pahaya imam ;
tatr 9 idam—tatra idam ; yass 9 indriyan = yassa indriyanii ; ten 9
npasankami = tena upasahkami .
ed by CjOO^Ic
VOWEL SANDHI.
23
a is elided before d u e o: yen 9 dyasmd ; utthay 9 dsand ; idh 9
dvuso ; ekeri* uno—ekena uno ; netv 9 ekamantikam ; c* etarahi
tass 9 okasam.
d sometimes elides a short vowel, and less often a long
vowel other than d : disva 9 panmay am for disvd upan ° ; sutva
9 va for 8utv& eva.
a is often elided before a long vowel or a short followed
by a conjunct consonant : tath 9 eva—tatha\ netv 9 ekamantikam
eva—netva ek°.
a+i—i in sey yathidam — seyyatha idam and saddhtdhd-rs.
saddha idha .
i is elided before short or long vowels: gaccham 9 aliam
gacchami a° ; p 9 ajja—pi ajja ; dasah 9 upagatam = dasahi upa ° .
t is elided in tunh 9 assa—tunhi assa .
i+i=ii: in combinations with iti: eamanUdha—samanti idha.
i+a—a : kincdpi=kinci api (more frequently kincid api).
i preceded by t or tt and followed by a vowel becomes ty :
jivanty elaka ; ty ayam ti ayam. The examples are from
late Pali works, and are perhaps doubtful.
iti+evam: ity evam , but also according to the rules after
which ty is palatalized ice evam y and thus di=jj ; api=app,
etc., as pointed out above, § 14, and itv evam .
u is elided before a vowel : samet 9 ayasmd— sametu a°; sadh 9
dvuso— sadhu ° ; twites 9 upapajjatha — tusitesu upa ° .
u+i—u : sadhMi—sadhu iti; kimsudha — kimsu + idha.
u before a vowel changes into v . The examples are
doubtful: vatthv 9 eva—vatthu eva .
e may be elided before a long vowel: m 9 asi—me asi ; silavant 9
ettha=zsilavanto ettha.
e sometimes elides a following vowel : te 9 me—te ime\ sace
’jja^qjja.
e+a=a : sac&ham^zsace+aham.
e+a—y 9 the a being lengthened: tydham—te aham. After
a double consonant lengthening takes place arbitrarily.
o often elides a following vowel: so 9 ham— so aham ; pattiko
9 va—°eva\ kattabho 9 posathe—k° upo°.
o is elided before a vowel: kut 9 ettha— kuto ettha ; katam 9
assa—katamo assa .
ed by CjOO^Ic
24
PALI GRAMMAR.
o+a=a : dukkh&yam—dukkho ayam.
0 + 0 = 0 , the a being lengthened: sv&ham—so aham\ khvd -
ham—kho aham. After a double consonant lengthening takes
place arbitrarily.
o becomes v before a long vowel.
§ 16. EUPHONIC CHANGES.
1) If a word ending in & is followed by idam, or one of its
oblique cases, y is inserted : na yidam , na-y-imassa.
2) iva after words ending in vowels or nasal vowels
becomes viya sometimes : e.g. kim viya like what.
3) v is inserted if a vowel is followed by u or u.
4) eva becomes yeva after words ending in vowels or nasal
vowels.
5) m is inserted between two vowels: idha-m ahu—idha
ahu ; jeyya-m attdnam—jeyya atf ; idha-m-ijjhati , giri-m-iva .
6) r is inserted when a word ending in a vowel is followed
by a word commencing with a vowel: dhir atthu and vijjur eva .
7) d is inserted in sammad eva , anvad eva , satthud anvayo .
These consonants have been inserted according
to false analogy.
8) A few instances occur of the original consonant reappear-
ing which, according to the phonetic rules in Pali
should be omitted.
manasad annavimuttdmm=manasd 0 ; yasmad apeti (and so
in Sanskrit) ; tasmad eva—tasma ; kenacid eva ; ahud eva (Skr.
abhud eva) ; puthag eva (Skr. prthag eva) ; pageva (Skr.
prageva) ; tunhim dunam (Skr. tushidm) ; vuttir esd (Skr.
vrttir esha) ; sabbhir eva (Skr. sadbhir eva) ; pathavi dhatur
eva-=dhdtu eva (Skr. dhatur eva) ; punar eva— puna eva (Skr.
punar eva) ; bhattur atthe—bhattu atthe (Skr. bhartur arthe) ;
chal eva (Skr. shad eva).
9) The niggahIta stands sometimes for an original final
consonant. This can be replaced by an original consonant
before vowels : sakim stands for Skr. sakrt, and before eva it
becomes sakid eva , in accordance with Sanskrit.
10) The same is the case with tam yam etam , which stand
ed by CjOO^Ic
DECLENSION.
25
for tad yad etad respectively, and appear in this shape before
vowels : tad eva ; etad avoca .
11) Owing to false analogy, wrong consonants sometimes
appear by the side of the right : punam eva for punar , annad
atthu for annam , bahud eva for bahur.
12) Original double consonants which are assimilated are
sometimes after vowels doubled.
13) In verse the niggahita is elided before a consonant :
no ce muhceyya candimam for muhceyyam ; maccana jivitam
for maccanam ; etam buddhana sasanarn for buddhanam sa#°.
14) Sometimes the nasal vowel is entirely elided : tm* etam
=imam etam ; nipajf aham = nipajjim aham .
am-\-a=a : ekam idaham samayam ; ekam idam aham ;
ev&yam^evam ay am.
15) If a word ends in niggahita and a consonant follows,
it may be changed to the nasal of that class to which the con-
sonant belongs: m+k—hk, m+c=nc, m=t=nt, m+t—nt,
m+p=mp.
16) A word ending in the niggahita, followed by a word
beginning with y, becomes hh : tarn yeva^tahheva ; anantari-
kahham.
17) The niggahita before h optionally becomes n : evahhi.
§ 17. DECLENSION.
1) We have drawn attention in the chapter on Phonetics
to the fact that Pali only allows vowels and nasalized vowels
at the end of a word. Through this law the shape of a word
is considerably altered. Roughly speaking, vowels are either
substituted at the end of a word, or those consonants which
would impede the action of this law are dropped. A con-
sequence of this process is, that, although the essential
features of the various Sanskrit declensions are preserved,
no declension has kept within its proper range.
2) The nominative case as a prototype case has influenced
the other cases, and since stems e.g. ending in as or a alike
ed by CjOO^Ic
26
PALI GRAMMAR.
form the nominative case in o, the as and a declension follow
respectively the analogy of the as or o declension.
3) Besides this the influence of the declension of the
pronouns on the declension of nouns has to be noticed,
and vice versd.
4) Pali distinguishes three genders : masculine, feminine
and neuter, two numbers singular and plural, and, including
the vocative, eight cases. In the declension of neuter nouns
and of pronouns some traces of an old dual are to be found,
which will be noticed hereafter; but practically speaking
the dual is extinct.
5) The Pali grammarians recognize six case relations,
which by their name indicate the functions of the cases.
The nominative and vocative cases are of course omitted in
this enumeration.
6) The nominative case is simply called the first case
( pathamd ). It simply expresses the subject. It is sometimes
used instead of the vocative, which latter is called the
alapanam ‘ the addressing case/
7) The names given respectively to the other cases to
show their relation ( karakam ) are :
kammarn
karanam
sampadanam
apadanam
sdmi
okdso or adharo
accusative.
instrumental.
dative.
ablative.
genitive.
locative.
Other terms are : for the accusative upayogo, for the ablative
nmakko , and for the locative bhummo.
USES OF THE CASES.
I) The relation op the Accusative (kammarn). The
accusative is used as the case of the direct object of a
transitive verb. The transitive verbs have a somewhat
wider range in all the Indian languages than in the related
ones, and so we find an accusative as the goal of motion
ed by CjOCK^Ic
USES OF THE CASES.
27
with verbs of ‘ going/ ‘ bringing/ ‘ sending/ etc. Vihdram
gantva ‘ having gone to the monastery/
Verbs of speaking may follow the same rule. Tam raja
idam abruvi ‘ the king said this to him/
The accusative is further used to denote space traversed
and duration of time. Panhdsa yqjandni gacehati * he marches
fifty yojanas/
It is used with verbs signifying to have recourse, to appear,
to ask. Buddham earanam gacchami ‘ I take my refuge in
the Buddha/
Causative verbs have a double accusative. V pdsakam mam
bhamrn Ootamo dharetu ‘let the lord Gotama receive me as
a disciple/
The accusative is used with the following prepositions :
pad : Sahgamam pad piha ‘ longing for union/
pari : rukkham pari ‘ in the direction of the tree/
arm : arm Sariputtam pahhava bhikkhu * a priest
inferior to S. in learning/
anto, antara: antara vithim olokayamano ‘looking down into
the street/
abhi abhito : abhito gdmam ‘round the village/
tiro : tiro bhavam gacehati ‘ he goes out of sight/
II) The relation of the Instrumental {karamm).
The instrumental denotes adjacency, accompaniment,
association, and of course, instrumentality. All the uses
of this case may be derived from its original meaning.
We notice particularly the use made of the instrumental
to denote 1) equality, likeness, accordance, default :
Ragena samo aggi ndma natthi ‘ there is no fire like lust/
akkhina kano ‘ blind of one eye/
2) the space traversed and duration of time :
nabhasa gacehati ‘ he goes through air/
3) the construction of a passive verb or participle :
evam me sutam ‘ thus it was heard by me/
4) the prepositions saha saddhim vina, though generally used
with the instrumental, are also found with other cases :
Saha gabbhena jivitakkhayam papunmami ‘ I shall perish
together with my unborn child 9 ; Mahatd bhikkhusahghena
ed by CjOO^Ic
28
PALI GRAMMAR.
saddhim * with a great company of priests ’ ; vino, dosena
‘ without any fault/
III) The relation of the Dative (sampadanam) [effect-
ing case]. The case of the indirect object. It is used to
denote objects ‘ to, towards, for, at, against/ which, anything
is done or intended.
It is used, therefore, with words signifying
1) give, share out, and assign : Maggam dehi ranno ‘ make
room for the king/
2) Show, announce, declare : tassa abruvi ‘ said to him 9 ;
tuyham avikaromi ‘ 1 will explain thee/
3) Give attention, have a regard or feeling, inclination,
obeisance : Bhavato bhaddam hotu ‘ may good happen to the
lord/
4) In an infinitive sense : lokdnukampaya ‘ out of pity to
the world/
IY) The ablative relation ( apadanam ). The ‘from*
case. It is used to denote removal, distinction, separation,
issue, deprival, restraint: matito suddho ‘pure on the mother’s
side ; ’ avijja paccaya sahkhara.
As special applications, we notice
1) the ablative after words expressing fear in interchange
with the genitive : Sabbe bhayanti maccuno or maccuna ‘ all
fear death/
2) the ablative of distinction: yato panitataro va vasitthataro
va natthi ‘than whom there is none better or more ac-
complished/ Also in interchange with the genitive and
instrumental.
The ablative is used with the prepositions and adverbs
implying the notion of distance, removal, such as ara ‘ far
off’ ; pur a ‘ formerly/ which are ablatives according to their
formation : ara so asavakkhaya ‘ he is far from the extinction
of passion’ ; tassa dgamand pura ‘ before his arriving.’
V) The genitive relation [_sdmf\. The case relation is
an adjectival one, out of which all other uses arise.
It is to a great extent interchangeable with IY) the
locative \okdso] y the ‘ in ’ case.
Thus we find a locative and genitive absolutely employed :
ed by CjOO^Ic
DECLENSION OP NOUNS.
29
rudato darakassa or rudantasmim darake ‘ whilst the child
was crying 9 ; JEvam vutte 4 having said thus.’
In connection with verbs and substantives denoting either
possession or dominion, either the genitive or locative is used.
The locative is used interchangeably with the accusative,
instrumental, dative, and ablative.
Among prepositional uses of the locative we notice upa and
adhi having respectively the sense of inferior and superior to.
Upa khdriyam dono i a drona is inferior to a kharl ’ ; adhi
devesu Buddho 4 Buddha is superior to the gods/
In interchange with the instrumental, the locative is used
with adjectives of the sense of satisfied, eager, zealous.
I. DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
We shall now give the paradigms for the different
declensions, of which we make two divisions.
I. Stems in vowels.
II. Stems in consonants.
We shall mark those forms which belong to the pro-
nominal declension with f, those which are taken from
another declension with *, obsolete forms with J.
STEMS IN YOWELS.
Masculine and Neuters in a .
Dhamma.
PLURAL.
dhamma J dhammase
dhamma
dhamme
dhammehhi dhammehi
dhammanam
dhammehhi dhammehi
dhammanam
dhammesu
SINGULAR.
Nom. dhammo
Voc. dhamma dhamma
Acc. dhammam
Instr. dhammena vinayd
Dat. dhammaya * dhammassa
Abl. dhamma f dhammasmd
t dhammamha
Gen. dhammassa
Loc. dhamme f dhammasmim
f dhammamhi
ed by CjOO^Ic
30
PALI GRAMMAR.
Neuters in a.
Citta.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
\
cittani J citta
Yoc.
> cittam
cittani
Acc.
)
cittani { citte
Instr.
cittern
cittebhi cittehi
Dat.
cittaya cittassa
cittanam
Abl.
citta f cittasmd + cittamhd
cittebhi cittehi
Gen.
cittassa
cittanam
Loc.
citte f cittasmim cittamhi
cittesu
The forms of this declension correspond more to those of
Yedic Sanskrit than those of classical Sanskrit.
Cp. instr. sing, yajha ; pi. nom. devasas ; pi. nom. neut.
yugd) pi. instr. deveb/m. Is the form citte an old dual neuter?
Feminine Stems in a.
Karma .
SINGULAR.
Nom. kannd
Yoc. kanne
Acc. kahriam
Instr. kanndya
Dat. kanndya
Abl. kanndya
Gen. kanndya
Loc. kannayam * kanndya
The voc. sing, of amma ( mother
amma.
PLURAL.
kannd * kannayo
kannd * kannayo
karma * kannayo
kannabhi kannahi
kannanam
kannabhi kannahi
kahnanam
kahhdsu
9 is given as amma and
Masculines in i.
SINGULAR.
Nom. aggi
Yoc. aggi
Acc. aggim
Instr. aggina
Dat. * aggino * aggissa
Aggi.
PLURAL.
aggayo aggiyo * aggi
aggayo aggiyo aggi
aggi * aggayo * aggiyo
aggibhi aggihi
agginam
ed by CjOO^Ic
STEMS IN VOWELS.
31
SINGULAR. PLUBAL.
Abl. * aggina + aggimhd faggimd aggibhi aggihi
Gen, * aggino * aggma agginam
Loc. aggini + aggimhi faggismim aggisu
The voc. sing, of m ‘ a sage 9 occurs as ise, corresponding
to Sanskrit rshe.
From muni ‘ a recluse * the loc. sing, occurs as mune.
Of adi ‘ starting-point 9 the following locative sing, forms
occur :
ado, adu corresponding both to Skr. adau, * adim f ddimhi
f ddi8mim.
The neuters in % follow the declension of those in in. As
paradigm atthi ‘ a bone * will be given.
Feminines in i .
Itatti.
SINGULAR.
ratti
PLURAL.
Nom.
Yoc.
Acc.
Instr.
Dat.
Abl.
Gen.
Loc.
* ratti
* ratti
rattiyo
ratti rattiyo
rattim ratti * rattiyo
rattiya rattibhi
rattiya rattinam
rattiya rattibhi rattihi
rattiya rattinam
rattiyam * rattiya %ratto rattisu
Instead of the forms of the instr. sing, in iya , yd occurs,
corresponding to Sanskrit. This unites with the preceding
consonant, and palatalizes the same arbitrarily :
matya santya for matiya santiya
jacca najja for jatiya nadiya
A palatalization occurs in conjunction with other forms.
The paradigm of nodi ‘ river ’
will show the declension.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom. nodi
nadiyo
* najjo * nadi
Yoc. nadi
nadiyo
* najjo * nadi
Acc. nadim
nadi
* nadiyo { najje
Instr. nadiya nadya najja
nadibhi
nadihi * najjo
ed by CjOO^Ic
32
PALI GRAMMAR.
SINGULAR.
Dat. nadiya nadya najja
Abl. ,, ,, ,,
Gen. ,, a a
Loc. nadiyam nadiya najjam
nadlnam
nadibhi nadihi
nadlnam
nadisu
The loc. sing, of Baranasi is given as Baranasim.
itthii thi ‘ a woman/ corresponding to Skr. strl, shows the
following forms :
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom. itthi
thi
itthiyo thiyo * itthi
Yoc. itthi
thi
itthiyo thiyo * itthi
Acc. itthim
itthiyam
itthi * itthiyo
Instr. itthiya
thiyam
itthibhi itthihi
Dat. itthiyd
thiyam
itthinam thinam
Abl. itthiya,
thiyam
itthibhi itthihi
Gen. itthiyd
thiyam
itthinam thinam
Loc. itthiyam
itthiyd
itthisu thisu
Declension
IN u.
Bhikkhu.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom. bhikkhu
bhikkhavo * bhikkhu
Yoc. bhikkhu
bhikkhavo bhikkhave
* bhikkhu
Acc. bhikkhum
bhikkhu * bhikkhavo
Instr. bhikkhuna
bhikkhuhi bhikkhubhi
Dat. * bhikkhuno
* bhikkhussa
bhikkhunam
Abl. bhikkhuno
f bhikkhusma
bhikkhubhi bhikkhuhi
f bhikkhumha
Gen. bhikkhuno
* bhikkhussa
bhikkhunam
Loc. t bhikkhmmim + bhikkhumhi bhikkhum bhikkhusu
We have in adverbial use the gen. sing, heto and hetu from
hetu.
The influence of other declensions we find in such forms as
nom. plur. of jantu and hetu : jantuyo jantunOt hetuyo hetuno.
Masculines in u agree with those in u, showing the long u
in th e nom. voc. acc. plur. In those forms we have also
formations according to other declensions, e.g. :
sabbahhu : sabbahhuno
abhibhu : abhibhuvo abhibhuno
ed by CjOO^Ic
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
33
Neuters in u form their nom. acc. plur. either in u or uni.
The form of the acc. sing, in m is also used for the nomi-
native.
Feminines in U.
Jambu .
SINGULAR.
Nom. jambU jambUyo
Voc. jambU jambUyo
Acc. jambum jambu
Instr. jambuya jambubhi
Dat. jambuya jambunam
Abl. jambuya jambubhi
Gen. jambuya jambunam
Loc. jambuyam jambuya jambum
* jambu
* jambu
* jambUyo
jambuhi
jambuhi
The loc. of bhu is bhuvi adverbially used.
Of crude forms ending in Sanskrit in diphthongs we find
only go ‘ a cow/
go
go
gam * gavam *gavum * gavam
%gava *gdvena
gdvassa
gdva igdvasma fgdvamha
gdvo
*gdvo
gobhi gohi
gavam
gobhi gohi
gavam *gunnam *gonam
gosu *gdvem
*gunnam *gonam
Nom.
Yoc.
Acc.
Instr.
Dat.
Abl.
Gen.
Loc. gdve fgdvamhi -\gdvasmim
The influence of the acc. sing, has effected a transition
of the diphthongal conjugation in other declensions, e.g. acc.
sing. Skr. rayam from rai, Pali rayo ‘ wealth ’ ; acc. sing.
Skr. navam from nau, Pali nava * a ship/
II. STEMS IN CONSONANTS,
Stems in ar, Skr. r.
Sattha ‘ teacher/
8INGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. sattha sattharo
Yoc. sattha sattha sattharo
ed by CjOO^Ic
34
PALI GRAMMAR.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Acc.
sattharam
satthare *satthdro
Instr.
satthara * satthuna *satthard sattharebhi sattharehi
Dat.
satthu * saUhussa
%atthanam *satthdnam
* satthuno
* satthdranam
Abl.
mtthara satthara
sattharebhi * sattharebhi
Gen.
mtthu satthussa
satthanam * satthdranam
* satthanam
Loc.
mtthari
sattharesu *sattharesu
With the declension of satthd , that of pita nearly agrees.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
pita
pitaro
Yoc.
pita pita
pitaro
Acc.
pitaram
pitare * pitaro
Instr. pitara *pituna
pitubhi *pituhi pitarebhi
Dat.
pitu *pitmsa *pituno
pitunnam pitunam pitanam
*pitaranam
Abl.
pitu * pitara
pitubhi *pituhi * pitarebhi
* pit are hi
Gen.
pitu *pitu8sa *pituno
pitunnam pitunam pitanam
*pitardnam
Loc.
pitari
pitusu *pitusu *pitare8u
Mata ‘
mother/
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
mata
mataro
Yoc.
mata *matd
mataro
Acc.
mataram
matare * mataro
Instr.
matard*matuya*mdtyd matubhi * matubhi *mdtarebhi
Dat.
matu *matuya * maty a
matunam * matunam matdnam
*mataranam
Abl.
matara*mdtuyd*matyd matubhi * matubhi *matarebhi
Gen.
matu *matuyd * maty a
matunam * matunam matdnam
*matardnam
Loc.
matari *matuyam mdt -
matrnu *matusu * mataresu
yam *matuya * maty a
As an appendix to the declension in ar, it will perhaps be
best to
give the declension of sakha ‘ a friend/
ed by CjOCK^Ic
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
35
The word corresponds to the Skr. sakhi, which shows an
irregular declension. The same irregularities we find also in
Pali, and besides this we find the influence of other de-
clensions. The forms are not marked.
Nom.
sakha
SINGULAR.
Yoc.
sakhe sakhi sakhi sakhd
sakha
Acc.
sakhdram
sakhayam sakhdnam sakham
Instr.
sakhina
Dat.
sakhissa
sakhino
Abl.
sakhind
Gen.
sakhissa
sakhino
Loc.
sakhe
PLURAL.
Nom.
sakhayo
sakhino
sakhano
Yoc.
sakhayo
sakhino
sakhano
Acc.
sakhi
sakhino
sakhayo sakhano
Instr.
sakharehi
sakharebhi
sakhehi
Dat.
sakhinam
sakharanam
Abl.
sakharehi
sakharebhi
sakhehi
Gen.
sakharanam sakharanam
sakhinam
Loc.
sakkharesu sakkhesu
II. Stems in Nasals.
1) in an.
Attan ‘self/
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom.
atta
attano
Yoc.
atta
*attd
attano
Acc.
attanam
* attanam *attam
attano
*attdno
Instr.
attana
*attena
*attanebhi
*attebhi
Dat.
attano
attanam
* attanam
Abl.
attana
• \attasmd
*attanebhi
*attebhi
Gen.
attano
attanam
*attdnam
Loc.
attani
fattasmim attamhi
attanesu
ed by CjOCK^Ic
36
PALI GRAMMAR.
The. form dtuma is of comparatively rare occurrence. We
find : Acc. sing, dtumanam
Nom. acc. plur. dtumano
Gen. and dat. plur. dtumanam .
Brahman.
SINGULAR.
Nom.
brahma
Yoc.
brahme
Acc.
brahmanam
* brahmam
Instr.
brahmuna
brahmana
Dat.
brahmuno
*brahmassa
Abl.
brahmuna
brahmana
f brahma8ma
Gen.
brahmuno
* brahmassa
Loc.
brahmuni
brahmani
t brahmasmim
PLURAL.
brahmano
brahmano
brahmano * brahmano
*brahmebhi
brahmunam * brahmanam
brahmebhi
brahmunam * brahmanam
* brahmesu
Rajan * king.’
8INGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
rajd
rajano
Yoc.
raja
* raja
rajano
Acc.
rajanam
* rajam
rajano * rajano
Instr.
rahhd
rajina * rajena
rajubhi * rajubhi *rajebhi
Dat.
rahho
rajino * rajassa
rahham rajunam *rajdnam
Abl.
rahhd
f rajamha
rajubhi * rajubhi *rajebhi
Gen.
rahho
rajino rajassa
rahham rajunam * rajanam,
Loc.
rajini
rahhi * rahhe
rajusu * rajusu *rajesu
Tuvan ‘young.’
SINGULAR.
Nom.
yuva
Yoc.
yuva
yuva
*yuvana *yuvdna
Acc.
yuvanam *yuvam
Instr.
%yuna
*yuvana
* yuvena * yuvanena
Dat.
Xyuno
*yuvanassa
*yuvassa
Abl.
Xyuno
*yuvana
tyuvanasma
Gen.
Xyuno
*yuva8sa
*yuvanassa
Loc.
yuve
yuvi
f yu vamhi f yuvasm im
yuvdne
fyuvanasmim
ed by CjOCK^Ic
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
37
PLURAL.
Nom.
Voc.
yuvano
yuvana
* yuvana
Acc.
yuve
*yuvane
* yuvana
Instr.
yuvanehi
yuvehi
Dat.
yuvananam
yuvanam
Abl.
yuvanehi
yuvehi
Gen.
yuvananam
yuvanam
Loc.
yuvdnesu
yuvasu
yuvesu
Sa ‘ dog.'
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
sa
8dno *8d
Yoc.
8d
8dno sa
Acc.
sanam
*8am
sano *sano
Instr.
suna
sand *sena
sabhi
Dat.
*saya
*&assa
sanam
Abl.
sa
f sasmd fsamha
sabhi
Gen.
*sasaa
sanam
Loc.
se
f sasmim fsamhi
8d8U
Besides this, the following forms occur, and are declined
as if belonging to the first declension :
8ono sum svano and suvano. The fem. is &onl.
Puma \_pumaii].
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom.
puma
pumdno
Yoc.
pumam
puma
pumano
Acc.
pumanam
*pumam
pumune pumdno
Instr.
pumund
*pumana *pumena
pumanehi
Dat.
pumuno
*pumassa
pumanam
Abl.
pumund
pumanehi
Gen.
pumuno
*pumas$a
pumanam
Loc.
pumane
*pu?ne
pumasu pumesu
These paradigms have been given to show the way in
which the an stems are treated. We find several instances
where, according to what was said in the introduction, a
ed by CjOCK^Ic
38
PALI GRAMMAR.
word has only preserved a few traces of its belonging to this
class.
Besides the regular forms of the a declension of kammam,
we find the instr. sing, kammuna kammand , the gen. sing.
kammuno, and the loc. kammam.
In several instances forms of the an declension are in
adverbial use only.
2) Declension of Stems in mant vant.
Nom.
Yoc.
Acc.
Instr.
Dat.
Abl.
Gen.
Loc.
SINGULAR MA8C.
*
gunavanto
♦ /T 4 / 4 I/ir 41 ii ^
gunava
gunavam w gunava
gunavantam * gunavam
gwnavatd
gunavato
gunavatd
gunavato
gunavati
SINGULAR NBUT.
gunavam
gunava
*gunavantena
* gunavantassa
* gunavantassa
*gunavante
gunavam
gunavassa
gunavassa
f gunavantasmim fguna-
vantamhi
PLURAL.
Yoc. ■ } gunavanto *gunavantd
Acc. *gwnavante
Instr. gunavantebhi *gunavantehi
Dat. gunavatam * gunavantdnam
Abl. * gunavantebhi
Gen. gumvatam * gunavantdnam
Loc. gunavantesu
gunavanti
gunavanti
gunavantani
gunavantani
The corresponding feminine is made by adding I to either
the strong or weak form : gunavanti or gunavati . It is then
declined like a form z.
The participles in ant are declined like those in mant, with
the exception of the nom. sing, case, which is gaccham or
*gacchanto. Compare further :
Nom. sing, arahd and araham ‘ venerable/
„ mahd maham *mahanto ‘great/
ed by CjOO^Ic
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
39
Santo P.P. to atthi € to be/
shows the following forms :
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom.
santo
santo
Acc.
santam
8ante
Instr.
sata *8antena
Instr. and Abl. sabbhi
*santehi
Gen. and Dat.
sato santassa
satam
Loc.
sati
JBhavam .
SINGULAR.
Yoc.
bho
bhonta
Acc.
bhamntam
bhotam
Instr.
bhavata
bhota
bhavantena
Gen. and Dat.
bhavato
bhoto
bhavantassa
Abl.
bhavata
bhota
PLURAL.
Nom.
bhavanto
bhonto
bhavanta
Yoc.
bhavanto
bhonto
bhante
Acc.
bhavante
bhonte
The fem. appears under the forms of :
bhavati bhavanti bhoti Fem. nom. plur. bhotiyo
3) Stems in in .
In this declension several stems have been combined in
one system.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. dandi dandino * dandi
Voc. dandi dandino * dandi
Acc. dandinam dandim * dandino dandi
Instr. dandina * dandina dandibhi * dandibhi
Dat. dandino * dandino *dandissa dandinam *daridinam
Abl. dandina f dandisma f dandimha dandibhi *dandihi
Gen. dandino * dandino * dandissa dandinam * dandinam
Loc. dandini *dandini f dandimhi dandisu *dandisu
The short vowel in the oblique cases of the plural appears
ed by CjOO^Ic
40
PALI GRAMMAR.
optionally in verses; the forms with long vowels are the
more frequent.
Notice nom. plur. dipiyo , from dip! ‘ a panther/
The word atthi * a bone/ corresponding to Skr. asthan and
asthi, shows the following forms :
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom.
atthi
# atthi m
atthini
atthi
Yoc.
atthi
* atthim
atthini
atthi
Acc.
atthi
*atthim
atthini
atthi
Instr.
atthina
atthibhi
atthihi
Dat.
*atthino
*atthissa
atthinam
Abl.
atthina
f atthimha
t atthisma
atthibhi
atthihi
Gen.
* atthino
*atthisso
atthinam
Loc.
atthini
f atthimhi
atthismim
atthisu
Neuters in as and us.
Mano ( manas ).
SINGULAR.
Nom.
mano
*manam
Yoc.
mano
* manam
Acc.
mano
*manasam
* manam
Instr.
manasa
* manena
Dat.
manaso
* manassa
Abl.
manasa
*mana
f manamha
Gen.
manaso
* manassa
Loc.
manasi
*mane
The pi. follows entirely the declension in a masc. and neut.
From thamo ‘ strength 9 instr. thamasa and gen. thamaso,
by the side of thamuna and thamuno respectively ; from tapo
i religious austerity 9 instr. tapasa and tapena .
The comparative in yo and iyyo is declined like mano.
Nom. sing. m. f. and n. seyyo, gen. seyyaso.
Neuters in us.
Ayu * life/
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. ayu * ay urn ayuni * ayu
Yoc. ayu * ayuni ayuni *ayu
ed by CjOCK^Ic
COMPARISON.
41
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Acc.
ayu
* ay um
ayuni
*ayu
Instr.
ayusa
*ayuna
*ayuhi
Dat.
*ayussa
* ayuno
*ayunam
Xdyusam
Abl.
ayusa
*ayuna
*dyuhi
Gen.
* ayussa
* ayuno
aytinam
Xayusam
Loc.
ayusi
* ay uni
* ay um
For the different endings of the ablative sing, to can be
substituted. This is added to the weakest form pitito abl. of
pita * father/ bh is interchangeable with h in the suffixes of
the abl. and instr. plur.
§ 18. COMPARISON.
The suffixes which are used to denote the comparative and
superlative value of an adjective are :
tara iyo and tama ittha
e g. papataro or papiyo papatamo and papittho
It cannot be said that these suffixes denote a comparative
and superlative meaning. They have mostly an intensive
value. This intensive value is shown when the two suffixes
are united and made one
itthatara as in e.g. papitthataro .
The suffix issika is used promiscuously with tara and tama .
There are some words with the suffixes iya and ittha, which
are attached to other adjectives from a different root, e.g . :
mddho ‘ old 9
jeyyo
jettho
pasattho ‘ excellent 9
seyyo
settho
antxko ‘ near ,
nediyo
nedittho
balho ‘ strong ,
sadhiyo
sadhittho
appo ‘ small , \
yuva ‘ young 9 )
kaniyo
kanittho
The themes in vat and mat drop of course this termination
before affixing iyo ittho .
gunava 1 excellent 9
guniyo
gunittho
satima 1 thoughtful *
satiyo
satittho
dhittima i courageous 9
dhitiyo
dhitittho
rupava 6 beautiful ,
rupiyo
rupittho
ed by CjOCK^Ic
42
PALI GRAMMAR.
II. DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
1) Personal Pronouns.
1st Person.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
aham
mayam
amhe
Acc.
mam mamam
amhe
amhakam
Instr.
maya
amhehi
Dat.
mayham mama
mamam
amham
amhakam
asmd -
amham
kam
Abl.
maya
amhehi
asma
Gen.
mama mayham
mamam
amham
amhakam
asmd -
amham
kam
Loc.
mayi
amhesu
asmasu
Enclitic forms are :
me for the instr. dat. and gen. sing.
no for the acc. dat. and gen. plur.
2nd Person.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom.
tvam
tuvam
tarn
tumhe
Acc.
tvam
tuvam
tarn
tavam
tumhe
tumhakam
Instr.
tvaya
tayd
tumhehi
Dat.
tuyham tava
tumham tavam
tumham
tumhakam
Abl.
tvayd
tayd
td
tumhehi
Gen.
tuyham tarn
tumham
tavam
tumham
tumhakam
Loc.
tvayi
tayi
tumhesu
Enclitic forms are :
ie for the instr. dat. and gen. sing., and
vo for the acc. dat. and gen. plur.
Pronoun of the 3rd Person.
SINGULAR.
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom.
so sa
tarn {tad)
sa
Acc.
tarn
tarn {tad)
tarn
Instr.
tena
tdya
ed by CjOCK^Ic
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
43
SINGULAR.
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Dat. tassa assa
taya tassa tassaya
tissaya assa
tissd
Abl. tasma tamha asma amha
tdya
Gen. tassa assa
taya tassa tassayd
tissaya assa
tissd
Loc. tasmim tamhi asmim
tayam tassam tissam assam
PLURAL.
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom. te tani
ta tayo
Acc. te tani
ta tayo
Instr. tehi
tahi
Dat. tesam tesanam
tasain tdsdnam
Abl. tehi
tahi
Gen. tesam tesanam
tdsam tdsdnam
Loc. tesu
tasu
In all the oblique cases of the sing. masc. and fem., and in
all cases of the neuter sing, and plur. and of the masc. and
fem. plur., forms beginning with n can be substituted.
It is sometimes added pleonastically to the pronouns aham
and foam, as are also all the demonstrative pronouns. It
stands also and must be translated so sometimes for the definite
article.
Many of the oblique cases are used adverbially, especially
tasma and tena.
The oblique cases of atta, atuma can be used reflexively in
place of the three personal pronouns.
attano dsane yeva attdnam dassesi ‘showed himself too in his
own seat/ rakkhitum sakam attdnam ‘ to save his own life/
2) Demonstrative Pronouns.
1) Eso esa etam (etad) ‘ this , declined like so sa sam .
2) ayam ‘ this * used adjectively and substantively.
SINGULAR.
Masc. and Neut. Fem.
Nom. ayam idam imam ayam
Acc. imam idam imam
ed by CjOO^Ic
44
PALI GRAMMAR.
SINGULAR.
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Instr.
anena
imina
amina
imaya
Dat.
ossa
imassa
assa assaya imissd imissa -
ya imaya
Abl.
asm a
imasma
imamhd
imaya
Gen.
assa
imassa
like dat.
Loc.
asmim
imasmim
imamhi
assam imissam imaydm
PLURAL.
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom.
ime
imani
ima
imayo
Acc.
ime
imdni
ima
imayo
Instr.
ehi
imehi
imahi
imabhi
Dat.
esam
esdnam
imesam imesanam
imasam
imasanam
Abl.
ehi
emehi
imahi
Gen.
esam
esdnam
imesam imesanam
imasam
imasanam
Loc.
esu
imesu
imdsu
Amu .
SINGULAR.
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom.
asu
adum
asu
Acc.
amum
adum
amum
Instr.
amund
amuya
Dat.
amussa
adussa
amussa amuya
Abl.
amusma
amumha
amuya
Gen.
amussa
adussa
amussa amuyd
Loc.
amumhi
amusmim
amussam amuyam
PLURAL.
Masc. and Fem.
Neut.
Nom.
a mu amuyo
amu amuni
Acc.
amu amuyo
amu amuni
Instr.
amubhi
amuhi
Dat.
amusam
amusanam
Abl.
amubhi
amuhi
Gen.
amusam
amusanam
Loc.
amusu
A defective pronominal stem is ena. It occurs in the acc.
of all numbers enam, and the instr. sing. : masc. enena, and
fern, enaya.
ed by
Google
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
45
3) Relative Pronoun.
SINGULAR.
Masc. and Neut. Fem.
Nom. yo yam (yad)
yd
Acc. yam yam
yam
Instr. yena
ydya
Dat. yassa
yassa ydya
Abl. yasma yamha
ydya
Gen. yassa
yassa ydya
Loc. yasmim yamhi
yassam yayam
PLURAL.
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom. ye yani
yd ydyo
Acc. ye yani
yd ydyo
Instr. yehi
yahi
Dat. yesam
ydsam
Abl. yehi
yahi
Gen. yesam
yasam
Loc. yesu
yasu
so, ayam and eso, along with the personal pronouns, are
sometimes used in conjunction with yo for greater emphasis.
In adverbial use we find the acc. sing. neut. yam, the
instr. yena, the abl. yasma , and the loc. yasmim .
4) Interrogative Pronoun.
Masc. ko, neut. kim, fem. ka, is declined like yo .
In the dat. and gen. masc. and neut. sing, kissa by the
side of kassa, and in the loc. kismim kimhi by the side of
kasmim kamhi. The gen. sing. n. kissa, instr. kena and kasma,
are used adverbially.
5) Indefinite Pronouns.
In affixing ci (for cid) api and cana to the interrogative
pronoun, the indefinites are formed.
SINGULAR.
Masc. and Neut. Fem.
Nom. koci kind kaci.
Acc. kanci
ed by CjOCK^Ic
46
PALI GRAMMAR.
SINGULAR*
Mass, and Neut.
Instr. kenaci
Dat. kassaci
Abl. kasmaci
Gen. kassaci
Loc. kasmici kismici
PLURAL.
Masc. and Fem. Neut.
keci kanici
sayam ‘ self, oneself/ and iumo corresponding to Skr. tmana,
are used as emphatic pronouns with all cases.
§ 19. PRONOMINAL DERIVATIVES.
From pronominal stems derivatives are formed, which have
the character of pronominal adjectives. Thus :
madiyo ‘mine/ mamako ‘mine/ \/ mad ; amhadiyo ‘our/
Vamhad; and in combination with diso and di, interchangeable
with the form mo, standing for Skr. dr 9 , we find madiso
‘ like me/ etadiso ‘ like that/ idiso and idi ‘ like this/ kidiso
and kidi ‘ like what ? 9
From the stems :
ta ka ya are formed the adjectives
tati kati yati 9 with the meaning of, respectively, ‘so
many/ ‘ how many/ and ‘ as many/
From
ya ka 9 with the suffixes tara tama 9 we find yataro yatamo
‘ which/ and kataro katamo ‘ what, which ? 9 and from i : itaro
‘ other, different/
A great many derivatives of pronouns are used adverbially.
They will be noticed hereafter.
A number of adjectives are inflected according to the
pronominal declension.
Such words are, e,g .
anno annataro annatamo ‘ certain 9 ; kataro katamo ‘ which 9 ;
yataro yatamo ‘ which ? , ; itaro ‘ other 9 ; uttaro uttamo
ed by CjOO^Ic
NUMERALS.
47
* higher ’ ; adharo * inferior’ ; ubhayo ‘ both ’ ; aparo paro
‘ other ’ ; dakkhino * right ’ ; pubbo ‘ former ’ ; mso ‘ all ’ ;
and sabbo ‘ all, every.’
Some few of these words form their cases also according
to the nominal declension.
§ 20. NUMERALS.
Cardinals.
1 eko ekd ekam
2 dve duve ubho (for all 3 genders)
3 tayo tisso tini
4 cattaro (caturo) catasso cattari
5 panca
6 cha (chal)
7 8atta
8 attha
9 nava
10 dasa
11 ekarasa ekddasa
12 barasa dvadasa
13 tedasa ter am telasa
14 catuddasa cuddasa coddasa
15 pancadasa pannarasa pannarasa
16 solasa sorasa
17 sattadasa sattarasa
18 atthadasa attharasa
19 ekunavisati ekunavisam
20 visati tisam
21 ekavisati ekavisam
22 dvavisati bavisati
23 tevisati
24 catuvisati
25 pancavisati
26 chabbisati
27 sattabisati sattavisati
28 atthamam
ed by CjOO^Ic
48
PALI GRAMMAR.
29
Cardinals.
ekunatimsam ekunatimsati
30
tirma tirmati
31
ekatimm
32
dvattimsa
40
cattcilisam cattarisam
50
talisam talisa
pannaw pannasam pannasa
60
satthi
70
sattati
80
asiti
90
navuti
100
satam
200
basatam dvasatam
1,000
sahassam
10,000
dasasahassam nahutam
100,000
8atasaha88am lakkham
1,000,000
dasasatasahassam
100,000,000
koti
From koti upwards each succeeding numeral is ten million
times the preceding one. After the combination with koti,
pakoti kotippakoti and nahutam ninnahutam akkhohini and
bindu, the succeeding numerals are neuters in am. The last
numeral given is asahkheyyam— 10,000,000 ^
In combination with una ‘deficient, less/ the eka is in
some instances omitted, as unasattasatam ‘ 699/
addhiko ‘exceeding, surpassing/ is used sometimes to
denote the higher number, e.g. : sattadhikavisa ‘27/ i.e.
7 exceeding 20 ; attharasadhikam dvisatam ‘218/
The following forms of numerals ought to be noticed.
25 pannavisati pancavisati
44 cuttalisam cattallsam
56 chappahhasa
84 cullasiti caturasiti
Fractional are :
addho addho ‘ J y ; diyaddho divaddho , ‘ 1 J 9 ; addhateyyo
addhatiyo ‘ 2£ y ; addhuddho ‘ 3J/
ed by CjOCK^Ic
NUMERALS.
49
Other combinations with addho are frequent, e.g. dasaddha -
sata * 500 9 ; addhatelasasata * 1250/
caiutthamo * \?
For the other fractionals the ordinals are used.
To form the multiplicatives khattum is used : ekakkhattum
* once/ solasakkhattum * 16 times/
To form adverbs from numerals the suffixes dha and sa are
used :
ekadha ‘ in one way * ; ekasa ‘one by one/
Ad j ectives are formed with the suffixes vidho , guno and angiko :
atthavidho * eightfold ’ ; navaviddho * ninefold 9 ; sattaguno
1 sevenfold 9 ; atthahgiko ‘ eightfold * ; pancahgiko ( fivefold/
Declension of the Cardinals.
eka.
Ma8C. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom. eko
ekam
eka
Yoc. eka
eka
eke
Acc. ekam
ekam
ekam
Instr.
ekena
ekaya
Dat.
eka8sa
ekissa
Abl. ekasma
ekamha
ekaya
Gen.
ekassa
ekissa
Loc. ekasmirp
ekamhi
ekissam
ekdyam
The plur. eke * some/ follows the analogy of sabba.
ubho
(For all three genders.)
Nom. Acc. Yoc. ubho
Inst. Abl. ubhohi ubhehi
Dat. Gen. ubhinnam
Loc. ubhosu ubhesu
ubho is in form a dual corresponding to Skr. ubhau.
declension is very irregular.
dve, duve.
Nom. Yoc. Acc. dve duve
Instr. Abl. dclhi dvibhi
Dat. Gen. dcinnam duvinnam
Loc. dvi8u
The
ed by CjOO^Ic
50
PALI GRAMMAR.
ti.
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom.
tayo tlni
tmo
Acc.
tayo tlni
ti880
Instr. Abl.
tlhi tibhi
tlhi tibhi
Dat. Gen.
tinnam tinnannam
tmannam tmam
Loc.
tisu tmu
tisu tmu
catur .
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom. Yoc. Acc.
cattaro caturo cattari
Cat 0880
Instr. Abl.
catubbhi catuhi catubhi
catubbhi catubhi
Dat. Gen.
catunnam
catassannam
Loc.
catusu catusu
catusu catusu
panca, cha.
Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut.
Nom. panca cha
Instr. Abl. pahcahi chahi
Gen. Dat. pahcannam channam
Loc. pahcasu chasu
All numerals ending in a are declined in like manner.
The numerals in i are declined like the fem. in i.
loke ekasatthiyd arahantesu jatesu ‘ when there were 61
arhats in the world * ; satthim arahatim aka ‘ made sixty
converts * ; lendni atthasatthiyo ‘ 68 cells/
The gen. and dat. of risam, timsa , pahhasa are given
respectively as visaya , timsaya, pahhdsaya .
satam and the higher numerals are declined like neuters in
am. In conjunction with nouns the following constructions
are frequent : —
1) With a noun in the gen. plur. : satam mulanam * a
hundred roots 9 ; accharanam sahassam ‘ 1000 nymphs/
2) As last part of a compound : gathasatam ‘ a hundred
stanzas/
3) With a noun in the sing, in comp. : chachattdlisasatam
vas8am atikkamma ‘ after the lapse of 146 years/
4) As first part of a compound the whole in the plural :
saha88ajatila ‘ 1000 jatilas/
ed by CjOO^Ic
THE ORDINALS.
51
THE ORDINALS.
The ordinals are formed from the cardinals by means of
suffixes. They are declined like adjectives. The fem. ends,
with exception of the first four numerals which form their
stems in a different way, in i, the neuter in am.
For the ordinal of one, pathamo, pathama,pathamam is used.
From dva and ti we have dutiyo fem. dutiya , neut. dutiyam ;
latiyo fem. tatiya , neut. tatiyam
The cardinals for ‘ 4/ ‘ 5/ 1 6/ * 7 9 form the ordinals by
adding (ha : catuttho , pahcatho, chattho, sattho.
For ‘ 4 9 a form tunyo with the fem. turiya occurs.
Besides the form in tha the suffix ma is added to form the
ordinals, ‘ 5/ ‘ 6/ ‘ 7, 9 and onwards up to ‘ 99/ e.g. pahcamo
‘5th’; dasamo ( 10th* ; solasamo ‘lGth’; ekunavisatimo ‘19th’;
ekavisatimo ‘ 21st * ; timsatimo ‘ 30th ’ ; satthimo * 60th/
Besides these longer forms from 10 upwards, we find an
ordinal made from the cardinal by the suffix a : —
pahcadaso * 15th ’ ; viso ( 20th 9 ; ekavlso * 21st 9 ; ievlso
( 23rd 9 ; ekunatimso 1 29th 9 ; timso * 30th , ; cattaliso ' 40th 9 ;
pahhaso 1 50th 9 ; sattho ‘ 60th 9 ; sattato ‘ 70th 9 ; asito * 80th 9 \
navuto ‘ 90th/
The ordinal for 100 is satamo , and with the fuller superlative
suffix satatamo, just as for 1000 sahassamo and sahassatamo.
The fem. of some of the ordinals is used to designate the
day of the month, e.g . : —
pahcaml ‘ the fifth day of the half month/
ekadasi ‘ the eleventh day of the half month/
pahcadasi * the fifteenth day of the half month/
§ 21. THE YERB.
The native grammarians divide the verbs according to the
manner in which the present and the tenses and modes which
belong to the present system, viz. imperfect, potential and
imperative, are formed into seven classes. These are called
from the verb which serves as prototype for the whole class :
ed by CjOO^Ic
52
PALI GRAMMAR.
1) bhavadi, i.e. ‘ bhu and the other verbs/ or ‘ having bhu
at the beginning/
2) rudhadi.
3) divadi.
4) svadi.
5) kiyadi.
6) tanadi .
7) curavadi.
Eirst class : It consists of the following divisions :
1) The root ending in i or u is gunated, and a added :
y/bhu bhava .
2) To the root ending in a consonant an a is added,
e.g. y/pac+a—paca ‘to cook*; further, y/tud ‘to gnaw’;
y/nud ‘ to remove 9 ; \/likh ‘ to write 9 ; y/phus ‘ to touch/
3) To the root ending in a vowel, the personal endings are
added without intervening vowel, e.g . yjya ‘ to go/
The second class comprises those verbs in which a nasal
is inserted before the final consonant of the root. The
terminations are added with an intermediate a as in the first
class : *Jrudh> rundhaii ‘ to restrain/
The third class adds ya to the root. The phonetic rules
regarding y are applied : y/div^ dibbati ‘ to play/
The fourth class adds nu na una to the root: sunoti
papunati .
The fifth class adds na to the root which ends in a vowel :
kinati ‘ to buy 9 ; dhunati ‘ to shake/
The sixth class adds o or u to the root. The root
generally ends in a nasal : tanoti, karoti.
The seventh class adds ay a e i to the gunated root: coray ati
Every verb is supposed to have two voices with separate
endings : the parassapadam or transitive, and attanopadam or
intransitive. The attanopadam is very restricted in its use,
and it is therefore difficult to give the attanopadam for
every verb.
The passive verbs are formed through adding ya to the
root and affixing the ending of the attanopadam , or though
less frequently of the parassapadam to this base.
The tenses of the Pali verb are :
ed by CjOO^Ic
THE VERB.
5a
Special tense
1) Present ( vattamdna :), and derived from it two modes:
Optative (sattami) ; Imperative ( pancami ) ; and
the Participle Present as verbal adjective.
2) Imperfect (hiyattani).
General tenses
1) Perfect ( parokkha ).
2) Aorist {ajjatani).
3) Future ( bhavissanti ).
4) Conditional (kalatipatti).
The general tenses often take the basis of the special
tenses, and vice versd .
A verb can appear in different classes without, however,
changing its meaning, e.g. titthati and thdti 1 to stand , ;
dadatiy deti and dajjati ‘ to give * ; vadati, vadeti, vajjati and
vajjeti * to speak/
Other roots appear in different classes with a differentiation
of meaning, such as, e.g. : yfvid, vidati ‘ to know ’ ; vindati * to
find, to get , ; and vijjati * to be, to exist/
1) It is needless to advert to the fact that the classes have
been made up to a great extent to bring the conjugation of
Pali in a closer connection with that of Sanskrit.
2) The tenses of the Aorist and Imperfect are simply
tenses of the past, and it is therefore not advisable to take
the Imperfect separately from the Aorist. It is quite true
that originally there existed a difference in the meaning
between Aorist and Imperfect ; but in the Pali texts, as they
lie before us, no such difference can be traced. We shall
therefore consider the Imperfect simply as a tense of the past
not dependent on the Present system.
3) The Perfect tense is of rare occurrence.
I. The Present System.
The endings are the following :
PRESENT PARASSAPADAM.
1) mi
2) si
3) ti
1) ma
2) tha
3) anti
PRESENT ATTANOPADAM.
1 ) •
2) se
3) te
1) mhe
2) vhe
3) ante are
ed by CjOO^Ic
54
PALI GRAMMAR.
IMPERATIVE PARASSAPADAM.
1) mi 1) ma
2) — hi 2) tha
3) tu 3) aniu
OPTATIVE PARASSAPADAM.
1) e eyyami 1) eyyama
2) e eyyasi 2) eyyatha
3) e eyya 3) eyyum
IMPERATIVE ATTANOPADAM.
1) e 1) amaze
2) 88U 2) tho
3) tarn 3) antam
OPTATIVE ATTANOPADAM.
1) eyyam 1) eyyamhe
2) etho 2) eyyavho
3) etha 3) eram
We best divide the verbs into the following classes :
]) Verbs which affix the endings given above without
intervening vowel.
2) Reduplicating class .
3) Nasal class .
4) a- class .
5) ya- class.
I. The Root Class of Sanskrit grammar. Through the
contraction of ay a into e, of ava into o, many verbs follow
now the analogy of this class. These are either primitive
verbs such as jeti for jayati , or derivatives such apadeti for
dpadayati. Most of the verbs have forms in other classes.
A distinction between strong and weak forms takes place
only occasionally.
We give as paradigms :
Vi Vya
Sing, emi Plu. ema Sing, yami Plu. yama
„ esi „ etha „ ydsi „ yatha
„ eti „ entiy yanti „ yati „ yanti
Like emi , semi ‘ to lie down/ The third person attanopa -
dam occurs as
Sing, sete Plur. sente
Yerbs following the analogy of yati are, vati ‘ to blow * ;
pati ( to protect * ; bhati ( to shine/
Besides the forms, according to the reduplicating class,
of Vda ( to give , and tha ( to stand/ we have deti thati ,
which follow the analogy of yati.
In the same way a contracted form of verbs in aya, ava
follows this class, e.g. :
ed by CjOO^Ic
PRESENT TENSE.
55
hotly a contracted form of bhavati, y/bhu ‘to exist/ which
shows the following forms :
Sing, homi Plur. homa
yy llOSZ yy JlOthtt
„ hoti „ honti
y/bru ‘to speak* exhibits besides the form braviti , a con-
tracted form bruti.
Sing, brumi Plur. bruma
yy brusi „ brutha
„ bruti y 9 bravanti
The ATT AN OP ADAM is
Sing, brave
,, bruse
,, brute
Plur. briimhe
yy br&vhe
yy bravante
The most important verb of this division is \/as ‘ to be/
Sing, asmi amhi Plur. asma amha
yy aSl Uhl yy O/tttlCl
yy atthi yy MYlti
Single forms following the first class are, e.g. :
III. p. sing, vatti V vac ‘to speak/ at the side of vacati
and mdati.
III. p. sing, hantiy y/han ‘ to strike/
III. p. pi. duhanti, y/duh ‘ to milk/
III. p. pi. lihantiy yjlih ‘ to lick/
III. p. sing. att. hanutey y/hnu ‘ to conceal oneself/
II. Reduplicating Class.
The present form is formed by prefixing a reduplication
to the root. The rules of reduplication are :
1) The consonant of the reduplicating syllable is always
the first consonant of the root.
2) A non-aspirate is substituted in reduplication for an
aspirate.
3) A palatal is substituted for a guttural or A. 1
1 The substitution of the palatals for the gutturals shows that the vowel of the
reduplication syllable was uniformly an £, as in Greek.
ed by CjOO^Ic
56
PALI GRAMMAR.
4) A long vowel is shortened in the reduplicated syllable.
Examples of reduplication are :
dadati, y/da ‘ to give/
dadhati , dahati y/dha ‘ to put/
titthati, y/tha ‘ to stand/
jahati, y/ha * to leave/
juhoti, y/hu ‘ to sacrifice/
pibati, or pivati y/pa ‘ to drink/ cpr. Lat. bibere.
The conjugation is as follows :
y/da
Sing, dadami Plur. damma
yy dadasi „ dattha
yy dadatx yy dadanti
In analogy with the first pers. plu. a new singular was
created, viz. : dammiy dasiy dati .
Besides these forms we have :
dajjati according to the ya class. This formation is
probably due to the optative. The form deti was noticed
above.
Of the attanopadam only a few forms can be quoted, viz. :
I. sing, dade and I. plur. dadamase.
y/tha
Sing, titthami Plur. titthdma
yy titthasi yy tkdtha titthatha
,, titthati yy titthanti
III. The Nasal Class: In it we comprise the verbs of the
fourth, fifth and sixth classes of the native grammarians.
They form their present stem by adding in the fourth and
sixth class no if the root ends in a vowel, o if in n, or as in
the case of karoti in r. These verbs add arbitrarily also na,
the class-sign of the fifth class. The few verbs belonging to
that class always retain the class-sign na.
As paradigms may serve :
y/su ‘ to hear/
Sing, mnomiy sunami Plur. sunoma , mndma
yy sunosi, 8unasi sunasi „ sunotha, sunatha
,, sunotiy sunati „ sunanti
ed by CjOO^Ic
PRESENT TENSE.
57
In the same way y/tan ‘to stretch y is conjugated, of which
the attanopadam occurs as :
Sing, tame Plur. tanumhe
„ tanuse „ tanuvhe
„ tanute „ tanvante
y/ki ‘ to buy 9 has only the forms in a kinamu
The most important verb belonging to this class is y/kar
i to make/
Sing, karomi kummi Plur. karoma
„ karosi „ karotha
„ karoti „ karonti
The attanopadam shows the following forms :
Sing, kubbe
„ kubbase kuruse
„ kubbate kurute kubbati
Plur. kubbdmhe kurumhe
„ kubb&vhe kuruvhe
„ kubbante kurunte
IY. The a Class: The most numerous class of verbs is that
which, while gunating the root ending in i or u to ay or av
respectively, adds the personal endings with intervening a.
Closely connected with this class in Pali are those verbs
which add to a consonantal stem a before the endings.
Lastly, we have to count among this class those verbs which
strengthen the root by a nasal, and add the personal endings
with a or less frequently i.
The first two divisions belong to the first class of the
native grammarians, the last division forms the second class.
As paradigms we take :
y/bhu ‘ to be, to exist/
Sing, bhavami Plur. bhavdma
„ bhavasi „ bhavatha
„ bhavati „ bhavanti
The attanopadam is
Sing, bhave Plur. bhavdmhe
„ bhavase „ bhavdvhe
„ bhavate „ bhavante
ed by CjOO^Ic
58
PALI GRAMMAR.
A consonantal stem is y/tud * to push/ which is conjugated
exactly like bhavati. 1
y/rudh ‘ to restrain * has the following forms :
Sing, rundhami and rundhimi
„ rundhasi „ rundhisi
„ rundhati „ rundhlti
Plur. rundhdma „ rundhima
„ rundhatha „ rundhitha
„ rundhanti „ rundhinti
A few verbs form their present tense by adding ccha to the
root, e.g. y/gam ‘ to go/ gaechami .
There is, however, also a form gamati ‘he goes’ and
ghammati. This latter form can be substituted for all the
forms of the verb. Cpr. further bramti.
The ya Class: The present tense of this class adds ya
to the root. These form the third class of the native
grammarians. All the phonetic rules regarding y are
applied, e.g . :
y/div + ya = dibbati
y/siv + ya = sibbati
y/yudh + ya = yujjhati
§ 22. MODES OF THE PRESENT TENSE.
1) Imperative : It is formed by adding the endings given
on page 54 to the present stem. The second pers. sing. par.
sometimes show the mere stems without the characteristic
ending. As paradigms may serve :
y/i ‘ to go.’
I. sing, emi I. plur, ema
II. „ ehi II. „ etha
III. „ etu III. „ entu
1 The difference between these two conjugations can only be ttaced in
Sanskrit, where the accent is varying.
ed by CjOO^Ic
MODES OP THE PRESENT TENSE.
59
y/as 4 to be/
I. sing, asmi I. plur. mma
II* ,, dht II. (itthQr
III. „ atthu III. „ 8antu
y/da 4 to give/
An imperative can be formed from all the stems in
use, e.g. :
II. sing, dehi dadahi dajja II. plur. detha dadatha
The attanopadam has the following forms :
I. sing, dade I. plur. dadamase
II. „ dadassu II. „ dadavho
III. „ dadatam III. „ dadantam
yjkr 4 to make/
II. sing, kuru karohi II. plur. karotha
III. „ karotu kurutu III. „ karontu kubbantu
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, kubbe I. plur. kubbamase
II. „ kurussu II. „ kuruvho
III. „ kurutam III. „ kubbantam
yjbhu.
II. sing, bhava bhavahi II. plur. bhavatha
III. „ bhavatu III. „ bhavantn
ATTANOPADAM.
II. sing. bhava88u II. plur. bhavavho
III. „ bhavatam III. „ bhavantam
yjgam 4 to go/
The imperative is formed also from all the stems in use, e.g . :
II. sing, gaccha , gacchdhi ghamma, ghammahi
2) Optative : It is formed by adding the endings given
on page 54. The endings showed originally only forms
commencing with ya. A combination, however, took place
in most cases with the final vowel of the stem. These forms
could again be contracted into e.
As paradigms may serve :
yjbhu.
I. sing, hey y ami, bhaveyya I. plur. heyyama
huveyya, bhave
ed by CjOO^Ic
60
PALI GRAMMAR.
II. sing, heyydsi II. plur. heyyatha
III. „ heyya III. „ heyyum
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, bhave , bhaveyyami I. plur. bhateyydmhe
II.
„ bhavetho
II. „ bhaveyyovho
III.
„ bhavetha
III. „ bhaveram .
08.
I.
sing. a88am
I. plur. 088 dma
II.
,, 0880
II. „ a88atha
III.
„ ossa , 8tya
III. „ 088U siyum
Vkr.
I.
kare, kareyya, kubbe, kubbeyya, kayird,
kayirami
II.
„ koreyyasi ,
„ kubbeyyasi , „
kayirasi
III.
„ kareyya,
„ kubbeyya , „
kayird
I.
kareyyama ,
kubbeyyama ,
kayirama
II.
kareyydtho ,
kubbetha ,
kayiratha
III.
kareyyam,
kubbeyam,
kayirum
V da .
Shows the forms
dajja, dadeyya , dajjeyya , deyya.
\/jnd.
janiya , /wwa, janeyya.
's/gam,
gacche , gaccheyya .
§ 23. GENERAL TENSES.
The Perfect System.
The formation of the Perfect is essentially alike in all
verbs. The characteristics of the formation are : 1) a stem
made by reduplication of the root and endings, unlike those
of the present and the other tenses. The rules for redupli-
cation are the same as those given for the second conjugation,
e.g. : \/gam=Jagama.
The perfect in published texts is of rare occurrence.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GENERAL TENSES.
61
The endings are :
FOR THE PARA8SAPADAM.
I. sing, a I. plur. mha
II. „ e II. „ ttha
III. u a III. a ti
FOR THE ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, i mhe
II. „ ttho vho
III. „ ttha re
Roots ending in consonants insert an i between stem and
consonantal endings.
As paradigms may serve :
y/bhu .
I. sing, babhuva I. plur. babhuvimha
II. „ babhuve II. „ babhuvittha
III. „ babhuva III. „ babhiivu
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, babhuvi 1. plur. babhuvimhe
II. „ babhuvittho II. „ babhuvivho
III. „ babhuvittha III. „ babhuvire
I. sing, papaca
II. „ papace
III. „ papaca
<Jpac.
PARASSAPADAM.
I. plur. papacimha
II. „ papacittha
III. „ papacu
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, papaci I. plur. papacimhe
II. „ papacittho II. „ papacivho
III. „ papacittha III. „ papacire
\/ah ‘to speak J is only used in the III. per. sing, and plur.
of the perfect.
III. sing, aha III. plur. ahamsu and ahu
§ 24. AORIST AND IMPERFECT. 1
The aorist and imperfect are, as stated above (page 53),
blended into one form, partaking of the character of both.
The native grammarians are at great pains to give a paradigm
1 Cpr. H. Oldenberg, Kuhn’s Zeitschrift, xxy. 319.
ed by CjOO^Ic
62
PALI GRAMMAR.
for both forms, which, however, turns out futile. Moreover,
no difference can be made in the syntactic use of the two
tenses.
The paradigm of the native grammarians is for the
hiyattanl (imperfect) :
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, a
II. ,, o
III. „ a
I. sing, im
II. „ se
III. „ ttha
For the ajjatani (aorist) :
ATTANOPADAM,
I. plur. amhd
II. „ attha
III. „ fi
PARA88APADAM.
I. plur. mhase
II. „ vharn
III. ,, tthum
I. sing, im
II. „ o
III. „ i
I. sing, a
II. „ ise
III. „ a
I. plur. imhd
II. „ ittha
III. „ um irmu
P ABA88AP ADAM .
I. plur. imhe
II. „ ivham
III. „ u
We can distinguish altogether three different formations
in Pali. The augment a is in prose generally put before the
verb. In verse it is omitted according to the exigencies of
the metre. With the negative particle md the aorist is used
as an imperative.
I. sing, am
II. „ a, o
III. „ d
First Formation.
PARA88APADAM.
I. plur. amha
II. „ attha
III.
um
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing. — I. plur. dmhase
II. „ a&e II. „ avham
III. „ attha III. „ atthum
The nasal in the first pers. sing. plur. is often omitted.
ed by CjOO^Ic
AORIST AND IMPERFECT.
63
Only verbs in consonants form their preterite according to
this formation. Its use is very limited. This formation can
be considered as an imperfect if it is used with the present
stem.
Second Formation.
I. sing, im
II. „
HI. „ i
PARASSAPADAM.
I. plur. imha
II. „ ittha
III. „ imsu isum
I.
II.
III.
sing. —
„ ise
99
ATTANOPADAM.
I. plur. imhe
II. „ ivham
HI. „ - *
This form is regularly used for all stems ending in con-
sonants. For the first pers. sing, we find in verse some-
times the endings isam and issam according to the analogy
of Sanskrit.
Third Formation.
The third form of the aorist is an 8 aorist. The forms are :
PARASSAPADAM.
I. sing, sim simha
II. „ si sittha
III. „ 8t sum
This formation is used for the verbs ending in vowels.
Some verbs ending in consonants follow this analogy,
and then, of course, all phonetic change takes place.
Causatives follow the analogy of this aorist after contracting
aya into e.
Besides these some forms occur which date back to a
formation anterior to the fixing of Pali.
Many verbs appear in all the three formations.
The following paradigms will illustrate the different
formations :
y/bhu.
I. sing, abhavam I. plur. abhavamhd
II. „ abhavo II. „ abhavattha
ed by CjOO^Ic
64
PALI GRAMMAR.
III.
sing. abhava
III. plur. abhavu
I.
„ ahuvam
I. „ ahuvamhd
II.
„ ahuvo
II. „ ahuvattha
III.
„ ahuvd
HI. „ -
I.
,, ahosim
I. „ -
II.
„ ahosi
II. „ -
III.
„ ah 08 %
III. - „ ahesum
I.
„ abhavim
I.
99
I. „ ahumha
III.
„ aha ahu
before
vowels ahud III. „ ahum
y/da .
I.
sing, adadam, etc.
I.
yy ada, etc.
III. plur. adum
I.
„ adasim
I. „ adasimha
II.
„ adasi
II. „ adasittha
III.
yy adasi
III. „ adasum adamsu
Vkr.
I.
sing, akaramy etc.
I.
„ akasim akasi 9 etc. III. plur. akasum
I.
,, aka
( II. „ akattha
( III. „ akamsu
I.
yy akarirriy etc. III. „ akarum akarimsu
y/as .
I.
sing, asim
I. plur. asimha
II.
„ asi
II. „ asittha
III.
yy asi
III. „ dsurri asimsu
y/gam .
I.
sing, again
I. plur. agumha
II.
f y aga
II. „ aguttha
III.
yy agd
III. „ agum
I.
yy agamd
agamim
II.
99
agami
III.
„ agami
I.
yy agacchi
I.
yy agahchim
I. „ aganchimha
ed by CjOCK^Ic
AORIST AND IMPERFECT.
65
II. sing, aganchi agancho II. plur. agafichiltha
III. „ aganchi III. „ aganchimsu
II. and III. sing, agacchm
y/vac.
II. per. plur. avacuttha
II. „ avocatha
III. plur. avocum
^ labh,
I. sing, alattham I. sing, alabhim
II. „ alattha II. „ alabhi
III. „ alattha III. „ alabhi
After contracting aya into e, the aorist of the causatives is
also formed according to the third formation : —
I. sing, acoresim I. plur. acoresimha
II. „ acoresi II. „ acoresittha
III. „ acoresi hi. „ acoresum
In roots ending in consonants 8 influences the last letter as
usual, e.g. : adakkhi from passati 4 to see/ but also apassi ;
akkocchi from kosati 4 to revile/ but also akkosi.
Of forms in mam or isam, I. pers. sing, second formation,
we notice sandhavissam, paccavekkhisam , gacchisam , vandissam,
etc.
For the attanopadam the paradigm is the following :
I. sing. — I. plur. abhavdmhase
II. „ abhavase
ii. „
abhavham
III. „ abhavattha
hi. „
abhavatthum
I. „ -
i. „
abhavimhe
II. „ abhavise
ii. „
abhavivham
III. „ abhavittha
m. „
—
The attanopadam is of rare
forms can be given :
occurrence,
and only a few
II. pers. sing, atimannittho
I. pers. plur. akardmhase
I. sing, avaca
I. „ avocam
III. „ avoca
5
ed by CjOO^Ic
66
PALI GRAMMAR.
§ 25. FUTUKE.
The tense sign is ss, which is added to the root directly, or
by the auxiliary vowel t. The endings are :
FOB THE FABA8SAFADAM.
I. sing. ssami I. plur. ssdma
II. „ 88Ct8i II. „ 88dtha
III. „ 88 ati III. „ ssanti
FOR THE ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing. 88am I. plur. ssdmhe
II. „ 880886 II. „ 880 Vke
III. „ ssate III. „ 88ante ( ssare )
The form to which these endings are added is mostly the
strengthened. They can, however, also be added to the
special base.
PARA88APADAM.
I. sing, bhavmami I. plur. bhavis8dma
II. „ bhavksasi II. „ bhavmatha
III. „ bhavissati III. „ bhavissanti
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, bhavissam I. plur. bhaviss&mhe
II. „ bbavmasse II. „ bhamsavhe
III. „ bhavissate III. „ bhamsante ( bha -
The 88 being added without intermediate vowel affects of
course the preceding consonant : dahkhati to passati ‘ to see 9 ;
sakkhite to sakkoti ‘ to be able/
A misunderstanding of these forms gave rise to the forma-
tions dakkhmati and sakkhmatiy with a double future sign.
Cpr. further laechati to labhati ‘toy take’; checchati to chindati
* to cut ; ’ bhejjati to bhindati ‘ to break/
Forms with auxiliary vowel are also in use, e.g. : labhissati.
From the special tense we have futures like gacchmati to
gacchati , but also gammati ; juhossati, juhmati to juhotu
karoti has besides the future karksati \ a contracted form :
I. sing, kahami I. plur. kahama
II. „ kahasi kahki II. „ kahatha
III. „ kahati kahiti III. „ kahanti kahinti
ed by CjOO^Ic
CONDITIONAL.
67
In the same way eti ‘ to go 9 has, besides the future
essati, ehiti.
The contracted form hoti from bhavati shows the following
forms :
I. sing, hemiy hehami, hohdmi , hessami, hehissami, hohmami.
II. „ he&iy hehisiy hohisi, hessasi, hehissasi, hohissasi.
III. „ hetiy hetitiy hotitiy hessati, hehmatiy hohmati .
I. plur. hema,y hehamdy hohdmdy hessama, hehissama, ho -
hissama.
II. „ hetha, hehittha, hohitthdy hessathd , hehmatha,
hohissatha.
III. „ hentiy hehintiy hohinti, hessanti, hehmantiy hohmanti.
From y/su * to hear , future att. sussam, yj da ddssati and
att. dassam .
§ 26. CONDITIONAL.
From the future stem is made an augment preterite by
prefixing the augment a and adding the secondary endings :
PARA88APADAM.
I. sing. 88dm I. plur. ssdmhd
II. „ 886 ( 88d ) II. „ 88dtha
III. „ 88a (88d) III. „ 88am8U
I. sing. 88am
II. „ ssdse
III. „ 88dtha
ATT AN OP AD AM.
I. plur. ssdmhase
II. „ 8savhe
III. „ ssimsu
The endings are added with or without intervening i.
The paradigm is :
PARA8SAPADAM.
I. sing, abhavmam I. plur. abhavissdmhd
II. „ abhavi88d °8se II. „ abhavmatha
III. „ abhamsa °88d III. „ abhavmamsu
ATT AN OP ADAM.
I. sing, abhdvmdm
II. „ abhavmase
III. „ abhamsdtha
I. plur. abhavi88dmhd8e
II. „ abhavmavhe
III. ,, abhamsimsu
ed by CjOCK^Ic
68
PALI GRAMMAR.
§ 27. DERIVATIVE CONJUGATION.
The derivative conjugation may be divided under five
headings :
I. Passive: It is formed through adding ya to the weakest
form. The endings are those of the attanopadam , but also
those of the parassapadam occur, y affects a preceding con-
sonant in the usual way. In a few instances iya is added
instead of ya, and the endings of the passives are added to
the present active.
Cpr. e.g. : ucchate vuccati from y/vac ‘ to speak ’ ; vmsati
vasty ati from yjvas ‘to dwell/ kayyati karlyati kariyyati
kayirati are given as passive to karoti. dlyati from da ‘ to
give ’ ; thlyate from y/tha ‘to stand’; gamy ate, gamiyati
gacchiyate y/ gam ‘to go 9 ; gheppati and gayhati to ganhati
‘ to take/
II. The Intensive or Frequentative is formed by
reduplication. Its conjugation is in accordance with the
second conjugational class, the reduplication, however, is
peculiar.
The reduplicating syllable is composed of a single con-
sonant with a heavy vowel : lalappati ‘ to lament 9 ; daddallati
‘ to blaze/
The reduplicating syllable has a final consonant taken from
the end of the root. This consonant is a nasal which
substitutes any other consonant ; cankamati jahgamati
cancalati .
Not many instances of the intensive are met with.
III. The Desiderative : The desiderative stem is formed
from the simple root by the addition of a reduplication and
by an appended sa. This sa affects of course the preceding
consonants. Some roots form an abbreviated stem by a con-
traction of reduplication and root together in one syllable.
Examples are, bubhukkati, y/bhuj ; pivasati, y/pa ; vlmamsati
for mlmams ; jigimsati, yj hr ; dicchati, y/ da.
IV. The Causative : From every root can be formed
a causative ; this is done by affixing aya to the strengthened
ed by CjOO^Ic
PARTICIPLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS. 69
root. The native grammarians range these verbs under the
seventh class.
This aya can optionally be contracted into e. Besides this
formation, another is in use : apaya contracted into ape is
added to the root. A differentiation of meaning is sometimes
to be traced.
If contracted into e, the conjugation follows of course the
first conjugational class; the forms in aya and apaya are
conjugated like bhavati '.
As causative of y/gam ‘ to go 9 are given gamayati , gameti
gacchapeti, gacchapayati ; y/han ‘to kill* has haneti, ghateti.
V. Denominatives : From every noun may be formed
a denominative. The suffixes employed are: aya , aya, lya.
e.g. : ciccitayati ‘ to splash 9 ; puttlyati ‘ to treat as a son.*
§ 28. PARTICIPLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS.
1) The Participle Present is formed by the suffixes at
and anta, which are added to the present stem, e.g.: gacchanto
gaccham (see above, page 38). In the same way these suffixes
are added to the future stem, to form 2) Participle Future.
In the same way the suffixes mana and ana are used for
the Present Participle Attanopada.
3) Of the Perfect Participle in vams only a few
doubtful traces are left, vidu and viddasu for vidvams.
4) The Past Participle Passive is formed by the suffixes
ta and na, which are added directly to the root or through
an intervening vowel i. Of course all phonetic changes
take place : —
kato ‘ made 9 ; gato ‘ gone 9 ; icchito ‘ wished , ; phuttho
‘ touched ’ ; laddho ‘ taken * ; victto ‘ spoken 9 ; vapito and vutto
‘ shaven 9 ; dinno ‘ given/
5) From the Past Participle Passive is formed a
secondary derivative with the meaning of a Past Active
Participle by adding the suffixes vat, vant , e.g. :
hutava hutavanto ‘ having sacrificed 9 ; manditava, mandita -
vanto ‘ having adorned 9 ; bhuttava ‘ having eaten/
II. Gerundives : The suffixes by which gerundives are
ed by CjOO^Ic
70
PALI GRAMMAR.
regularly and ordinarily formed are : ya tavya (tabba tayya)
aniya. They are joined with or without intervening vowel i.
e.g. : bhabbo for bhavyo; karaniyo kariyo kayyo kayiro kattabbo
‘ that ought to be done 9 ; datayyo databbo databyo ‘that
ought to be given/
III. Gerunds : The gerund is formed by the suffixes tva
ya tvdna and tuna . They take arbitrarily the vowel i
between root and ending. Sometimes the suffixes ya and tva
are united into one.
Remarkable forms are :
dattliu and disva ‘ having seen/
anuvicca „ anuviditva ‘ having known/
dhacca „ ahanitva 6 having thrown/
pappuyya „ papayitvd ‘ having obtained/
vineyya „ vinayitva ‘ having laid aside/
niccheyya ‘ having ascertained/
Cpr. further : passitvana and passituna ( having seen/
atuitva and atikkamitva ‘having approached/
datvdy daya , daditva ‘ having given/
katvana, katuna ‘ having made/
gayha, ganhiya , ganhitva ‘ having taken/
IY. Infinitives : They are formed by the suffixes turn
tave, and rarely tuye. The infinitive can be formed from the
special base, or from the root; in both cases an i is
arbitrarily inserted :
e.g. gantum ‘to go ’ ; laddhum ‘ to take 9 ; vaditum ‘ to
speak*; sunitum and sotave ‘to hear*; vippahatave ‘to give
up * ; ganetuye ‘ to count/
§ 29. INDECLINABLES.
I. Adverbs.
ADVERBS FORMED BY SUFFIXES.
Classes of adverbs are formed by the addition of adverbial
suffixes not only to pronominal roots or stems, but also to
noun and adjective stems.
ed by CjOO^Ic
INDECLINABLES.
71
Most of these suffixes belong to a time anterior to the
fixing of the Pali, as a comparison with Sanskrit and the
cognate languages will show.
1) to standing for an original tas. It gives to the word
to which it is added mostly an ablative sense,, but sometimes
also a local. It may be added to pronouns, prepositions
and nouns. In the last case it is regarded as the regular
substitute for the termination of the ablative (see page 41).
Examples are from pronominal stems : ato i hence , ; ito
e here 9 ; tato ‘ from that place ’ ; yato i from what * ; etc.
2) From prepositions : abhito i near 9 ; parato f further/
3) From noun and adjective stems : aggato 1 before 9 ;
dakkhinato ‘ on the south , ; sabbato ‘ from every side 9 ;
pitthito 1 from the back ’ ; pitito i on the father’s side/
II. Adverbs of a local sense are formed by an original tra .
This tra is either preserved or assimilated to tta or ttha
(page 16). It is added to pronominal roots and nouns.
Examples are :
1) atra , atthg ‘ here 9 ; tatra and tattha € there ’ ; kutra and
kuttha 1 where/ 2) annatra and anmttha c elsewhere 9 ; ubha-
yattha , ubhayatta ‘ in both places/
dha and assimilated ha also form adverbs with a local sense.
The forms are used promiscuously: iha and idha 'here/
Interchangeable with this last suffix are : ham and him
also forming local adverbs ; kuhim , kuham , kaham ‘ where 9 ;
taham, tahim 1 there 9 ; yahim ‘ where/
III. Adverbs of manner are formed by means of the
suffix tlxa mostly from pronominal roots : tatha i so 9 ; yatha
* as 9 ; but also from adjectives, e.g. sabbatha ' in every way 9 ;
annatha i in another way/
By means of the suffix ti or iti. This adverb is very
extensively used in cases of indirect narrative, or of
enumeration, or of quoting the words and thoughts of others.
By means of the suffix va or iva ‘ like as/ By the side of
iva also viya and va. The former seems a metathesis of iva ;
eva and yeva, heva * just, even 9 ; evam related to eva
‘ thus 9 ; kiva c how ? 9
IY. Adverbs of time are formed by means of the suffix da : —
ed by CjOO^Ic
72
PALI GRAMMAR.
kadd 4 when ? * ; yada 4 whenever 9 ; soda and sabbada
4 always/
Related to da seems di in yadi 4 if/
2. By means of the compound suffix : dam, danirn for
danim. idani, idanim 4 now * ; tadani, tadanim 4 then/
3. By means of the suffix rahi (Skr. rhi) : etarahi , and
seldom etarhi 4 now , ; tarahi 4 then/
Y. By means of the suffix dha are formed adverbs,
especially from numerals, signifying 4 fold, times/
Cpr. ekadha, etc. c in one way 9 ; bahudha 4 in many ways ’ ;
sabbadha 4 everywhere/ Sometimes we find the suffix dhi
used with the same sense : sabbadhi (see page 49).
VI. Adverbs of quantity, or measure, or manner, are
formed by means of the suffix so, Skr. 9 as. e.g. : bahuso
4 greatly 9 ; pancaso 4 by fives * ; akkharaso 4 letter by letter 9 ;
atthaso 4 according to the sense/
VII. Case Forms used as Adverbs.
A large number of adverbs have case-suffixes, from stems
which are or are not otherwise in use.
1) The Accusative : yam with the meaning of 4 that, as,
became 9 ; tam (tad) 4 there, thither , ; kim 4 why 9 ; idarn
4 here/
Compounded with id we have cid—ca+id : ce 4 even/ and
then after false analogy noce 4 if not , instead of ne.
Noun and adjective stems so used are : —
nama 4 by name 9 ; raho 4 secretly 9 ; rattam 4 at night 9 ;
saccam 4 in truth * ; niccam 4 always * ; dram 4 long , ; bhiyo
4 again/
As accusatives of nouns and adjectives we must also con-
sider several adverbs of obscure connection which go back
like most of the preceding in their formation to a period
anterior to Pali.
e.g . : tunhl 4 silently 9 ; sayam 4 in the evening 9 ; aram
4 speedily ’ ; alam 4 enough 9 ; mitho and mithu 4 mutually 9 ;
samma 4 fully 9 ; sajju 4 instantly 9 ; isam 4 a little/
2) The Instrumental : Most of the pronominal adjective
and noun-stems noticed under acc. occur in adverbial use : —
ed by CjOO^Ic
INDECLINABLES.
73
yena ‘because, for which*; dakkhinena ‘on the south*;
cirena ‘ after a long time * ; diva ‘ by day * ; ama ‘ with.*
3) The Dative: It is less extensively used in an adverbial
. sense, e.g. : ciraya ‘ for a long time * ; mkhaya ‘ for the
benefit * ; hitaya ‘ for the benefit.*
4) The Ablative : Most of the pronominal stems are
used adverbially, e.g . : yasma ‘ because * ; kasma ‘ why p * ;
dura, ara ‘far off* ; hettha ‘under, below* ; paccha ‘ behind.*
The original of the ablative d is of necessity lost in Pali.
5) The Genitive : Its use is very limited, e.g . : kissa
‘ why P * ; cirassa ‘ long * ; hetu and heto ‘ on account of.*
6) The Locative : Forms adverbially used are, e.g. : bhuvi
‘ on the earth * ; are , dure ‘ after.*
II. Prepositions.
Under the name of upasagga (prepositions) the native
grammarians comprise a number of twenty words, which
modify the meaning of the verb or substantive to which
they are added.
Put in alphabetical order they are as follows :
f ati ‘ over, beyond.*
f adhi ‘above, oyer, superior to.*
f anu ‘ after, under, less than.*
-\apa ‘away, from.*
api ‘ near, close by.*
abhi ‘ to, unto, against.*
ava * away, down, oft.*
fa ‘ until, as far as.*
u ud ‘ upwards, above.*
t upa ‘below, less.*
du ‘hardly.*
nir ‘ downwards.*
ni {nir) ‘outward.*
pa ‘ forward, onward.*
t pati or pati ‘ towards.*
para ‘ away, aside, back.*
pari 4 around, about.*
ed by CjOO^Ic
74
PALI GRAMMAR.
vi ‘ apart, asunder/
sam ‘ with, together/
su ‘well/
To these words must be added a few others, which are
equally combined with verbs and nouns, but are of a more
limited use, such as :
f anto antara ‘within/
t am ‘manifestly, close/
t tiro ‘ across, beyond/
patu ‘manifestly/
These are mainly used in composition with the verbs as,
bhu, hr.
All of the above-mentioned particles and adverbs
marked t are used as prepositions, and govern nouns. To
these must be added a few words, which are used like
modern prepositions and adverbs and only comparatively
seldom in combination with verbs and nouns, e.g. :
adho ‘below/
uddham ubbham ‘upwards/
tiriyam ‘across/
pacchd ‘behind/
param ‘beyond, after/
pura ‘ before/
bahi ‘outwards/
rite ‘except/
vina ‘without/
saha, samam, saddhim ‘ with/
§ 30. COMPOUNDS.
1) Stems which admit of inflection are, as in other
languages, combined to form compounds, which are treated as
if simple in respect to inflection and construction.
ed by CjOO^Ic
COMPOUNDS.
75
2) As regards compounds, seldom more than two or three
stems are combined in the older language; but, as in
Sanskrit, the later the language is, the more compounds,
and cumbrous compounds prevail.
3) It is of course difficult to determine which compounds
Pali has formed itself, and which it has in common with
other Indian languages. A sort of criterion is, if we
find words compounded according to rules which are no more
in abeyance in Pali ; but even that does not prove con-
clusively that a compound belongs as commonwealth to the
Indian languages.
e.g. : sappuriso Skr. satpurusha ‘ a good man 9 ; pullihgam
Skr. pumlinga ‘ manhood/ for which in later Pali we find
pumalingam.
4) These compounds may be divided into three principal
classes :
I. Copulative or Aggregative Compounds (< dvandva ).
The members are coordinate ; in uncompounded condition
they would be joined with ca ‘and/ Examples are very
numerous.
The whole has the gender and declension of its last
member, and is in number a plural, e.g . : elaka-migasukara-
pakkhino.
The compound, without regard to the number denoted or
the gender of its constituents, becomes a singular collective.
The gender is mostly neuter.
e.g. : hiriottappam = hiri + ottappam
namarupam = namam + rupam
dad id as am = dasi + daso
ahoratto, ahoratti , ahorattam
kusalakusalam, dhammadhammo, but also as a
plural dhammadhamma.
Puma * a male 9 has two bases in composition : puma and
pum : of the former we have itthipumam * male and female , ;
of the latter pumiithi ‘masculine and feminine/
Nouns, adjectives and particles are not infrequently
ed by CjOO^Ic
76
PALI GRAMMAR.
repeated to give an intensive or distributive repetitional
meaning, e.g . :
divase divase c day after day , ; gamagamam ‘ village after
village 9 ; anhamannam ‘ mutually 1 ; punapunam ‘ again and
again/
II. Determinative Compounds ( tappurisa ).
There are two divisions :
1) Dependent compounds = the tappurisa proper, in which
the prior member is a substantive word standing to the other
in the relation of a case dependent on it.
2) Descriptive compounds =kammadhdray a, in which the
prior member is an adjective, or another word having the
value of an adjective qualifying a noun.
I. Dependent Compounds.
They can of course be used either substantively or
adjectively. The case relation may be of any kind.
brahmaloko ‘ Brahma world 9 ; padodakam ‘ water for the
feet 9 ; accharasambhavo ‘ descent from a nymph 9 ; saccavadi
‘ truthful ’ ; dhammadharo ‘ versed in the law * ; saranagama -
nam ‘ going for refuge , ; vedagu ‘ versed in the law 9 ;
jaccandho ‘ born blind 9 ; apabbajitasadiso * like one who has
given up the world , ; tadiso ‘like him , ; madiso ‘like me’;
thalipakko ‘ cooked in a pot/
The order of the members which form such compounds
may be inversed : addhamaso and masaddho ‘ half a month 9 ;
pitamaho ‘ a grandfather/
Raj an, sakha ( sakhi ), if employed as last members of a
compound, exhibit all the forms known from the declension.
As first member of a compound rdjan has the base rdjd ; the
only form allowed in the nom. case as last member is rdjd :
rdjabhayam ‘ fear from a king 9 ; Kosalaraja ‘ king of Kosala/
Sometimes stems not in use as simple words are employed
as first members. This looks as if a declined stem has
been used; but the dependency is not always such as to
favour such an explanation, e.g, : manasikdro ‘ attention/
ed by CjOO^Ic
COMPOUNDS.
77
II. Descriptive Compounds {kammadharaya).
It is of course sometimes difficult to say whether the com-
pound is tappurusa or kammadharaya.
mahanto ‘great’ takes in composition the weak forms maha
and mahaty santo * being, good, true/ the weak form sat.
Examples are : niluppalam ‘ blue lotus ’ ; sabbaseto ‘ all
white’; piyamvado 4 speaking kindly’; rajassala ‘a menstruous
woman’; sappuriso c a good man’; saddhammo ‘good doctrine’;
mahapphalo ‘ very fruitful ’ ; mahapuhho ‘ great virtue ’ ;
mahesi ‘great sage’ ; hetuppabhavo ‘proceeding from a cause’;
kacchurakhasa ‘ scab.’
The adverbial words which are most frequently and
commonly used as prior members of compounds are : a , an ,
ana ‘ the negative particle ’ ; su ‘ well ’ ; dm ‘ badly ’ ; sa
‘ with.’ e.g. : asahkhato ‘ the unconditioned ’ ; anano ‘ free
from debt ’ ; duppuro ‘ difficult to fill ’ ; sucinno ‘ well done ’ ;
saseno ‘ with an army ’ ; salajjo ‘ ashamed.’
ku as former part of many compounds designates inferiority.
It takes the forms : kud , kad, ku y e.g. : kunnadi ‘ an in-
significant river ’ ; kadannam ‘ bad food ’ ; kuditthi f wrong
view/
Closely related to the preceding class are III. the
Numeral Compounds ( digu ). The whole is made a neuter
singular.
A sample of this sort of compound is digu ‘itself worth
two cows ’ ; further tidandam ‘ three staves ’ ; ticivaram
‘ three robes * ; tiham ‘ three days.’
IV. Adverbial Compounds (< abyaylbhdva ).
They are also closely related to the Determinative com-
pounds. They are formed in joining prepositions and
adverbs to a noun, and are then used as abstracts, collectives,
and simply adverbially: yatharudm ‘according to one’s
pleasure ’ ; but yatharucito ‘ as liked, pleasant ’ ; yathamato
‘ as if dead ’ ; sampaharo ‘ wounding 1 ; sampajariham
‘ consciousness ’ ; apacaro ‘ approach.’
ed by CjOO^Ic
78
PALI GRAMMAR.
Y. All the preceding compounds may be used adjectively,
and are then called : Bahubbihi , e.g. : ntarago ‘ free from
passion ' ; but puruso ntarago ‘ a man free from passion, an
arhat 9 ; pancacakkhu ‘ the five sorts of vision 9 ; but as an
epithet of the Buddha, pancacakkhu * man possessing the five
sorts of vision * ; anupubbam * regular succession 9 ; but
anupubbo * regular, successive 9 ; anupubbo nirodho * successive
destruction/
In a few cases compounds are formed from words not
usually put together, e.g. of adverbs.
vitatho ‘false, unreal ’ =n+ tat ha ; yathatatho ‘real, true’rs
yatha+tathd. e.g . of a phrase : itihaso ‘tradition'; itivuttam
or itivuttakam ‘name of a book, a legend'; ahamahamikam
‘ conceit of superiority 9 =aham+aham .
All these compounds were formed before Pali became
a literary dialect.
ed by CjOO^Ic
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
II. CHRESTOMATHY.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
THE PARITTAM, BEING EXTRACTS
FROM THE SUTTA PITAKAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA
SAMBTJDDHASSA.
Buddham saranam gacchami.
Dhammam saranam gacchami.
Sangham saranam gacchami.
Dutiyam pi Buddham saranam gacchami.
Dutiyam pi Dhammam saranam gacchami.
Dutiyam pi Sangham saranam gacchami.
Tatiyam pi Buddham saranam gacchami.
Tatiyam pi Dhammam saranam gacchami.
Tatiyam pi Sangham saranam gacchami.
SARANAGAMANAM.
1) Panatipata veramanl sikkhapadam.
2) Adinnadana veramanl sikkhapadam.
3) Abrahmacariya veramanl sikkhapadam.
4) Musavada veramanl sikkhapadam.
5) Sura-meraya-majja-pamadatthana veramanl sikkha-
padam.
6) Yikalabhojana veramanl sikkhapadam.
7) Nacca-glta-vadita-visukadassana veramanl sikkhapadam.
8) Mala-gandha-vilepana-dharana-mandana-vibhusanattha-
na veramanl sikkhapadam.
6
ed by CjOCK^Ic
82
SAMANERAPANHA. DYATTIMSAKARA.
9) Uccasayana-mahasayana veramanl sikkhapadam.
10) Jatarupa-rajata-patiggahana veramanl sikkhapadam.
D ASASIKKHAPADANI.
‘ Eka nama kim ? ’ “ Sabbe satta abaratthitika.”
‘ Dve nama kim P 9 “ Namanca rupanca.”
€ Tini nama kim ? ’ “ Tisso vedana.”
‘ Cattari nama kim ? ’ “ Cattari ariyasaccani.”
‘ Paiica nama kim ? ’ “ Pane’ upadanakkhandha.”
‘ Cha nama kim ? 9 “ Cha ajjhattikani ayatanani.”
‘ Satta nama kim ? 9 “ Satta bojjhanga.”
* Attha nama kim ? 9 “ Ariyo atthangiko maggo.”
* Nava nama kim ? 9 “ Nava satta vasa.”
* Dasa nama kim ? 9 “ Dasah' angehi samannagato arah&ti
vuccati ti.”
SAMANERAPANHAM.
Attbi imasmim kaye : kesa, loma, nakha, danta, taco,
mamsam, naharu, attbi, atthiminja, vakkam, badayam,
yakanam, kilomakam, pihakam, pappbasam, antam, antagu-
nam, udariyam, karisam, pittam, semham, pubbo, lohitam,
sedo, raedo, assu, vasa, khelo, singhanika, lasika, muttam,
matthake matthalungan ti.
DYATTIMS AKARAM.
Patisankba yoniso civaram patisevami yavad eva sitassa
patighataya unbassa patighataya damsa-makasa-vat&tapa-
sirimsapa-samphassanam patighataya yavad eva biri-koplna
paticchadanattham. || 1 1|
Patisankha yoniso pindapatam patisevami n’eva davaya na
madaya na mandanaya na vibbusanaya, yavadeva imassa
kayassa thitiya yapanaya vihims¶tiya brahraacariya-
nuggahaya : iti purananca vedanam patisankhami navanca
ed by CjOCK^Ic
PACCAYEKKHANA. dasadhammasutta
83
vedanam na uppadessami, yatra ca me bhavissati anavajjata
ca phasuviharo c&ti. ||2||
Patisankha yoniso senasanam patisevami yavadeva sltassa
patighataya unhassa patighataya damsamakasavatatapasirim-
sapasamphassanam patighataya yavadeva utuparissaya vino-
danam patisallanaramattham. || 3 1|
Patisankha yoniso gilanapaccaya-bhesajjaparikkharam pa-
tisevami yavadeva uppannanam veyyabadhikanam vedana-
nam patighataya abyapajjhaparamatay&ti. ||4||
PACCAYEKKHANA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Tatra kho
Bhagava bhikkhu a man tesi : ‘ bhikkhavo ’ ti ‘bhadante’ ti.
Te bhikkhu Bhagavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad avoca :
“Dasa ime, bhikkhave, dhamma pabbajitena abhinham
paccavekkhitabba.
Katame dasa ?
1) Vevanniyamhi ajjhupagato ti pabbajitena abhinham
paccavekkhitabbam.
2) Parapatibaddha me jivikA ti pabbajitena abhinham pacca-
vekkhitabbam.
3) Anno me akappo karanlyo ti pabbajitena abhinham
paccavekkhitabbam.
4) Kacci nu kho me attasllato na upavadatiti pabbajitena
abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
5) Kacci nu kho mam anuvicca vinnfi sabrahmacari sllato
na upavadantiti pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
6) Sabbehi me piyehi manapehi nanabhavo vinabhavo ti
pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
7) Kammassa komhi kamma-dayado kamma-yoni kamma-
bandhu kamma-patisarano, yam kamraam karissami kalyanam
va papakam va tassa day ado bhavissamiti pabbajitena abhin-
ham paccavekkhitabbam.
8) Katham bhutassa me rattindiva vitipatantiti pabbaji-
tena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
84
MAHAMANGALASUTTA.
9) Kacci nu kho ’ham sunnagare abhiramamiti pabbaji-
tena abhinham paccayekkhitabbam.
10) Attbi nu kho me uttarimanussadhamma alaraariya-
nanadassanaviseso adhigato so ’ham pacchime kale sabbrah-
macarl puttho na manku bhavissamiti pabbajitena abhinham
paccayekkhitabbam.
Ime kho bhikkhave dasa dhamma pabbajitena abhinham
paccavekkhitabba ti.
Idam avoca Bhagava: attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato
bhasitam abhinandun ti.
DASADHAMMASITTTA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Atha kho
annatara devata abhikkantaya rattiya abhikkantavanna
kevalakappam Jetavanaip obhasetva, yena Bhagava ten’
upasankami upasankamitva Bhagavantam abhivadetva
ekamantam atthasi. Ekamantam thita kho sa devata Bhaga-
vantam gathaya ajjhabhasi :
“ Bahu deva manussa ca mangalani acintayum
Akankhamana sotthanam : bruhi mangalam utta-
mam.” ||1||
i Asevana ca balanain, panditanafica sevana,
Puja ca pujanlyanam: etam mangalam uttamain.’ ||2||
‘ Patirupa desavaso ca pubbe ca katapuiiriata
Atta sammapanidhi ca : etam mangalatn uttamam.’ || 3 1|
* Bahusaccanca sippafica vinayo ca susikkhito,
Subhasita ca ya vaca : etam mangalam uttamam.’ || 4 1|
‘ Matapitu upatthanam putta-darassa sangaho
Anakula ca kammanta : etam mangalam uttamam.’ || 5 1|
€ Dananca dhammacariya ca iiatakananca sangaho
Anavajjani kammani : etam mangalam uttamam.’ || 6 1|
‘ Arati virati papa majjapana ca sarifiamo
Appamado ca dhammesu: etam mangalam uttamam.’ ||7||
ed by CjOO^Ic
RATANASUTTA. 85
‘ Garavo ca nivato ca santutthl ca katannuta
Kalena dhamma-savanam : etam mangalam u^amam.’ || 8 1|
‘ Kb anti ca sovacassata samanananca dassanam
Kalena dhamma-sakaccha: etam mangalam uttamam/ ||9 1|
* Tapo ca brahmacariya ca ariyasaccana* dassanam
Nibbana-sacchikiriya ca: etam mangalam uttamam/ || 10 1|
* Phutthassa lokadhammebi cittam yassa na kampati
Asokam virajam khemam: etam mangalam uttamam/ || 11 II
‘ Etadisani katvana sabbattha-m-aparajita
Sabbatha sotthim gaccbanti: tesam mangalam utamam
ti/ || 12 1|
MAHAMANGALASUTTAM.
Yanldha bbutani samagatani
bhummani va yani va antalikkbe
sabb’ evabhuta sumana bbavantu
atho pi sakkacca sunantu bhasitam. || 1 1|
Tasmahi bhuta nisametba sabbe
mettam karotha manusiya pajaya
diva ca ratto ca haranti ye balim
tasmahi ne rakkhattha appamatta. ||2 1|
Yam kinei vittam idha va huram va
saggesu va yam ratanam panltam
na no samam atthi Tathagatena
idam pi buddhe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 3 1|
Khayam viragam amatam panltam
Yad ajjhaga Sakyamuni samahito
na ten a dhammena sam’ atthi kinei.
idam pi dhamme ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 4 1|
ed by CjOO^Ic
86
RATANASUTTA.
Yam buddhasettho parivannayl sucim
samadhim anantarikan nam ahu
samadhina tena samo na vijjati
idam pi dhamme ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 5 1|
Ye puggala attha satam pasattha
cattari etani yugani honti
te dakkhineyya Sugatassa savaka
etesu dinnani mahapphalaai.
idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 6 1|
Ye suppayutta raanasa dalhena
nikkamino Gotama-sasanamhi
te pattipatta amatam vigayha
laddha mudha nibbutim bhuiijamaua
idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 7 1|
Yath’ indakhllo pathavim sito siya
catubbhi vatebhi asampakampiyo
tathftpamain sappurisam vadami
yo ariyasaccani avecca passati
idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. ||8 ||
Ye ariya-saccaui vibhavayanti
gambhira-pannena sudesitani
kincapi te honti bhusappamatta
na te bhavam atthamam adiyanti
idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 9 j|
Sahav’ assa d assan a- sampaday a
tay' assu dhamma jahita bhavanti
sakkayaditthi vicikicchitanca
sllabbatam va pi yad atthi kiiici
catCh’ apayehi ca vippamutto
ed by CjOO^Ic
RATANASUTTA.
87
cha c&bhitthanani abhabbo katum
idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam.
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 10 |j
Kincapi so kammam karoti papakam
kayena vaca uda cetasa va
abhabbo so tassa paticchadaya
abhabbata ditthapadassa vutto
idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 11 1|
Vanappagumbe yatha phussitagge
gimhana-mase pathamasmim gimhe
tath£ipamam dhammavaram adesayi
nibbanagamim paramam hitaya
idam pi buddhe ratanam panitam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 12 1|
Yaro varaniiu varado varaharo
anuttaro dhammavaram adesayi
idam pi buddhe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. ||13||
Khlnam puranam navam n’atthi sambhavam
virattacitta ayatike bhavasmim
te khlna-blja avirulhicchanda
nibbanti dhlra yathdyam padlpo
idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu, || 14 1|
Yanidha bhutani samagatani
bhummani va yani va antalikkhe
Tathagatam deva-manussa-pujitam
Buddham namassama suvatthi hotu. || 15 1|
Yanidha bhutani samagatani
bhummani va yani va antalikkhe
Tathagatam deva-manussa-pujitam
dhammam namassama suvatthi hotu. ||16||
ed by CjOO^Ic
88
KARANIYAMETTASUTTA.
Yanidha bbutani samagatani
bhummani va yani va antalikkhe
Tatbagatam devamanussa-pujitam
sangham namassama suvatthi hotu. || 17 1|
RATANASUTTAM.
Kara my am attbakusalena
yan tam santam padam abbisamecca
Sakko uju ca suju ca
suvaco c’assa mudu anatimanl. || 1 1|
Santussako ca subharo ca
appakicco ca sallahukavutti
santindriyo ca nipako ca
appagabbho ca kulesu ananugiddbo. || 2 1|
Na ca khuddam samacare kirici
yena vianu pare upavadeyyum
sukhino va khemino hontu
sabbe satta bbavantu sukhitatta. |j4||
Ye keci panabbut’ attbi
tasa va tbavara va anavasesa
digha va ye mabanta va
majjliima rassaka anuka tbula. ||4||
Dittba va ye va adittba
ye ca dure vasanti avidure
bbuta va eambhavesl va
sabbe satta bbavantu sukkbitatta. || 5 1|
Na paro param nikubbetba
n&timannetha katthaci nam kinci
byarosana patigba-sanna
nanfiamannasa dukkham iccheyya. ||6 ||
Mata yatba niyam puttam
ayusa ekaputtam anurakkbe
KHANDHAPARITTA.
89
evam pi sabbabhutesu
manasam bbavaye aparimanam. || 7 1|
Mettanca sabbalokasmim
manasam bbavaye aparimanam
uddham adho ca tiriyaiica
asambadham averam asapattam. || 8 1|
Tittham caram nisinno va
sayano va yavat’ assa vigatamiddho
etam satim adhittheyya
brahmam etam viharam idha-m-ahu. ||9||
Dittbinca anupagamma
silava dassanena sampanno
kamesu vineyya gedham
nahi jatu gabbhaseyyam punar etiti. || 10 1|
karanIyamettasuttam.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Savattbiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Tena kbo pana
samayena Savatthiyam annataro bhikkhu abina dattbo
kalankato boti. Atba kho sambabula bbikkbu yena Bha-
gava ten* upasankamimsu upasankamitva Bbagavantam
abbivadetva ekamantam nisldimsu ekamantam nisinna kbo
te bbikkbu Bhagavantam etad avocum :
* Idba bbante, Savatthiyam annataro bhikkhu abina dattbo
kalankato ti/
“ Na ba nuna so, bbikkbave, bbikkbu imani cattari
ahirajakulani mettena cittena phari. Sace hi so bhikkbave
bhikkhu cattari ahirajakulani mettena cittena phareyya : na
hi so, bhikkbave, bhikkhu ahina dattho kalam kareyya. ,>
Katamani cattari ahirajakulani? Virupakkham abiraja-
kulain, Erapatbam ahirajakulam Chabyaputtam ahiraja-
kulam Kanbagotamakam ahirajakulam.
Na ha nuna so, bhikkbave, bhikkhu imani cattari ahiraja-
kulani mettena cittena phari. Sace hi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu
ed by CjOO^Ic
90
METTASUTTA.
imani cattari ahirajakulani mettena cittena phareyya, na hi
so bhikkhave bhikkhu ahina dattho kalam kareyya.
Anujanami, bhikkhave, imani cattari ahirajakulani mettena
cittena pharitum : attaguttiya attarakkhaya attaparittay&ti.
Idam avoca Bhagava. Idam vatva Sugato ath¶m etad
avoca sattha :
Yirilpakkhehi me mettam, mettam Erapathehi me
Chabyaputtehi me mettam, mettam Kanhagotamakehi
ca. mil
Apadakehi me mettam, mettam dvipadakehi me
catuppadehi me mettam mettam bahuppadehi me. || 2 1|
Ma mam apadako himsi, ma mam himsi dvipadako
ma mam cattuppado himsi ma mam himsi bahuppado. || 3 1|
Sabbe satta sabbe pana sabbe bhuta ca kevala
sabbe bhadrani passantu, ma kiftci papam agama || 4 1|
Appamano buddho, appamano dhammo, apparaano sangho ;
pamanavantani sirimsapani ahivicchika satapadi unnana-
bhisarabu musika.
Kata me rakkha, kata me paritta, patikkamantu bhutani,
so ’ham namo Bhagavato namo sattannam sammasambuddha-
nam.
KHANDHAPARITTAM.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Tatra kho
Bhagava bhikkhu amantesi: ‘‘bhikkhavo” ti, “bhadante” ti.
Te bhikkhu Bhagavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad avoca :
ct Mettaya, bhikkhave, cetovimuttiya, asevitaya, bhavitaya,
bahullkataya, vanikataya, vatthukataya, anutthitaya pari-
citava susamaraddhaya ekadas&nisamsa patikankha.
Katame ekadasa ?
1) Sukham supati.
2) sukham patibujjhati.
3) na papakam supinam passati.
ed by CjOO^Ic
METTANISAMSAM.
91
4) manussanam piyo hoti.
5) amanussanam piyo hoti.
6) devata rakkhanti.
7) nassa aggi va visam va sattham va kamati.
8) tuvatam cittam samadhlyati.
9) mukhavanno vippasldati.
10) asammulho kalam karoti.
11) uttarim appativijjhanto brahmalokApago hoti ti.
Mettaya, bhikkhave, cetovimuttiya asevitaya bbavitaya
bahulikataya yanikataya vatthukataya anutthitaya paricitaya
susamaraddhaya : ime ekadasanisamsa patikankha ti.
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato
bhasitam abhinandunti.
METTASUTTAM.
Pahuta-bbakkbo bbavati vippavuttho saka ghara
bahu nara upajlvanti yo mittanam na dubhati. || 1 1|
Yam yam janapadam yati nigame rajadhaniyo
sabbattha pujito hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. ||2||
N&ssa corn pasahanti n^timaiineti khattiyo
sabbe amitte tarati yo mittanam na dubhati. ||3||
Akkuddho sagharam eti sabhaya patinandito
iiatlnam uttamo hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. || 4 1|
Sakkatva sakkato hoti garu hoti sagaravo
vanna-kitti-bhato hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. || 5 1|
Pujako labhate pujam vandako pativandanam
yaso kittinca pappoti yo mittanam na dubhati. || 6 1|
Aggi yatha pajjalati devata va virocati
siriya ajahito hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. ||7||
Gavo tassa pajayanti khette vuttam viruhati
puttanam phalam asnati yo mittanam na dubhati. ||8||
ed by CjOO^Ic
92
MORAPARITTA.
Darlto pabbatato va rukkhato patito naro
cuto patittham labhati yo mittanam na dubhati. || 9 1|
Virulhamulasantanam nigrodham iva raaluto
amitta nappasahanti yo mittanam na dubhati ti. || 10 1|
METTANISAMSAM.
Udet* ayam cakkbuma ekaraja
harissa-Yanno pathavippabhaso,
tarn tarn namassami harissavannam pathavippabhasam,
tay* ajja gutta viharemu divasam. || 1 1|
Ye brahmana vedagu sabbadhamme
te me namo te ca mam palayantu,
Nam’ atthu buddbanam, nam* atthu bodhiya !
namo vimuttanam, namo vimuttiya ! || 2 ||
Imam so parittam katva, moro carati esana.
Apet’ ayam cakkbuma ekaraja
barissavanno pathavippabhaso,
tam tarn namassami harissavannam pathavippabhasam
tay* ajja gutta viharemu rattim. || 3||
Ye brahmana vedagu sabbadhamme
te me namo te ca mam palayantu,
Nam’ atthu buddhanaip, nam’' atthu bodhiya!
namo vimuttanam, namo vimuttiya ! || 4 1|
Imam so parittam katva, moro vasam akappayiti.
MORAPARITTAM.
Evam ne sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati, Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Tena kho pana
samayena Candima devaputto Rahuna asurindena gahlto
hoti. Atha kho Candima devaputto Bhagavantam anussara-
mano tayam velayam imam gatham abhasi :
ed by CjOO^Ic
CANDAPARITTA.
93
* Namo te Buddha-vlr* atthu !
yippamutto 'si sabbadhi
sambadha-patipanno ’smi
tassa me saranam bhav&ti. , || 1 1|
Atha kho Bhagava Candimaip devaputtam arabbha Rahum
asurindam gathaya ajjhabhasi.
“ Tathagatam arahantam
Candima saranam gato
Rahu ! Candam pamuncassu
Buddha lok&nukampak&ti.” ||2||
Atha kho Rahu asurindo Candimam devaputtam muncitva
taramanarupo yena Yepacitti asurindo ten’ upasahkami
upasankamitva samviggo lomahatthajato ekamantam atthasi
ekamantam thitam kho Rahum asurindam Yepacitti asurindo
gathaya ajjhabhasi :
“ Kin nu santaramano Va
Rahu ! Candam pamuncasi
samviggarupo agamma
kin nu bhlto *va titthasiti.” ||3||
* Sattadha me phale muddha
jlvanto na sukham labhe.
Buddhagath&bhiglto ’mhi
no ce munceyya Candiman ti. ||4 ||
CANDAPARITTA ..
Evam me sutam: Ekam samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa ararne. Tena kho pan a
samayena Suriyo devaputto Rahuna asurindena gahito hoti.
Atha kho Suriyo devaputto Bhagavantaip. anussaramano
tayam velayam imam gatham abhasi :
4 Namo te buddha vlr* atthu !
vippamutto ’si sabbadhi
sambadhapatipanno ’smi
tassa me saranam bbav&ti.’ || 1 1|
ed by CjOCK^Ic
94
SURIYAPARITTA.
Atha kho Bhagava Suriyam devaputtam arabbha Rahum
asurindam gathaya ajjhabhasi :
“ Tathagatam arahantam
Suriyo saranam gato
Rahu ! Suriyam pamuficassu
Buddha lok&nukampakati.” ||2||
“ To andhakare tamasl pabhankaro
verocano mandall uggatejo
ma Rahu gill caram antalikkhe
pajam mama Rahu pamunca Suriyan ti.” ||3[|
Atha kho Rahu asurindo Suriyam devaputtam — pe —
‘ Sattadha me phale muddha
jlvanto na sukham labhe
Buddhagath^bhigito 'mhi :
no ce muncevya Suriyan ti.* || 4 1|
SURIYAPARITTAM.
Evam me sutam. Ekam samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Tatra kho
Bhagava bhikkhu amantesi M bhibkhavo^ ti, “bhadante” ti.
te bhikkhu Bhagavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad
avoca: ||1||
“ Bhutapubbam, bhikkhave, dev^sura-sarigamo samu-
pabbulho ahosi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sakko devanam
indo deve Tavatimse amantesi :
“ Sace, marisa, devanam sangamagatanam uppajjeyya bha-
yam va chambhitattam va lomahamso va mam eva tasmim
samaye dhajaggam idlokeyyatha. Mamam hi vo dhajaggam
ullokayatam yam bhavissati bhayam va chambhitattam va
lomahamso va so pahlyassati. ||2||
No ce me dhajaggam ullokeyyatha, atha kho Pajapatissa
devarajassa dhajaggam ullokeyyatha. Pajapatissa hi vo deva-
rajassa dhajaggam ullokayatam ; yam bhavissati bhayam
va chambhitattam va lomahamso va so pahlyissati. || 3 1|
ed by CjOO^Ic
DHAJAGGA PARITTA.
95
No ce Pajapatissa devarajassa dhajaggam ullokeyyatha,
atha Yarunassa devarajassa dhajaggam ullokeyyatha.
Yarunassa hi vo devarajassa dhajaggam ullokayatam yam
bhavissati bhayam va chambhitattam va lomahamso va so
pahiyissati. ||4||
No ce Yarunassa devarajassa dhajaggam ullokeyyatha,
atha Isanassa devarajassa dhajaggam ullokeyyatha. Isa-
nassa hi vo devarajassa dhajaggam ullokayatam yam bha-
vissati bhayam va chambhitattam va lomahamso va so
pahiyissati. ||5||
Tam kho pana bhikkhave Sakkassa va devanam indassa
dhajaggam ullokayatam : Pajapatissa va devanam rajassa
dhajaggam ullokayatam : Varunassa va devarajassa dhajaggam
ullokayatam: Isauassa va devarajassa dhajaggam ulloka-
yatam : yam bhavissati bhayam va chambhitattam va loma-
hamso va so pahlyetha pi no pahlyetha. II 6 1|
Tam kissa hetu ?
“Sakko, bhikkhave, devanam indo avltarago avltadoso
avltamoho bhlrucchambhi uttrasi phalayiti.” [| 7 1|
Ahanca kho bhikkhave evam vadami : “ Sace tumhakam,
bhikkhave, arannagatanam va rukkhamulagatanam va sunna-
garagatanam va nppajjeyya bhayam va chambhitattam va
lomahamso va mam eva tasmim samaye anussareyyatha :
Iti pi so Bhagava araham samma-sambuddho vijja-carana-
sampanno sugato lokavidu anuttaro purisadamma-sarathi
sattha devamanussanam buddho Bhagava ti. || 8 1|
Mamam hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati
bhayam va chambhitattam va lomahamso pahiyissati.
No ce mam anussareyyatha atha dhammam anussareyyatha :
Svakkhato Bhagavata dhammo sanditthiko akaliko ehipassiko
opanayiko paccattam veditabbo viiifiuhiti. Dhammam hi vo
bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati bhayam va chambhi-
tattam va lomahamso va so pahiyissati. || 9 1|
No ce dhammam anussareyyatha atha sangham anussa-
reyyatha. Supatipanno Bhagavato savakasangho, ujupati-
panno Bhagavato savakasangho, nayapatipanno Bhagavato
savakasangho, samlcipatipanno Bhagavato savakasangho ;
yadidam cattari purisayugani attha purisapuggala esa sava-
ed by CjOO^Ic
96
DHAJAGGA PARITTA.
kasangho : ahuneyyo pahuneyyo dakkhineyyo anjalikaranlyo
anuttaram punna-khettam lokassati.
Sangham hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhayissati
bhayam va chambhitattam va lomahamso va so pahl-
yissati. || 10 1|
Tam kissa hetu ?
Tathagato hi, bhikkhave, araham samraasambuddho
vltarago vitadoso vltamoho abhlru acchambhi anutrasi
aphalayiti. ||11||
Idam avoca Bhagava idam vatvana Sugato athS,param
etad avoca sattha :
" Aranne rukkha muleva sunnagareva bhikkhavo
anussaretha sambuddham bhayam tumhakam no siya.” || 1 1|
“ No ce Buddham sareyyatha lokajettham narasabham :
atha dhammam sareyyatha niyyanikam sudesitam. ,, j|2||
No ce Dhammam sareyyatha niyyanikam sudesitam
atha sangham sareyyatha puniiakkhettam anuttaram. ,, || 3 1|
" Evam Buddham sarantanam dhammam sanghanca
bhikkhavo
bhayam va chambhitattam va lomahamso na hessa-
titi> || 4 1|
DHAJAGGA PARITTAM.
Evam me sutam: Ekam samayam Bhagava Rajagahe
viharati Veluvane Kalandakanivape. Tena kho pana sama-
yena ayasma Mahakassapo pipphaliguhayam viharati,
abadhiko dukkhito balhagilano. Atha kho Bhagava sayan-
hasamayam patisallana vutthito, yen’ ayasma Mahakassapo
ten’ upasahkami upasankamitva pannatte asane nisldi.
Nisajja kho Bhagava ayasmantam Makakassapam etad
avoca :
“ Kacci te Kassapa khamanlyam, kacci yapaniyam, kacci
dukkhavedana patikkamanti no abhikkamanti. Patikkamo
’sanam pannaya ti no abhikkamo ” ti.
ed by CjOO^Ic
MAHAKASSAPABOJJHANGA.
97
*Na me, bhante, khamaniyam na yapanlyam balha me
dukkhavedana abhikkamanti no patikkamanti. Abhikkamo
’sanam pannayati no patikkamo ti.
“ Satt* ime, Kassapa, bojjhanga maya sammad-akkhata bha-
vita bahullkata abhinnaya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattanti.
1) Satisambojjhahgo kho, Kassapa, maya sammad-akkhato
bhavito bahullkato abhinnaya sambodhaya nibbanaya
samvattati.
2) Dhammavicayasambojjhango — pe — nibbanaya sam-
vattati. *
3) Yiriyasambojjhahgo — pe — nibbanaya samvattati.
4) Pitisambojjhango — pe — nibbanaya samvattati.
5) Passaddhisambojjhango — pe — nibbanaya samvattati.
6) Saraadhisambojjhahgo — pe — nibbanaya samvattati.
7) Upekhasambojjhango — pe — nibbanaya samvattati.
Ime kho Kassapa satta boj jhanga maya sammadakkhata
bhavita bahullkata abhinnaya sambodhaya nibbanaya sam-
vattantiti.
‘ Taggha, Bhagava, bojjhanga, taggha, Sugata, bojjhanga
ti/
Idam avoca Bhagava : — attamano ayasma Mahakassapo
Bhagavato bhasitam abhinandi.
Vutthahi cayasma Mahakassapo tamha abadha tatha pahlno
c^yasmato Mahakassapassa so abadho ahositi.
MAHAKASSAPATTHEKABO J JHANGAIf.
The Mahamoggallanatthera bojjhahgam and the Maha -
cundatthera bojjhahgam agree with the preceding sutta in all
but the name.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Tena kho pana
samayena ayasma Girimanando abadhiko hoti dukkhito
balhagilano. Atha kho ayasma Anando yena Bhagava ten*
upasamkami upasamkamitva Bhagavantam abhivadetva
ekamantam nisldi ekamantam nisinno kho ayasma Anando
Bhagavantam etad avoca :
7
ed by CjOO^Ic
98
GIRIMANANDASUTTA.
Ayasma, bhante, Girimanando abadhiko dukkhito bajbagi-
lano. Sadhu bhante Bhagava ; yen* ayasma Girimanando
ten* upasahkamatu anukampam upadayati.
Sace kho tvam Ananda Girimanandassa bhikkhuno
upasahkamitva dasa sanna bhaseyyasi. Thanam kho
pan 1 etam vijjati yam Girimanandassa bhikkhuno dasa
sanna sutva so abadho thanaso patippassambheyya.
Katame dasa sanna ?
“ Aniccasanna, anattasanna, asubhasanna, adlnavasanna,
pahanasanna, viragasaflna, nirodhasanna, sabbaloke anabhi-
rati sanna, sabbasankharesu aniccasanna, anapanasati.”
Katama ca Ananda aniccasanna P
“Idh’ Ananda bhikkhu, arannagato va rukkhamulagato
va sunnagaragato va iti patisancikkhati : — •
Rupam aniccam, vedana anicca, sanna anicca, sankhara
anicca, vinnanam aniccan ti. Iti imesu pancas* upada-
nakkhandhesu aniccanupassl viharati. Ayam vuccat > Ananda
aniccasanna. ||1||
Katama ca Ananda anattasanna P
Idh* Ananda — pe — patisancikkhati : —
Cakkhum anatta, rupam anatta, sotam anatta, jivha anatta,
rasa anatta, kayo anatta, photthabba anatta, mano anatta,
dhamma anatta ti.
Iti ime chasu ajjhattika-bahiresu ayatanesu anattanupassl
viharati. Ayam vuccatf Ananda anattasanna. || 2 1|
Katama ca Ananda asubhasanna? Idh’ Ananda bhikkhu
imam eva kayam uddham padatala, adho kesamatthaka taca-
pariyantam puram nanappakarassa asucino paccavekkhati.
Atthi imasmim kaye : kesa — pe — matthaluhgan ti. (See
page 82).
Iti imasmim kaye asubh&nupassl viharati. Ayam vuccat’
Ananda asubhasaiifia. ||3||
Katama ca Ananda adlnavasanna P Idh’ Ananda — pe —
patisancikkhati.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GIRIMANANDASUTTA.
99
Bahu dukkho kho ayam kayo, bahu adlnavo iti imasmim
kaye vividha abadha uppajjanti seyyathidam : —
Cakkhurogo, sotarogo, ghanarogo, jivharogo, kayarogo,
slsarogo, kannarogo, mukharogo, dantarogo, kaso, saso,
pinaso, daho, jaro, kucchirogo, muccha, pakkhandika, sulo,
visucika, kuttham, gando, kilaao, soso, apamaro, daddu,
kandu, kacchura-khasa, vitacchika, lohitam, pittam, madhu-
meho, amsa, pilaka, bhagandala, pitta-samutthana-abadha,
semha-samutthana-abadha, vata-samutthana-abadha, sanni-
patika- abadha, utu-viparinamaja-abadha, visama-pariharaja-
abadha, opaka-abadha, kammavipaka-abadha, sltam, unham,
jighaccha, pipasa, uccaro, passavo.
Iti imasmim kaye adinavanupassl viharati. Ayam vuccat’
Ananda, adlnavasanna. ||4||
Katama ca Ananda pahanasanna ? Idh* Ananda bhikkhu
uppannam kama-vitakkam n&dhivaseti pajahati, vinodeti
byantikaroti anabhavam gameti.
Uppannam byapadavitakkam n&dhivaseti pajahati vinodeti
byantikaroti anabhavam gameti.
Uppannam vihimsavitakkam nadhivaseti pajahati vino-
deti byantikaroti anabhavam gameti.
Uppannam uppanne papake akusale dhamme n&dhivaseti
pajahati vinodeti byantikaroti anabhavam gameti.
Ayam vuccat* Ananda pahanasanna. || 5 1|
Katama c’ Ananda viragasaiina ?
Idh* Ananda bhikku — pe — patisancikkhati.
Etam santam etam pamtam yadidam sabbasankhara-
samatho sabbhpadhi patinissago tanhakkhayo virago nibba-
nan ti.
Ayam vuccat* Ananda viragasaiina. ||6||
Katama ca Ananda nirodhasanna ?
Idh’ Ananda bhikkhu — pe — patisancikkhati :
Etam santam etam panitam yadidam sabbasankharasamatho
sabbhpadhi patinissaggo tanhakkhayo nirodho nibbanan ti.
Ayam vuccat’ Ananda nirodhasanfia. ||7||
ed by CjOCK^Ic
100
GIRIMANAXDASUTTA.
Katama c* Ananda sabbaloke anabhiratisan na ?
Idti* Ananda bhikkhu ye loke upayupadana cetaso
adhitthan&bhinives&nusaya te pajahanto viramati na upadi-
yanto. Ayam vuccat* Ananda sabba loke anabhirati sauna. || 8 1|
Katama c’ Ananda sabbasankharesu aniccasanna ?
Idh’ Ananda bhikkhu sabbasankharesu atthiyati harayati
jigucchati. Ayam vuccat* Ananda sabbasankharesu anieca-
sanna. ||9[|
Katama c’ Ananda anapanasati ?
Idh’ Ananda bhikkhu arannagato va rukkhamulagato va
sunnagaragato va nlsldati pallankam abhujitva ujum kayam
panidhaya parimukkham satim upatthapetva so sato va
assasati sato passasati:
Dlgham va assasanto dlgham assasamiti pajanati.
Dlgham va passanto dlgham passasamiti pajanati.
Rassam va assasanto rassam assasamiti pajanati.
Rassam va passasanto rassam passasamiti pajanati.
Sabbakayam patisamvedi assasissamiti sikkhati.
Sabbakayam patisamvedi passasissamiti sikkhati.
Passambhayam kayasankharam assasissamiti sikkhati.
Passambhayam kayasankharam passasissamiti sikkhati.
Plti-patisamvedl assasissamiti sikkhati.
Plti-patisamvedl passasissamiti sikkhati.
Sukha-patisamvedi assasissamiti sikkhati.
Sukha-patisamvedi passasissamiti sikkhati.
Citta-sankhara-patisamvedi assasissamiti sikkhati.
Citta-sankhara-patisamvedi passasissamiti sikkhati.
Passambhayam cittasankharam assasissamiti sikkhati.
Passambhayam cittasankharam passasissamiti sikkhati.
Citta-patisamvedi assasissamiti sikkhati.
Citta- patisamvedi passasissamiti sikkhati.
Abhippamodayam cittam assasissamiti sikkhati.
Abhippamodayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
ATANATIYASUTTA.
101
Samadayam cittam assasissamiti sikkhati.
Samadayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati.
Yimocayam cittam assasissamiti sikkhati.
Yimocayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati.
Anicc&nupassI assasissamiti sikkhati.
Anicc&nupassl passasissamiti sikkhati.
Yiraganupassi assasissamiti sikkhati.
Virag&nupassI passasissamiti sikkhati.
NirodhanupassI assasissamiti sikkhati.
NirodhanupassI passasissamiti sikkhati.
PatinissagganupassT assasissamiti sikkhati.
Patinissagg&nupassI passasissamiti sikkhati. —
Ayam vuccat* Ananda anapanasati. ||10||
Race kho tvam Ananda Girimanandassa bhikkhum ima
dasa sanna sutva so abadho thanaso patippassambheyyfi,ti.
Atha kho ayasma Anando Bhagavato santike ima dasa
sanna uggahetva : yen’ ayasma Girimanando ten’ upasankami
upasankamitva ayasmato Girimanandassa ima dasa sanna
abhasi.
Atha kho ayasmato Girimanadassa ima dasa sanna sutva
so abadho thanaso patippassambhi.
Vutthahi cayasma Girimanando tamha abadha tatha
pahlno ca pan&yasmato Girimanandassa so abadho ahositi.
GIRIMANANDASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Rajagahe
viharati Gijjhakute pabbate. Atha kho cattaro maharaja
mahatiya ca Yakkha-senaya mahatiya ca Gandhabba-senaya
mahatiya ca Kumbhanda-senaya mahatiya ca Naga-senaya
catuddisam rakkham thapetva catuddisam gumbam thapetva
catuddisam avaranam thapetva abhikkantaya rattiya abhik-
ed by CjOO^Ic
102
ATANATIYASUTTA.
kantavanna kevalakappam Gijjhakutam obhasetva : yena
Bhagava ten* upasankamimsu : upasahkamitva Bhagavantam
abhivadetva ekamantam nisldimsu. f| 1 1|
Te pi kbo Yakkha app* ekacce Bhagavantam abhivadetva
ekamantam nisldimsu ; app* ekacce yena Bhagavata saddhim
sammodimsu sammodanlyam katham saraniyam vitisaretva
ekamantam nisldimsu; app* ekacce yena Bhagava ten* anjalim
panametva ekamantam nisldimsu ; app , ekacce nama gottam
savetva ekamantam nisldimsu ; app 1 ekacce tunhlbhuta eka-
mantam nisldimsd. ||2||
Ekamantam nisinno kho Vessavanno maharaja Bhaga-
vantam etad avoca : —
Santi hi, bhante, ulara Yakkha Bhagavato appasanna :
santi hi, bhante, ulara Yakkha Bhagavato pasanna: santi
hi, bhante, majjhima Yakkha appasanna : santi hi, bhante,
majjhima Yakkha pasanna: santi hi, bhante, nlca Yakkha
Bhagavato appasanna: santi hi, bhante, nica Yakkha Bha-
gavato pasanna. ||3||
Yebhuyyena kho pana bhante Yakkha appasanna yeva
Bhagavato tarn kissa hetu ?
“Bhagava hi, bhante, panatipata veramanlya dhammam
deseti ; adinnadana veramanlya dhammam deseti ; kamesu
micchacara veramanlya dhammam deseti ; musavada vera-
manlya dhammam deseti ; suramerayamajja-pamadatthana
veramanlya dhammam deseti.” || 4 1|
“Yebhuyyena kho pana, bhante, Yakkha appati virata yeva
panatipata, appativirata adinnadana, appativirata kamesu
micchacara, appativirata musavada, appativirata sura-
merayamajjapamadatthana, tesam tarn hoti appiyam amana-
pam.” || 5 1|
“ Santi hi bhante Bhagavato savaka arafine vanapanthani
panthani senasanani patisevanti appasaddani appanigghosani
vijanavatani manussa-rahaseyyakani patisallana-saruppani :
Tattha santi ulara Yakkha nivasino, ye imasmim Bhagavato
pavacane appasanna. Tesam pasadaya ugganhatu, bhante,
Bhagava Atanatiyam rakkham bhikkhunam, bhikkhunlnam,
upasakanam upasikanam guttiya rakkhaya avihimsaya
phasuviharayati.” Adhivasesi Bhagava tunhibhavena. Atha
ed by CjOO^Ic
ATANATIYASUTTA.
103
kho Yessavano maharaja Bhagavato adhivasanam viditva
tayam velayam imam Atanatiyam rakkham abhasi : || 6 1|
Yipassissa nam’ atthu cakkhumantassa sirimato !
Sikkhissa pi nam’ atthu sabba-bhut&nukampino ! || 1 1|
, Yessabhussa nam’ atthu nahatakassa tapassino !
Nam’ atthu Kakusandhassa Mara-sena-pamaddino ! ||2||
Konagamanassa nam’ atthu brahmanassa vuslmato !
Kaspapassa nam’ atthu vippamuttassa sabbadhe ! || 3||
Angirasassa nam’ atthu Sakyaputtassa sirimato !
Yo imam dhammam adesesi sabba-dukkha pan udanam ! || 4 1|
Ye capi nibbuta loke yathabhutam vipassisum
Te jana apisuna ca mahanta vitasarada
Hitam devamanussanam yam naraassanti Gotamam
Yijjacarana-sampannam mahantam vitasaradam. ||5||
Yato uggacchati suriyo adicco mandall maha,
Yassa c’uggacchamanassa samvarl pi nirujjhati,
Yassa c’uggate suriye divaso ti pavuccati. ||6||
Rahado pi tattha gambhlro samuddo saritodako
Evam tarn tattha jananti samuddo saritodako
Ito sa purima disa iti nam acikkhati jano. ||7 II
Yam disam abhipaleti maharaja yassasi so
Gandhabbanam adhipati Dhatarattho iti namaso
Ramati naccagitehi Gandhabbehi purakkhato. || 8 1|
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutam
Asltim dasa eko ca Indanama mahabbala. || 9 1|
Te ca pi Buddham disvana Buddham adiccabandhunam
Durato va namassanti mahantam vitasaradam. || 10 1|
Namo te purisSjanna ! namo te puris’ uttama !
Kusalena samekkhesi amanussa pi tarn vandanti !
Sutam n’etam abhinhaso tasma evam vademase. Ill 111
Jinam vandatha Gotamam ! jinam vandama Gotamam,
Yijjacaranasampannam Buddham vandama Gotamam! || 12 1|
Yena Peta pavuccanti pisuna pitthimamsika
Pa^atipatino ludda cora nekatika jana. II 13 1|
ed by CjOO^Ic
104
AT 4NATIYASUTTA.
I to 8a dakkhina disa iti nam acikkhati jano
Yam disam abhipaleti maharaja y as ass Iso
Kumbhandanam adhipati Yirulho iti nama so
Ramati naccagltehi Kumbhandehi pur* akkhato. || 14 1|
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutam
Asltim dasa eko ca Indanama mahabbala II 15 1|
Te ca pi Buddham disvana Buddham adicca bandhunam
Durato va namassanti mahantam vltasaradam. || 16 II
Namo te purisaj anna ! namo te puri8 , uttama !
Kusalena samekkhasi amanussa pi tarn vandanti !
Sutam n* etam abhinhaso tasma evam yandemase. II 17 II
Jinam vandatha Gotamam, jinam vandama Gotamam,
Yijjacaranasampannam Buddham vandama Gotamam ! II 18 1|
Yatha c* uggacchati suriyo adicco mandall maha
Yassa c 9 uggacchamanassa divaso pi nirujjhati
Yassa coggate suriye samvariti pavuccati
Rahado pi tattha garabhiro samuddo saritodako
Evam tarn tattha jananti samuddo saritodako. || 19 1|
I to sa pacchima disa iti nam acikkhati jano
Yam disam abhipaleti maharaja yasassl so
Naganam ca adhipati Yirupakkho iti namaso
Ramati naccagltehi Nagehi purakkhato. ||20||
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutam
Asltim dasa eko ca Indanama mahabbala. II 21 1|
Te capi Buddham disvana Buddham adiccabandhunam
Durato va namassanti mahantam vltasaradam. || 22 1|
Namo te purisaj anna, namo te puris’ uttama
Kusalena samekkhasi amanussa pi tarn vandanti
Sutam n’etam abhinhaso tasma evam vandemase ! || 23 1|
Jinam vandatha Gotamam ! jinam vandama Gotamam
Yijjacaranasampannam Buddham vandama Gotamam !
Yena TJttara-kururamma Mahameru Sudassano
Manussa tattha jayanti amama apariggaha. ||24||
ed by CjOO^Ic
ATANATIYASUTTA.
105
Na te bijam pavapanti na pi nlyanti nangala
Akattha-pakimam salim paribhunjanti manussa. || 25 1|
Akanam athusam suddbam sugandham tandulapphalam
Tundlkire pacitvana tato bhuiijanti bhojanam. ||26||
Gavim ekakburam katva anuyanti diso disam
Pasum ekakburam katva anuyanti diso disam
Itthi va vahanam katva anuyanti diso disam
Purisavabanam katva anuyanti diso disam
Kumarlvabanam katva anuyanti disa disam
Kumaravabanam katva anuyanti diso disam. ||27l|
Te yane abhirubitva sabbadisa anupariyanti pacara tassa
rajino
Hattbi-yanam assa-yanam dibba-yanam upatthitam
Pasada sivika c’ eva mabarajassa yassasl so
Tassa ca nagara abu antalikkbe sumapita
Atanata Kusinata Parakusinata Natapuriya Parakusita-
nata. ||28[|
Uttarena Kuplvanto Janogham aparena ca
Navanavatiyo Ambara-ambaravatiyo Alakamanda naraa
rajadbanL ||29||
Kuverassa kbo pana, marisa, mabarajassa Yisana nama
rajadbani
Tasma Kuvero mabaraja Yessavano ti pavuccati. || 30 [|
Paccessanto pakasenti Tatola Tattala Tatotala
Ojasi Tejasi Tatojasi Saroraja Arittho Nemi
Rabado pi tattha DharanI nama yato megha pavassanti
Yassa yato patayanti sabbapi tattha Bbagalavati nama
Yattba Yakkha payirupasanti. ||31||
Tattha niccapbala rukkha nama dijagan&yuta
Mayura-koncabhi ruda-kokiladlhi vaggubbi
Jlvam-jivaka sadd’ ettha, atho otthava-cittaka
Kukuttbaka kuliraka vane pokkharasataka. || 32 1|
Sukasalika-sadd* ettha, dandamanavakani ca
Sobhati sabbakalam sa Kuvera-nalinI sada. II 33 1|
ed by
Google
106
ATANATIYASUTTA.
I to sa uttara disa iti nam acikkhati jano,
Yam disam abhipaleti maharaja yasassT so
Yakkhanam adhipati Kuvero iti namaso
Ramati nacca-gltehi Yakkhehi pur* akkhato. II 34 1!
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutam
Asitim dasa eko ca Inda nama mahabbala. II 35 1|
Te c&pi Buddham disvana Buddham adicca bandhunam
Durato va namassanti mahantam vitasaradam. ||36|f
Namo te puris 1 ajanna, namo te puris' uttama
Kusalena samekkhasi amanussa pi tarn vandanti
Sutam n* etam abhinhaso : tasma evam vandemase ! ||37||
Jinam yandatha Gotamam ! Jinam vandama Gotamam !
Yijjacarana-sampannam Buddham vandama Gotamam! ||38||
Ayam kho sa, marisa, Atanatiya rakkha, bhikkhunam
bhikkhunlnam upasakanam npasikanam guttiya, rakkhaya,
avihimsaya, phasu viharayfi, ti. II 7 II
Yassa kassaci, marisa, bhikkhussa va bhikkhuniya va
upasakassa va upasikaya v& : ayam Atanatiya rakkha sugga-
hita bhavissati samatta pariyaputa tance amanusso Yakkho va
YakkhinI va Yakkhapotako va Yakkhapotika va Yakkha-
mahamatto va Yakkhaparisajjo va Yakkhapacaro va II 8 II
Gandhabbo va Gandhabbi va — pe — II 9 II
Kumbhando va Kumbhandi va — pe — II 10 II
Nago va Naglnl va — pe — II 11 II
padutthacitto gacchantam va anugaccheyya thitam va
upatittheyya, nisinnam va upanisldeyya, nipannam va
upanipajjeyya. II12II
Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya gamesu va nigamesu
va sakkaram va garukaram va.
Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya Alakamandaya raja-
dhaniya vatthum va vasam va.
Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya Yakkhanam samitim
gantum. II 1311
Api 88U nam, marisa, amanussa anavayham pi nam
kareyyum avivayham. Api ssu nam, marisa, amanussa attahi
ed by CjOO^Ic
ATANATIYASUTTA.
107
pi paripunnahi paribbasahi paribhaseyyum. Api ssu nam,
marisa, amanussa rittam pi pattam slse nikkujjeyyum
Api ssu nam, marisa, amanussa sattadha pi assa muddham
phaleyyum. ||14||
Santi hi, marisa, amanussa, canda, rudda, rabbasa, te n* eva
maharajanam adiyanti ; na maharajanam purisakanam adi-
yanti ; na maharajanam purisakanam purisakanam adiyanti.
Te kho te, marisa, amanussa mabarajanam avaruddha nama
vuccanti, seyyathapi marisa, ||15||
“ranno Magadhassa vijite cora : te n J eva raiino Magadhassa
adiyanti ; na ranno Magadhassa purisakanam adiyanti ; na
raiino Magadhassa purisakanam adiyanti. Te kho te, marisa,
mahacora pi ranno Magadhassa avaruddha nama vuccanti.
Evam eva kho, marisa, santi hi amanussa canda, rudda,
rabbasa : te n* eva maharajanam adiyanti ; na maharajanam
purisakanam adiyanti, na maharajanam purisakanam adi-
yanti. Te kho ’te, marisa, amanussa avaruddha nama
vuccanti. ||16||
Yo hi koci, marisa, amanusso Yakkho va YakkhinI —
pe-||17||
Gandhabbo va GandhabbI — pe — II 18 1|
Kumbhando va Kumbhandi — pe — || 19 1|
Nago va Nagini va — pe — ||20||
padutthacitto bhikkhum va bhikkhunim va upasakam va
upasikanam va gacchantam va anugaccheyya, thitam va
upatittheyya, nisinnam va upanisideyya, nipannam va upani-
pajjeyya, iraesam Yakkhanam Mahayakkhanam senapatinam
mahasenapatmam upajjhapetabbam vikkanditabbam viravi-
tabbam : ||21 1|
Ayam Yakkho ganhati, ayam Yakkho avisati, ayam
Yakkho hetheti, ayam Yakkho himsati, ayam Yakkho
vihimsati, ayam Yakkho na muncatiti. ||22||
Katamesam Yakkhanam Mahayakkhanam sena-patinam,
maha-sena-patinam ?
Indo Somo Varuno ca Bharadvajo Pajapati
Cando Kamasettho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca
Panado Opamanno ca Devasuto ca Matali
ed by CjOO^Ic
108
ATANATIYASUTTA.
Cittaseno ca Gandhabbo Nalaraja Janesabho
Satagiro Hemavato Punnako Karatiyo Gulo
Sivako Mucalindo ca Yessamitto Yugandharo
Gopalo Suppagedho ca Hirl Nett! ca Mandiyo
Pancalacando Alavako Pajjuno Sumano Sumukho
Dadhimukho Mani Manicaro Digho Atho Serissako
saha. || 23 1|
Imesam Yakkhanam mahayakkhanam senapatlnam maha-
senapatlnam ujjhapetabbam vikkanditabbam viravitabbam
Ayam Yakkho ganhati — pe — na muncatiti. ||24||
Ayam kho sa, marisa, Atanatiya rakkha bhikkhunam
bhikkhunlnam upasakanam upasikanam guttiya rakkhaya
avihimsaya phasuviharayati. ||25||
Handa ca’ dani mayam marisa gacchama bahukicca mayam,
bahukaranTy&ti. ||26||
Yassa dani tumhe maharajano kalam manfiath&ti. ||27||
Atha kho cattaro maharajano utthay&sana, Bhagavantam
abhivadetva padakkhinam katva tatth* ev* antaradha-
yimsu. If 28 1|
Te pi kho Yakkha utthay&sana app ekacce Bhagavantam
abhivadetva padakkhinam katva tatth’ ev’ antaradhayimsu.
App’ ekacce Bhagavata saddhim sammodimsu sammodanl-
yam katham saranlyam vitisaretva tath ev’ antaradhayimsu.
App’ ekacce yena Bhagava, ten’ anjalim panametva tatth*
ev’ antaradhayimsu.
App’ ekacce nama gottam savetva tatth* ev’ antaradhayimsu.
App’ ekacce tunhlbhuta tatth* ev’ antaradhayimsuti. ||29||
“Ugganhatha, bhikkhave, Atanatiyam rakkham! Pariya-
punatha, bhikkhave Atanatiyam rakkham ! Dharetha, bhi-
kkhave, Atanatiyam rakkham ! Atthasamhitaya, bhikkhave,
Atanatiya rakkha bhikkhunam bhikkhunlnam upasakanam
upasikanam guttiya rakkhaya avihimsaya phasu viharayati.
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana te bhikkhu jBhagavato
bhasitam abhinandun ti. || 30 II
ATANATIYASUTTAM.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
DHAMMACAKKA.
109
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Baranasiyam
viharati Isipatane Migadaye. Tatra kho Bhagava panca-
vaggiye bhikkhu amantese : || 1 1|
“Dve ’me, bhikkhave, anta pabbajitena na sevitabba.
Katame dve?
‘Yo c&yam kamesu kamasukhallik&nuyogo hlno gammo
pothujjaniko anariyo anatthasamhito ; yocS,yam atta-kilama-
th&nuyogo dukkho anariyo anatthasamhito; — ete kho bhikkhave
ubho ante anupagamma majjhima patipada Tathagatena
abhisambuddha cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhi-
nnaya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati/ ||2||
Katama ca sa bhikkhave majjhima patipada Tathagatena
abhisambuddha cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhi-
nnaya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati ?
“ Ayam eva ariyo atthahgiko maggo, seyyathidam : Sam-
maditthi, sammasankappo, sammavaca, sammakammanto,
sammaajivo sammavayarno, sammasati, sammasamadhi. ||3||
Ayam kho sa, bhikkhave, majjhima patipada Tathagatena
abhisambuddha cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhifL-
iiaya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati. ||3||
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkham ariyasaccam : jati pi
dukkha, jara pi dukkha, vyadhi pi dukkha, maranam pi
dukkham, appiyehi sampayogo dukkho, piyehi vippayogo
dukkho, yam pi iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham —
sankhittena pane' upadanakkhandha dukkha. ||4||
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhasamudayam ariya-
saccam: yayam tanha ponobbhavika nandi-raga-sahagatatatra
tatrabhinandini, seyyathidam : Kamatanha, bhavatanha, vibha-
vatanha. ||5||
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam,
yo tassa yeva tanhaya asesa-viraga-nirodho cago patinissago
mutti analayo. ||t> ||
ed by CjOO^Ic
110
DHAMMACAKKA.
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagamini pati-
pada ariyasaccam.
Ayam eva ariyo atthahgiko maggo : seyyathidam samma-
ditthi — pe — sammasamadhi. ||7||
Idam dukkham ariyasaccan ti me, bhikkhave,
pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhum udapadi, na-
nam udapadi, pafiria udapadi, vijja udapadi, aloko
udapadi. ||8||
Tam kho pan’ idam dukkham ariyasaccam parinneyan ti
me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu — pe —
parinnatan ti me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu
cakkhum udapadi, nanam udapadi, pahna udapadi, vijja
udapadi, aloko udapadi. || 9 1|
Idam dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam ti me, bhikkhave,
— pe — aloko udapadi. ||10||
Tam kho pan J idam dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam
pahatabban ti me bhikkhave — pe — pahlnan ti me bhi-
kkhave — pe — aloko udapadi. || 1 1 1|
Idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam ti me bhikkhave
— pe — aloko udapadi. ||12||
Tam kho pan J idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam sacchi-
katabban ti me bhikkhave, — la — sacchikatan ti me, bhi-
kkhave, — pe — aloko udapadi. || 13 1|
Idam dukkhanirodhagamini patipada ariyasaccan ti me,
bhikkhave, — pe — aloko udapadi. || 14 If
Tam kho pan’ idam dukkhanirodhagamini patipadii
ariyasaccan bhavetabban ti me, bhikkhave, — pe — bhavitan
ti me, bhikkhave, — pe — aloko udapadi. ||15||
Yava kivanca me, bhikkhave, iraesu catusu ariyasaccesu
evam ti-parivattam dvadasa-karam yathabhutam iianadassa-
nam na suvisuddham ahosi : n’eva tavaham bhikkhave
sadevake loke samarake sabrahmake, sassamanabrahmaniya
pajaya sadevamanussaya anuttaram sammasambodhim abhi-
sambuddho paccannasim. || 16 1|
Yato ca kho me, bhikkhave, imesu catusu ariyasaccesu
evam tiparivattam dvadasakaram yathabhutam nanadassanam
suvisuddham ahosi, ath&ham, bhikkhave, sadevake loke sama-
rake sabrahmake sassamanabrahmaniya pajaya sadevama-
ed by CjOO^Ic
DHAMMACAKKA.
Ill
nussaya anuttaram sammasambodhim abhisambuddho ti
paccanriasim. || 17 If
Nananca pana me dassanam udapadi : ‘ Akuppa me
ceto-vimutti, ayam antima jati, n’atthi dani punabbhavo
ti/ II 18 1|
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana paficavaggiya bhikkhu
Bhagavato bhasitam abhinandanti. || 19 1|
Imasmim ca pana veyyakaranasmim bhanfiamane ayasmato
Kondannassa virajam vitamalam dhammacakkhum udapadi :
* Yam kifici samudaya-dhammam sabbam tarn nirodha-
dhamman ti/ ||20||
Pavattite ca pana Bhagavata dhammacakke Bbumma deva
saddam anussavesum: ‘Evam Bhagavata Baranasiyam Isi-
patane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam pavattitam,
appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va devena va
Marena va Brahmuna va kenaci lokasmin ti/ ||21||
Bhummanam devanam saddam sutva Catumaharajika deva
saddam anussavesum — pe — . ||22||
Catumaharajikanam devanam saddam sutva, Tavatimsa
deva saddam anussavesum — pe — . II 23 1|
Yama deva — pe — . ||24||
Tusita deva — pe — . ||25||
Nimmanarati deva — pe — . || 26 1|
Paranimmitavasavattino deva — pe — . ||27||
Brahmaparisajja deva — pe — . ||28||
Brahmapurohita deva — pe — . ||29 1|
Mahabrahma deva — pe — . || 30 1|
Parittabha deva — pe — . II 31 1|
Appamanabha deva — pe — . ||32||
Abhassara deva — pe — . || 33 1|
Parittasubha deva — pe — . ||34||
Appamanasubha deva — pe — . || 35 1|
Subhakinna deva — pe — . || 36 1|
Yehapphala deva — pe — . || 37 1|
Asarlnasatta deva — pe — . ||38||
Aviha deva — pe — . ||39||
Attappa deva — pe — . ||40||
Sudassa deva — pe — . ||41||
ed by CjOO^Ic
112
MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
Sudassi deva — pe — . ||42||
Akanittha deva — pe — . ||43||
Evam Bhagavata Baranasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anutta-
ram dhammacakkam pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va
brahmanena va devena va Marena va Brahmuna va kenaci
va lokasmin ti. || 44 1|
Iti ha tena khanena tena layena tena muhuttena yava
Brahmaloka saddo abbhuggahchi, ayanca kho dasasahassi-
lokadhatu sankampi, sampakampi, sampavedhi ; appamano ca
ularo obhaso loke paturahosi atikkamma devanam devanu-
bhavan ti. ||45||
Atha kho Bhagava udanam udanesi : “ Annasi vata bho
Kondanfio, annasi vata bho Kondanno ti.” || 46 1|
Iti hi’ dam ayasmato Kondannassa Aniiatakondanno tv eva
namam ahosi. || 47 1|
DHAMMACAKKAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Sakkesu
viharati Kapilavatthusmim mahavane mahata bhikkhu-
sanghena saddhim pancamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeh’ eva
arahantehi dasahi ca lokadhatuhi devata yebhuyyena sanni-
patita honti, Bhagavantam dassanaya bhikkhusanghanca. ||1||
Atha kho catunnam Suddh&vasa-kayikanam devanam etad
ahosi: —
" Ayam kho Bhagava Sakkesu viharati Kapilavatthusmim
mahavane mahata bhikkhu-sanghena saddhim pancamattehi
bhikkhusatehi sabbeh’ eva arahantehi, dasahi ca lokadhatuhi
devata yebhuyyena sannipatita honti, Bhagavantam dassa-
naya bhikkhu-sanghanca. Yan nuna mayam pi yena Bha-
gava ten’ upasasankameyyama, upasankamitva Bhagavato
santike paccekam gatham bhaseyyam^ti.” || 2 1|
Atha kho ta devata seyyathapi nama balava puriso
ed by CjOO^Ic
MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
113
samminjitam va baham pasareyya pasaritam va baham
samminjeyya evam evam kho Suddh&vasesu devesu antara-
hita Bhagavato purato paturahamsu. || 3 1|
Atha kho ta devata Bhagavantam abhivadetva ekam-
antam atthamsu : ekamantam thita kho eka devata Bhaga-
vato 8antike imam gatham abhasi :
" Mahasamayo pavanasmim
deva-kaya samagata !
Agatamha imam dhammasamayam
dakkhitaye aparajitasanghan ” ti. || 1 1|
Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam gatham
abhasi :
“ Tatra bhikkhavo samadahamsu
cittam attano ujukam akamsu
Sarathi va nettani gahetva
indriyani rakkhanti pandit& ” ti. || 2 1|
Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam gatham
abhasi :
“ Chetva khilam chetva paligham
indakhilam uhaccam aneja
Te caranti suddha vimala
cakkhumata sudanta susunagA 99 ti. || 3 1|
Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam gatham
abhasi :
" Ye keei buddham saranam gatase
na te gamissanti apayam
Pahaya manusam deham
devakayam paripuressanti 99 ti. || 4
Atha kho Bhagava bhikkhu amantesi :
“ Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, dasasu lokadhatusu devata
sannipatita Tathagatam dassanaya bhikkhu sanghanca. Ye
pi te, bhikkhave, ahesum atltam addhanam arahanto samma-
sambuddha, tesam pi Bhagavantanam ete parama yeva devata
sannipatita ahesum, seyyatha pi mayham etarahi. Ye pi te,
bhikkhave, bhavissanti anagatam addhanam arahanto samma-
sambuddha, tesam pi Bhagavantanam ete parama yeva
8
ed by CjOO^Ic
114
MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
devata sannipatita bhavissanti, seyyatha pi mayham eta-
rahi” || 5 1|
“ Acikkhissami, bhikkhave devakayanam namani, kitta-
yissami, bhikkhave, devakayanam namani, desissarai, bhi-
kkhave, devakayanam namani. Tam sunatha, sadhukam
manasikarotha bhasissamiti. || 6 1|
“ Evam bhante ! ” ti. Te bhikkhu Bhagavato paccasso-
sum. Bhagava etad avoca: ||7||
“ Silokam anukassami, yatha bhumma tad assita
Te sita girigabbharam pahitatta samahita
Futhu slha va salllna lomahamsabhisambhimo
Odata manasa saddha vippassanam anavila
Bhlyo panca-sate ftatva vane Kapilavatthave. Ill ||
Tato amantayi sattha savake sasane rate :
Devakaya abhikkanta te vijanatha bhikkhave ?
Te ca atappam akarum sutva Buddhassa sasanam
Tesam patur ahu nanam amanussana dassanam. || 2 1|
App’ eke satam addakkhum sahassam atha sattati
Satam eke sahassanam amanussanam addamsu
App eke ’nantam adakkhum disa sabba phuta ahu
Tanca sabbam abhiniiaya pavakkhitvana cakkhuma
Tato amantayi sattha savake sasane rate :
Devakaya abhikkanta te vijanatha bhikkhave ?
Te vo ’ham kittayissami girahi anupubbaso. || 3 1|
Sattasahassa Takkha ca bhumma Kapilavatthava
Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino
Modamana abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim va-
nam. ||4||
Cha sahassa Hemavata Takkha nanatta-vannino
Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino
Modamana abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim va-
nam. ||5||
Satagira ti-sahassa Takkha — pe — . ||6||
Icc ete solasa sahassa Takkha — pe — . ||7H
Yessamitta panca sata Takkha — pe — . ||8||
ed by CjOO^Ic
MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
115
Kumbhiro Rajagahiko Yepullassa nivesanam,
Bhlyo nam satasahassam Yakkhanam payirupasati,
Kumbhlro Rajagahiko so p’ aga samitim vanam. ||9||
Purimanca disam raja Dhatarattbo tam pasasati
Gandhabbanam adhipati maharaja yasassi so.
Putta pi tassa bahavo indanama mahabbala
Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino
Modamana abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim va-
ham. II10II
Dakkhinanca disam raja Virulho tam pasasati
Kumbhandanam adhipati maharaja yasassi so
Putta pi tassa — pe — . II 11 II
Pacchimaiica disam raja Yirupakkho tam pasasati
Nagananca adhipati maharaja yasassi so.
Putta pi tassa — pe — . II 12 1|
IJttarafica disam raja Kuvero tam pasasati
Yakkhanam adhipati maharaja yasassi so
Putta pi tassa — pe — . || 13 1|
Purimam disam Dhatarattbo, dakkhinena Yirulhako
Pacchimena Yirupakkho, Kuvero uttaram disam
Cattaro te maharaja samanta caturo disa
Daddallamana atthamsu vane Kapilavatthave. ||14||
Tesam mayavino dasa agu vancanika satha
Maya Kutendu Yetendu Yitucca Yitucco saha
Candano Kamasettho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca
Panado Opamanno ca devasuto ca Matali
Citta-Seno ca Gandhabbo Nalaraja Janesabho
Agum Pancasikho ceva Timbaru Suriyavaccasa
Ete c’ anne ca rajano Gandhabba saha rajubhi
Modamana abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim va-
nam. II 15 1|
AtMgu Nabhasa Naga Yesala saha Tacchaka
Kambalassatara agu Payaga saha natibhi,
Yamuna Dharattha ca agu Naga yasassino
Eravano Mahanago so p* agu samitim vanam. || 16 1|
ed by CjOO^Ic
116
MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
Ye nagaraje sahasa haranti
dibba dvija pakkhi visuddhacakkhu
vehasaya te vana-majjha-patta
Citta Supanna iti tesam namam
abhayam tada Nagarajanam asi
Supannato khemam akasi Buddho
Sanhahi vacahi upavhayanta
Naga Supanna saranam agamsu Buddham. || 17 1|
Jita vajira-batthena samuddam asura sita.
Bhataro Yasava8 , ete iddbimanto yasassino.
Kalakailja mababimsa asura Danaveghasa
Yepacitti Sucitti ca Paharado Namuci saba
Satanca Baliputtanam sabbe verocanamaka
Sannaybitva balim senam Bahubhaddam upagamum
Samayo dani, bbadante, bbikkbunam samitim va-
nam. II 18 II
Apo ca deva Patbavl Tejo Yayo tad agamum
Yaruna Yaruna deva Somo ca Yasasa saba
Mettakaruna-kayika agu deva yasassino
Das’ ete dasadhakaya sabbe nanatta-vannino
Idbimanto — pe — samitim vanam || 19 If
Yenhu ca deva Sabali ca Asama ca duve Yama
Candass 1 upanissa deva candam agu purakkbatva
Suriyass’ upanissa deva suriyam agu purakkhatva
Nakkbattani purakkhatva agu mandavalahaka
Yasunam Vasavo settbo Sakko p* agu Purindado
Das’ ete dasadhakaya sabbe nanatta-vannino
Iddbimanto — pe — samitim vanam. II 20 II
Ath J agu Sahabhu deva jalam aggi sikha-r-iva
Aritthaka ca Roja ca Umma-puppba-nibhasino ;
Yaruna saba Dhamma ca Accuta ca Anejaka
Suleyya Rucira agu, agu Vasavanesino
Das’ ete dasadha kaya — pe — samitim vanam. II 21 II
Samana Mahasamana Manusamanusuttama -
Kbiddapadusika agu, agu Manopadusika
ed by CjOO^Ic
MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
117
Ath&gu Harayo deva ye ca Lohitavasino
Paraga Mahaparaga agu deva yasassino
Das ’ete dasadha kaya — pe — samitim vanam. 1122 II
Sukha Karumha Aruna agu Yeghanasa saha
Odatagayha Pamokkha agu deva Yicakkhana
Sadamatta Haragaja Missaka ca yasassino
Thanayam agu Pajjunno yo disa abhivassati :
Das’ ete dasadha kaya — pe — samitim vanam. || 23 1|
Khemiya Tusita Yaraa Katthaka ca yasassino
Lambitaka Lamasettha J oti naraa ca Asava
Nimmanaratino agu ath J agu Paranimmita
Das* ete dasadha kaya — pe — samitim vanam. II 24 II
Satth’ ete deva-nikaya sabbe nanatta-vannino
Nama-dvayena agaiichum ye c J anne sadisa saha :
i Pamutthajatim akhllam oghatinnam anasavam
Dahkhem’ oghataram Nagam candam va asitatigam/ II 25 1|
Subrahma Paramatto ca putta iddhimato saha
Sanam kumaro Tisso ca so p J agu samitim vanam. II 26 II
Sahassa Brahmalokanam Mahabrahma bhititthati
IJpapanno jutimanto bhismakayo yasassl so. II 27 II
Das’ ettha issara agu pacceka-vasavattino ;
Tesanca majjhato agu Harito parivarito. II 28 II
Te ca sabbe abhikkante sa-Inda-deve sa-brahmake
Marasena abhikkami : Passa kanhassa mandiyam. || 29 1|
‘ Ettha ganhatha bandhatha ragena bandham atthu ve
Samanta parivaretha ma vo muncittha koci nam/ ||30||
Iti tattha mahaseno kanhasenam apesayi
Panina talam ahacca saram katvana bheravam
Yatha pavussako megho thanayanto savijjuko
Tada so paccudavatti sankuddho asayam vasl. || 31 1|
Tanca sabbam abhinnaya pavakkhitvana cakkhuma
Tato amantayi sattha savake sasane rate :
Marasena abhikkanta te vijanatha bhikkhavo ?
ed by CjOO^Ic
118
alavakasumta.
Te ca atappam akarum sutva Buddhassa sasanam.
Yltarageh’ apakkamum na sam lomam pi injayum. [| 32 1|
Sabbe vijita sangama-bhayabhlt a yasassino
Modanti saha bhutehi savaka te jane snt&ti. || 33 1|
MAHA8AMAYA8UTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Alaviyam
viharati Alavakassa Yakkhassa bbavane. Atba kbo Alavako
Yakkbo yena Bbagava ten’ upasankami upasankamitva Bha-
gavantam etad avoca :
“ Nikkhama saman& ” ti.
“ ‘ Sadh&vuso ’ ” ti. Bhagava nikkbami.
“ Pavisa saman& ” ti.
“ * Sadh&vuso ’ ” ti. Bbagava pavisi.
Dutiyam pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca :
“ Nikkhama samanal ” ti.
“ ‘ Sadh&vuso ’ ” ti. Bhagava nikkbami.
“ Pavisa samanft ” ti.
“ ‘ Sadh&vuso ’ ” ti. Bhagava pavisi.
Tatiyam pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca:
“ Nikkhama saman& ” ti.
“ ‘ Sadh&vuso ’ ” ti. Bhagava nikkhami.
“ Pavisa samanfi, ” ti.
“ ‘Sadh&vuso ’ ” ti. Bbagava pavisi.
Catuttham pi kbo Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad
avoca : “ Nikkhama samanfi, ” ti.
“ ‘Na kbo panaham avuso nikkbamissami. Yan te karanl-
vam tarn karohi ’ ” ti.
• •
“Panham tarn samana pucchissami. Sace me na bya-
karissasi, cittam va te kbipissami, hadayam va te phalessami,
padesu va gahetva param Garigaya khipissami ti.”
ed by CjOCK^Ic
AL A.VAKASUTTA.
119
“ ‘ Na khvaham tam, avuso, passami sadevake loke, sama-
rake, sabrahmake, sassamana brahmaniya pajaya sadevama-
nussaya, yo me cittam va khipeyya, hadayam va phaleyya,
padesu va gahetva param Gangaya khipeyya. Api ca tvam
avuso puccha yada kahkhasi 9 99 ti.
“Kim sfidha vittam purisassa settham? kimsu sucinno
sukham avahati ?
Kimsu have sadhutaram rasanam ? katham jlvim jivitam
ahu setthan ? 99 ti. || 1 1|
" € Saddh* idha vittam purisassa settham, dhammo sucinno
sukham avahati,
Saccam have sadhutaram rasanam, panna jlvim jivitam
ahu setthan 9 99 ti. ||2||
" Katham8u tarati ogham ? katham tarati annavam ?
Kathamsu dukkham acceti P kathamsu parisujjha-
tlti ? ” || 3 1|
“ ‘ Saddhaya tarati ogham, appamadena annavam,
Yiriyena dukkham acceti, pafinaya parisujjhati. 9 99 ||4||
u Kathamsu labhate pannam ? kathamsu vindate dhanam?
Kathamsu kittim pappoti? katham mittani gantheti ?
Asma loka param lokam katham pecca na socati ? 99 || 5 1|
“ * Saddahano arahatam dhammam nibbanapattiya
Sus8U8am labhate panriam appamatto vicakkhano.
Patirupakarl dhurava vutthata vindate dhanam
Saccena kittim pappoti dadam mittani ganthati,
Asma loka param lokam evam pecca na socati.
Yass’ ete caturo dhamma saddhassa gharamesino
Saccam dhammo dhiti cago sa ve pecca na socati.
Ingha anne pucchassu puthu samanabrahmane
Yadi sacca dama caga khantydbhiyyo > dha vijjati. 9 99 || 6 1|
" Katham nu dani puccheyyam puthu samanabrahmane
Sv&ham ajja pajanami so attho samparayiko.
Atthaya vata me Buddho vasayalavim agato
ed by CjOO^Ic
120
PARABHAVASUTTA.
Yo’ ham ajja pajanami yattha dinnam mahapphalam
So ah am vicarissami gamagamam purapuram
Namassamano sambuddham dhammassa ca sudham-
matan” ti. ||7||
ALAVAKASUTTAM.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Atha kho anna-
tara devata abhikkantaya rattiya abhikkantavanna kevala-
kappam Jetavanam obhasetva, yena Bhagava ten* upa-
sankami upasahkamitva Bhagavantam abhivadetva ekaman-
tam atthasi, ekamantam thita kho sa devata Bhagavantam
gathaya ajjhabhasi.
“ Parabhavantam purisam mayam pucchama Gotamam
Bhagavantam putthum agamma kim parabhavato
mukham P ” ||1||
“ ‘ Suvijano bhavam hoti, suvijano parabhavo
Dhammakamo bhavam hoti, dhammadessi parabha-
Yo/ ” II 2 II
“ Iti h* etam vijanama : pathamo so parabhavo
Dutiyam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham ? 99 || 3 1|
“ ‘ Asant* assa piya honti, sante na kurute piyam
asantam dhammam roceti tarn parabhavato mu-
kham/ 99 ||4||
" Iti h* etam vijanama : dutiyo so parabhavo
tatiyam Bhagava bruhi: kim parabhavato mukham ?" || 5 1|
u 1 Niddasill sahasili anutthata ca yo naro
alaso kodhapannato, tarn parabhavato mukham/ ” ||6||
“ Iti h’ etam vijanama : tatiyo so parabhavo
catuttham Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham? ” ||7||
ed by CjOCK^Ic
PARABHAVASUTTA.
121
“ ‘ Yo mataram va pitaram va jinnakam gata-yobbanam
pahusanto na bharati, tam parabhavato mukham.’ ” ||8||
“ Iti h’ etam vijanama : catuttho so parabhavo
pancamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham?” ||9||
“ * Yo brahmanam va samanam va annam va pi vanibba-
kam
musavadena vaficeti, tam parabhavato mukham. , ” || 10 1|
M Iti h’ etam vijanama : pancamo so parabhavo
chattham Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
“kham? ,, 1 11 1|
“ 1 Pahuvitto puriso sa-hiraftno sa-bhojano
eko bhunjati sadhuni, tam parabhavato mukham. ,,, ||12||
“ Iti h’ etam vijanama : chattho so parabhavo
sattamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham? ,, || 13 1|
“ ‘ Jatitthaddho, dhanatthaddho, gottatthaddho ca yo naro
tam natim atimaniieti, tarn parabhavato mukham.’ ” II 14 1|
“ Iti h’ etam vijanama : sattamo so parabhavo
Attham Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mukham ? 99 1|15||
“ 1 Itthidhutto, suradhutto, akkhadhutto ca yo naro
laddham laddham vinaseti, tam parabhavato mu-
kham. , 99 || 16 1|
“ Iti h’ etam vijanama : atthamo so parabhavo
navamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham ?" || 17 1|
* “ Sehi darehi santuttho vesiva upadissati
dissati paradaresu, tam parabhavato mukham .’ 99 || 18 1|
“ Iti h’ etam vijanamo : navamo so parabhavo
dasamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham ? ” || 19 1|
“ ‘ Atlta-yobbano poso aneti timbarutthanim
tassa issa na supati, tam parabhavato mukham. , ” ||20||
ed by CjOO^Ic
122
VASALASUTTA.
“ Iti h* etam vijanama : dasamo so parabhavo
ekadasamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham ? ” ||21||
“ ‘ Itthl-sondim vikiranim purisam va pi tadisam
issariyasmim thapeti tam parabhavato mukham/ ” ||22||
“Iti h’ etam vijanama : ekadasamo so parabhavo
dvadasamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham ? ” ||23||
" ‘ Appabhogo mahatanho khattiye jayate kule
so ’dha rajjam patthayati : tam parabhavato mu-
kham/ ” ||24||
“ ‘ Ete parabhave loke pandito samavekkhiya
ariyo dassana-sampatto salokam bhajate si van’” ti. ||25||
PARABHAVASUTTAM.
N AMO TASSA BHAGAVATO AR1HAT0 SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Atha kko
Bhagava pubbanha samayam nivasetva pattaclvaram adaya
Savatthiyam pindaya pavisi. Tena kho pana samayena
Aggika-Bharadvajassa brahmanassa nivesane aggi pajjalito
hoti ahuti paggahita. || 1 1|
Atha kho Bhagava Savatthiyam sapadanam pindaya cara-
mano, yena Aggika-Bharadvajassa brahmanassa nivesanam,
ten’ uppasankami. ||2|| Addasa kho Aggika-Bharadvajo
brahmano Bhagavantam durato agacchantam disvana Bha-
gavantam etad avoca :
“ Tatr’ eva mundaka, tatr* eva samanaka, tatr’ eva vasalaka
titthahi ti.” || 3 1|
Evam vutte Bhagava Aggika-Bharadvajam brahmanam
etad avoca :
ed by CjOCK^Ic
VASALASUTTA.
123
“ * Janasi pana tvam brahmana, vasalam va vasala-karane
va dhamme ti/ ” || 4 1|
“Na khv&ham, bho Gotama, janami vasalam va vasala-
karane va dhamme ti. Sadha me bhavam Qotamo tatha
dhammam desetu : yathaham janeyyam vasalam va vasala-
karane va dhamme ti.”*
et ( Tena hi, brahmana, sunahi sadhukam manasikarohi
bhasissami ti/ ” ||5[|
“Evam bho ” ti kho Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmano Bha-
gavato paccassosi. Bhagava etad avoca: ||6||
Kodhano upanahl ca papamakkhl ca yo naro
vipannaditthi mayavl, tam jahna vasalo iti. Hill
Ekajam va dijam va pi yo J dha panani himsati.
yassa pane daya n’atthi, tam jaDDa vasalo iti. ||2(|
Yo hanti parirundhati gamani nigamani ca
niggahako samannato, tam janna vasalo iti. ||3||
Game va yadi v^raiine yam paresam mamayitam
they y a adinnam adiyati, tam janiia vasalo iti. ||4||
Yo have inam adaya vuccamano palayati
na hi te inam atthiti, tam janna vasalo iti. ||5||
Yo ve kincikkha-kamyata panthasmim vajatam janam
hantva kincikkham adeti, tam janna vasalo iti. ||6||
Yo attahetu parahetu dhanahetu ca yo naro
sakkhiputtho musabruti, tam janna vasalo iti. ||7||
Yo natinam sakhanam va daresu patidissati
sahasa sampiyena va, tam janna vasalo iti. ||8||
Yo mataram va pitaram va jinnakam gatayobbanam
pahusanto na bharati, tam janiia vasalo iti. || 9 1|
Yo mataram va pitaram va bhataram va bhaginim
sassum hanti roseti va, tam janna vasalo iti. || 10 1|
Yo attham pucchito santo anattham anusasati.
paticchantena manteti, tam jaiina vasalo iti. || 11 II
ed by CjOO^Ic
124
VASALASUTTA.
Yo katva papakam kammam * ma mam janna 1 ti icchati
so paticchanna-kammanto, tarn janna vasalo iti. || 12 1|
Yo ve parakulam gantva bhutvana sucibhojanam
agatam na patipujeti, tam janna vasalo iti. ||13j
Yo brahmanam va samanam va annam va pi vanibbakam
musavadena vanceti, tam jaflna vasalo iti. ||14||
Yo brahmanam va samanam va bhattakale upatthite
roseti vaca na ca deti, tam janna vasalo iti. || 15 1|
Asatam yo *dha pabruti mohena paligunthite
kificikkham nijigimsano, tam janna vasalo iti. ||16[|
Yo c’attanam samukkamse paranca avajanati
nihlno sena manena, tam janna vasalo iti. ||17||
Rosako kadariyo ca papiccho maccharl satho
ahiriko anottapi, tam janna vasalo iti. || 18 1|
Yo buddham paribhasati atha va tassa savakam
paribbajam gahattham va, tam janna vasalo iti. || 19 1|
Yo ve anaraha santo, araham patijanati
coro sabrahmake loke esa kho vasal&dhamo !
ete kho vasala vutta maya vo ye pakasita. ||20||
Na jacca vasalo hoti, na jacca hoti brahmano
kammana vasalo hoti, kammana hoti brahmano. ||21 1|
Tadamina pi janatha yatha me Mam nidassanam :
“ Candalaputto Sopako Matango iti vissuto. || 22 1|
So yasam paramam patto Matango yam sudullabham
agaftchum tass > upatthanamkhattiya brahmanabahu. || 23 1|
So devayanam aruyha virajam so mahapatham
kamaragam virajetva brahmalokupago ahu. ||24||
Na nam jati nivaresi brahmalokftpapattiya,
ajjhayakakule jata brahmana mantabandhuno : || 25 1|
Te ca papesu kammesu abhinham upadissare
ditth ’eva dhamme garayha samparaye ca duggatim
na te jati nivareti duggacca garahaya va : 99 ||26||
ed by CjOO^Ic
KASIBHARADVAJASUTTA*
125
Na jacca vasalo hoti, na jacca hoti brahmano
kammana vasalo hoti, kammana hoti brahmano. || 27 1|
Evam vutte Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmano Bhagavantam
etad avoca :
“ 1 Abhikkantam, bho Gotama, abhikkantam bho Gotama !
nikkujjitam va ukkujjeyya, paticchannam va vivareyya,
mulhassa va maggam acikkheyya, andhakare va telapajjotam
dhareyya cakkhumanto rupani dakkhinantlti : evam eva
bhota Gotamanena aneka pariyayena dhammo pakasito.
EsAham Bhagavantam Gotamam saranam gacchami dham-
manca bhikkhusanghanca ! Upasakam mam bhavam Gotamo
dharetu, ajjatagge panupetam saranam gatan ti 9 99 ! || 7 ||
YASALASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Magadhesu
viharati Dakkhinagirismim Ekanalayam brahmanagame. || 1 1|
Tena kho pana samayena Kaslbharadvajassa brahmanassa
paiicamattani nangala-satani payuttani honti vappakale. ||2||
Atha kho Bhagava pubbanhasamayam nivasetva patta-clva-
ram adaya yena Kaslbharadvajassa brahmanassa kammanto,
ten’ upasankami. || 3 1| Tena kho pana samayena Kasibha-
radvajassa brahmanassa parivesana vattati. ||4|| Atha kho
Bhagava yena parivesana ten’ upasankami upasankamitva
ekamantam atthasi. addasa kho Kaslbharadvajo brahmano
Bhagavantam etad avoca :
“Aham kho, samana, kasami ca vapami ca, kasitva ca
vapitva ca bhunjami. Tvam pi samana kasassu ca vapassu
kasitva ca vapitva ca bhunjassu ti.”
“ c Aham pi kho, brahmana, kasami ca vapami ca kasitva
ca vapitva ca bhunjami ti/ ”
“ Na kho pana mayam passama bhoto Gotamassa yugam
va nangalam va phalam ya pacanam va balivaddam va.”
ed by CjOO^Ic
126
kasIbhabadvajasutta.
Atha ca pana bhavam Gotamo evam aha : —
“ i Aham pi kho brahmana kasami ca vapami ca kasitva
ca vapitva ca bhunjamiti/ ”
Atha kho Kasibharadvajo brahmano Bhaga van tarn gathaya
ajjhabhasi: ||5||
“ Kassako patijanasi na ca passama te kasim
kasino pucchito bruhi, yatha janemu te kasim.” [| 1 1|
“ * Saddha bijam, tapo vutthi, panna me yuga-nangalam
hirim Isa, mano yottam, sati me phalapacanam. || 2 1|
Kayagutto yaclgutto ahare udare yato
saccam karomi tiddanam soraccam me pamocanam. ||3||
Yiriyam me dhura-dhorayham yogakkhem&dhivahanam
gacchati ativattanam yattha gantva na socati. || 4 1|
Evam esa kasl kattha sa hoti amatapphala
etam kasim kasitvana sabbadukkha pamuccatiti.’ ” ||5||
Atha kho Kasibharadvajo brahmano mahatiya kamsapatiya
paya8am vaddhetva Bhagavato upanamesi :
“ Bhunjatu bhavam Gatamo payasam ! Kassako bhavam,
yamhi bhavam Gotamo amatapphalam kasim kasatiti.” i|6||
“ 1 Gathabhigltam me abhojaneyyam
sampassatam brahmana n’ esa dhammo
gath&bhigitam panudanti buddha
dhamrae sati, brahmana, vutti-r-esa. > ”
“ ‘ Annena ca kevalinam mahesim
khlnftsavam kukkuccavupasantam
annena panena upatthahassu
khettam hi tarn punnapekhassa hotiti.* ” || 7 1|
“ Atha kassa c&ham bho Gotama imam payasam dammiti.”
“ * Na khv&ham tarn, brahmana, passami sadevake loke
samarake sabrahmake sassamanabrahmaniya pajaya sadeva-
manussaya, yassa so payaso bhutto samma parinaraam
gaccheyya, aniiatra Tathagatassa va Tathagatasavakassa va :
tena hi tvam, brahmana, tarn payasam appaharite va chaddeti
appanake va udake opilapehiti. || 7 1|
Atha kho Kasibharadvajo brahmano tarn payasam appa-
ed by CjOO^Ic
SACCAVIBHANGA.
127
nake udake opilapesi. Atha kho so payaso udake pakkhitto
ciccitayati ciccitayati sandhupayati sampadhupayati : seyya-
th&pi nama phalo divasa santatto udake pakkhitto ciccitayati
ciccitayati sandhupayati sampadhupayati : evara eva so
payaso udake pakkhitto ciccitayati ciccitayati sandhupayati
sampadhupayati. ||8||
Atha kho Kasibharadvajo brahmano samviggo lomahattha-
jato yena Bhagava ten* upasankami upasankamitva Bhaga-
vato padesu sirasa nipatitva Bhagavantam etad avoca :
“ Abhikkantam, bho Gotaraa, abhikkantam, bho Gotama !
seyyathapi bho Gotama nikkujjitam va ukkujjeyya, pati-
channam va vivareyya, mulhassa va maggam acikkheyya,
andhakare va telapajjotam dhareyya cakkhumanto rupani
dakkhintiti : Evam eva, bho Gotama, aneka pariyayena
dhammo pakasito. Es&ham bhagavantam Gotamam sara-
nam gacchami dhammanca bhikkhu-sanghanca. Labheyyam
aham bhoto Gotamassa santike pabbajjam labheyyam upa-
sampadan ti.” ||9||
Alattha kho Kasibharadvajo brahmano Bhagavato santike
pabbajjam, alattha upasampadam. Acirhpasampanno kho
pan* ayasma Bharadvajo eko vupakattho appamatto atapi
pahitatto viharanto na cirass* eva yass* atthaya kulaputta
sammad eva agarasma anagariyam pabbajanti, tad anutta-
ram brahmacariya-pariyosanam ditth’ eva dhamme sayam
abhinna sacchikatva upasampajja vihasi.
“ Khina jati, vusitam brahmacariyam, katam karaniyam,
n¶m itthattay&ti,” abhinna annataro ca kho pan* ayasma
Bharadvajo arahatara ahositi. II 10 1|
KASIBHARADVAJASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Baranasiyam
viharati Isipatane Migadaye. Tatra kho Bhagava bhikkhu
amantesi: ‘bhikkhavo’ ti, ‘bhadante’ ti. Te bhikkhu Bha-
gavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad avoca : || 1 1|
ed by CjOCK^Ic
128
SACCAYIBHANGA.
“ Tathagatena, bhikkhave, arahata sammasambuddhena
Baranasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam
pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va
devena va Marena va Brahmuna va kenaci va lokasmin ti.
Yad idam catunnam ariyasaccanam acikkhata desata panna-
pata patthapata vivarana vibhajana uttanakammam.
Kataraesam catunnam P
Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe — .
Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe — .
Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe —
Dukkhanirodhagaminipatipada ariyasaccassa acikkhata
— pe— .11211
Tathagatena, bhikkhave, arahata sammasambuddhena
Baranasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam
pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va
devena va Marena va Brahmuna va kenaci va lokasmim:
yad idam imesam catunnam ariyasaccanam acikkhata
— pe— .11311
“ Sevetha, bhikkhave, Sariputta-Moggallane, bhejatha, bhi-
kkhave, Sariputta-Moggallane pandita bhikkhu anuggahaka
brahmacarlnam : 8eyyathS,pi bhikkhave, janettl evam Sari-
putto : seyyathfi,pi jatassa apadeta evam Moggallano. Sari-
putto, bhikkhave, sotapatti-phale vineti ; Moggallano utta-
matthe vineti; Sariputto, bhikkhave, pahoti cattari ariya-
saccani vittharena acikkhitum desetum paiinapetum vivaritum
vibhajitum uttanakatun ti.
Idam avoca Bhagava : idam vatva Sugato utthayasana
viharam pavisi. || 4 1|
Tatra kho ayasma Sariputto acirapakkantassa Bhagavato
bhikkhu amantesi :
‘ Avuso bhikkhavo J ti < avu8o > ti kho. te bhikkhu ayasmato
Sariputtassa paccassosum : Ayasma Sariputto etad avoca :
“Tathagatena, avuso, arahata sammasambuddhena Bara-
nasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam
pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va
devena va Marena va Brahmuna va kenaci va lokasmim:
yad idam catunnam ariyasaccanam acikkhata — pe — . II 5 II
ed by CjOO^Ic
SACCAVIBHANGA.
129
•V'
Katamesam catunnam ?
Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe —
Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe — .
Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe — .
Dukkhanirodhagaminipatipadassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata
— pe— .||6||
Katama ca, avuso, dukkham ariyasaccam ?
“ Jati pi dukkha, jara pi dukkha, vyadhi pi dukkha, mara-
nam pi dukkham, soka-parideva-dukkha-domanass-upayasa
dukkha : yam p’ iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham, san-
khittena pane’ upadanakkhandha dukkha.
Katama ca avuso jati P
Ya tesam tesam sattanam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye jati
sail jati okkanti abhinibbatti khandhanam patubhavo ayatina-
nam patilabho. — Ayam vuccat’ avuso jati. Ill ||
Katama ca avuso jaraP
Ya tesam tesam sattanam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye jara,
jlranata, khandiccam, paliccam valittacata ayuno samhani
indriyanam paripako. — Ayam vuccat’ avuso jara. ||2||
Katama ca avuso maranam P
Ya tesam tesam sattanam tamha tamha sattanikaye cuti
cavanata bhedo antaradhanam maccu maranam kalakiriya
khandhanam bhedo kalebarassa nikkhepo. — Idam vuccat’
avuso maranam. || 3 1|
Katama ca avuso soko P
Yo kho avuso annataranhatarena byasanena samannaga-
tassa annatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa soko
socana socanattam antosoko antoparisoko. — Ayam vuccat’
avuso soko. ||4||
Katama ca avuso paridevo P
Yo kho avuso annatarannatarena byasanena samannaga-
tassa annatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa adevo
paridevo adevo paridevo adevana paridevana adevitattam
paridevitattam. Ayam vuccat’ avuso paridevo. ||5||
Katama ca dukkham?
Yam kho avuso kayikam dukkham kayikam kaya-
samphassajam dukkham asatam vedayitam. — Idam vuccat’
avuso dukkham. II 6 1|
9
ed by CjOO^Ic
130
SACCAVIBHANGA.
Katama ca avuso domanassam ?
Yam kho avuso cetasikam dukkham cetasikam asatam ma-
nosamphassaj am dukkham asatam vedayitam. — Idam vuccat’
avuso domanassam. II 7 II
Katama ca avuso upayaso ?
Yo kho avuso annatarannatarena byasanena samannagatena
annatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa ayaso upa-
yaso ayasitattam upayasitattam. Ayam vuccat’ avuso upa-
yaso. || 8 1|
Katama ca avuso yam p’ iccham na labhati tarn pi
dukkham ?
Jatidhammanam avuso sattanam evam iccha uppajjati :
“ aho vata mayam na jatidhamma assama, na ca vata no jati
agaccheyyfi,ti : na kho pan’ etam icchaya pattabbam. ,, — Idam
pi yam p’ iccham na labhati, tarn pi dukkham.
Jaradhammanam avuso sattanam evam iccha uppajjati:
" aho vata mayam na jaradhamma assama, na ca vata no jara
agaccheyyati : na kho pan’ etam icchaya pattabbam.” — Idam
pi yam p’ iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham.
Byadhidhammanam avuso sattanam evam iccha uppajjati :
“aho ca vata mayam na byadhidhamma assama, na ca vata no
byadhi agaccheyy&ti : na kho pan’ etam icchaya pattabbam.”
— Idam pi yam p J iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham.
Maranadhammanam avuso sattanam evam iccha uppajjati :
“ aho ca vata mayam na maranadhamma assama, na ca vata no
maranam agaccheyy&ti : na kho pan’ etam icchaya pattabbam.”
— Idam pi yam p J iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham.
Soka-parideva-dukkhadomanass-upayasa dhammanam avuso
sattanam evam iccha uppajjati : “ aho vata mayam na soka-
paridevadukkhadomanassupayasa dhamma assama, na ca vata
no sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupayasa agaccheyum : na kho
pan 1 etam icchaya pattabbam.” — Idam pi yam p J iccham na
labhati tarn pi dukkham. ||9||
Katama cavuso sankhittena pancupadanakkhandha dukkhaP
Seyyathldam : Rupupadanakkhandho, vedanupadanakkha-
ndho, 8aiinupadanakkhandho, sankharupadanakkhandho, vi-
nnanupadanakkhandha. — Ime vucca^ avuso sankhittena
pancupadanakkhandha dukkha. II 10 1|
ed by CjOO^Ic
SACCAVIBHANGA*
131
Idam vuccat* avuso dukkham ariyasaccam. || 7 II
Katama ca avuso dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam ?
Yayam tanha ponobbhavikanandiraga-sahagata tatra tatra-
bhinandinl : seyyathldam :
Karaatanha bhavatanha vibhavatanha. — Idam vuccat* avuso
dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam. || 8 1|
Katama ca avuso dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam ?
Yo tassa yeva tanhaya asesaviraganirodho cago patinissago
mutti analayo. — Idam vuccat* avuso dukkhanirodham ariya-
saccam. || 9 1|
Katama ca avuso dukkhanirodhagaminl patipada ariya-
saccam ?
Ayam eva ariyo atthangiko maggo : seyyathldam : samma-
ditthi, sammasahkappo, sammavaca, sammakammanto, samma-
ajlvo, samma-vayamo, sammasati, sammasamadhi.
Katama ca avuso sammaditthi ?
Yam kho avuso dukkhe-nanam, dukkhasamudaye-nanam,
dukkhanirodhe-nanam, dukkhanirodha-gamimpatipadaya-na-
nam. — Ayam vuccat* avuso sammaditthi. || 1 |J
Katama ca avuso sammasahkappo ?
Nekkhammasankappo abyapadasankappo avihimsasan-
kappo. — Ayam vuccat* avuso sammasahkappo. || 2 1|
Katama ca avuso sammavaca ?
Musavada veramam pisunavacaya veramanl pharusavacaya
veramam samphappalapaya veramanl. — Ayam vuccat’ avuso
sammavaca. ||3||
Katama ca avuso sammakammanto ?
Panatipata veramam adinnadana veramanl kamesu miccha-
cara veramam. — Ayam vuccat* avuso sammakammanto. || 4 1|
Katama ca avuso sarama-ajlvo.
Idh* avuso ariyasavako miccha ajlvam pahaya, samma-
ajlvena jlvikam kappeti. — Ayam vuccat’ avuso samma
ajlvo. || 5 1|
Katama ca avuso sammavayamo P
Idh* avuso bhikkhu anuppannanam papakanam akusalanam
ed by CjOCK^Ic
132
SACCAVIBHANGA.
dhammanam anuppadaya chandam janeti vayamati viriyam
arabhati cittam pagganhati padabati.
Uppannanam papakanam akusalanam dhammanam paha-
naya chandam janeti — pe — padahati.
Anuppannanam kusalanam dhammanam uppadaya chandam
janeti — pe — padahati.
Uppannanam kusalanam dhammanam thitiya asammohaya
bhiyo bhavaya vepullaya bh a van ay a paripuriya chandam
janeti vayamati viriyam arabhati cittam padahati. — Ayam
vuccat* avuso sammavayamo. || 6 1|
Katama ca avuso sammasati ?
Idh J avuso bhikkhu kaye kayanupassl viharati atapT sampa-
jano satima vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassam.
Yedana vedan^nupassi viharati atapl — pe — abhijjha-
domanassam.
Citte cittinupassi viharati atiipl — pe — abhijjhado-
manassam.
Dhamme dhammanupassl viharati atapl sampajano satima
vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassam.
Ayam vuccat’ avuso sammasati. || 7 1|
Katama ca avuso sammasamadhi ?
Idh’ avuso bhikkhu vivicc’ eva kamehi vivicca akusalehi
dhammehi savitakkam savicaram vivekajam pltisukham
pathamajjhanam upasampajja viharati.
Vitakkavicaranam vupasama ajjhattam sampasadanam
cetaso ekodibhavam avitakkam avicaram samadhijam plti-
sukham dutiyajjhanam upasampajja viharati.
Pitiya ca viraga upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajano
sukhaiica kayena patisamvedeti yan tarn ariya acikkhanti
upekkhako satima sukhaviharl ti tatiyajjhanam upasampajja
viharati.
Sukhassa ca pahana dukkhassa ca pahana pubbe ca soma-
nassa-domanassanam atthagama addukkham asukham upe-
kkhasati-parisuddhjm catutthajjhanam upasampajja viharati.
— Ayam vuccat 1 avuso sammasamadhi. || 8 1|
Idam vuccat’ avuso dukkhanirodhagaminlpatipada ariya-
saccam. II 10 II
ed by CjOO^Ic
ARUNAVATISUTTA.
133
Tathagatena avuso arahata sammasambuddhena Baranasi-
yam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam pavatti-
tam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va devena va
Marena va Brahmuna va kenaci va lokasmim acikkhata
desata pannapata patthapata vivarana vibhajana uttana-
kamman ti. Illlll
Idam avoca ayasma Sariputto attamana te bhikkhu ayas-
mato Sariputtassa bbasitam abhinandun ti.
SACCAYIBHANGA.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Tatra kho
Bhagava bhikkhu amantesi i bhikkhavo ’ ti f bhadante , ti.
Te bhikkhii Bhagavato paccassosum : Bhagava etad avoca: II 1 II
“ Bhutapubbam, bhikkhave, raja ahosi Arunava. Ranno
kho pana bhikkhave Arunavato Arunavati nama rajadhanl
ahosi. || 2 1|
Ariinavatiyam kho pana bhikkhave rajadhanlyam SikhI
Bhagava Araham Sammasambuddho upanissaya vihasi. ||3||
Sikhissa kho pana bhikkhave Bhagavato Arahato Samma-
sambuddhassa Abhibhu Sambhavam nama savakayugam
ahosi aggam bhaddayugam. ||4||
Atha kho, bhikkhave, SikhI Bhagava Araham Samma-
sambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum amantesi: ||5||
“ Ayama brahmana yena annataro brahmaloko : ten' upa-
sankamissama yava bhattassa kalo bhavissati.” || 6 1|
Evam bhante ti kho te bhikkhave Abhibhu bhikkhu
Sikhissa Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddhassa pacca-
ssosi. II 7 II
Atha kho, bhikkhave, SikhI Bhagava Araham Samma-
sambuddho Abhibhu ca bhikkhu seyyathapi nama : balava
ed by CjOO^Ic
134
AKUNAYAT1SUTTA.
puriso sammifijitam va baham pasareyya pasaritam va
baham samminjeyya. || 8 II
Evam evam Arunavatiya rajadhaniya antarahita tasmim
brahmaloke paturahesum.
Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sikh! Bhagava Araham Samma-
sambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum amantesi : " Patibhatu
brahmana tam brahmuno ca brahma-parisa ca brabmapari-
sajjanam ca dhammi katha ti.” II 9 1|
Evam bhante ti kbo bhikkhave Abhibhu bbikkhu Sikhissa
Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddbassa patissutva brahma-
nanca brabmaparisanca brabmaparisajje ca dhammiya katbaya
sandassesi samadapesi samuttejesi sampabamsesi || 10 1|
Tatra sudam bhikkhave brahma ca brahmaparisa ca
brahmaparisajja ca ujjhayanti khlyanti vipacenti.
Accbariyam vata bbo abbbutam vata bbo kathanhi nama
sattbari sammukhlbbute savako dhammam desessatiti. || 11 1|
Atha kbo bhikkhave Sikh! Bhagava Araham Samma-
sambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum amantesi : —
“ Ujjhayanti kho te brahmana brahma ca brahmaparisa ca
brahmaparisajja ca: acchariyam vata bho abbhutam vata
bho — kathanhi nama satthari sammukhibhute savako
dhammam desessatiti.”
Tena hi tvam brahmana bhiyyo so mattaya brahmanca
brabmaparisanca brabmaparisajje ca samvejehiti. ||12||
Evam bhante ti kho bhikkhave Abhibhu bhikkhu
Sikhissa Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddhassa patissutva
dissamanena pi kayena dhammam desesi adissamanena pi
kayena dhammam desesi : dissamanena hetthimena upaddha-
kayena, adissamanena uparimena upaddhakayena dhammam
desesi : dissamanena pi uparimena upaddhakayena, adissa-
manena hetthimena upaddhakayena pi dhammam desesi. || 1311
Tatra sudam bhikkhave brahma ca brahmaparisa ca brahma-
parisajja ca acchariyabbhuta-citta-jata ahesum. Acchariyam
vata bho abbhutam vata bho samanassa mahiddhikata mah&-
nubhavat&ti. ||14||
Atha kho Abhibhu bhikkhu Sikhim Bhagavantam Ara-
hantam Sammasambuddham etad avoca :
ed by CjOO^Ic
ARUNAVATISUTTA.
135
“ Abhijanami khv&ham bhante bhikkhusanghassa maj jbe
evarupam vacam bhasita, pahomi khv&ham avuso brahmaloke
thito sahassllokadhatum sarena virinapetun ti. Etassa brahma-
na kalo yam tvam brahmana brahmaloke thito sahassi-loka-
dhatum sarenaviDnapeyyasiti. ||15||
Evam bhante ti kho bhikkhave Abhibhu bhikkhu Sikhissa
Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddhassa patissutva brahma-
loke thito ima gathayo abhasi :
Arabhatha, nikkamatha, yunjatha Buddhasasane
Dhunatha maccuno senam nalikeram ya kunjaro. || 1 II
Yo imasmim dhammavinaye appamatto vihassati
Pahaya jatisamsaram dukkhassantam karissatiti. ||2||
Atha kho bhikkhave SikhI ca Bhagava Araham Samma-
sambuddho Abhibhu ca bhikkhu brahmanca brahmaparisaiica
brahmaparisajje ca samvejetva seyyath&pi nama : balava pu-
riso samminjitam v& baham pasareyya pasaritam va baham
sainminjeyya : evam eva tasmim brahmaloke antarahita Aru-
navatiya rajadhaniya paturahesum. || 16 1|
Atha kho bhikkhave SikhI Bhagava Araham Sammasam-
buddho bhikkhu amantesi : —
“ Assuttha no tumhe bhikkhave Abhibhussa bhikkhuno
brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti.” ||17||
“‘Assumha kho mayam bhante Abhibhussa bhikkhuno
brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanass& ti/ ” ||18||
“Yatha katham pana tumhe bhikkhave assuttha Abhi-
bhussa bhikkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa
ti” II 19 II
“‘Evam kho mayam bhante assumha Abhibhussa bhi-
kkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa :
“ Arabhattha, nikkamatha, yunjatha Buddhasasane
Dhunatha maccuno senam nalikeram va kunjaro. || 1 1|
“ Yo imasmim dhammavinaye appamatto vihassati
Pahaya jatisamsaram dukkhassantam karissati ti. ||2||
ed by CjOCK^Ic
136
DEVADAHASUTTA.
“‘Evam kho mayam bhante assumha Abhibhussa bhi-
kkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti.’” ||20||
“Sadhu, sadhu, bbikkbave, sadhu kho tumhe bhikkhave
assuttha Abhibhussa bhikkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo
bhasamanassa ti. II 21 1|
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato
bhasitam abhinandun ti. ||22||
ARUN AVATI S UTT AM.
N AMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Sakkesu viha-
rati Devadahan nama Sakyanam nigamo. Tatra kho Bhagava
bhikkhu amantesi : —
“Naham bhikkhave sabbe saiineva bhikkhunam chasu
phass&yatanesu appamadena karanlyan ti vadami. ,,
“Na ca panaham bhikkhave sabbe saiineva bhikkhunam
chasu phassayatanesu nappamadena karanlyan ti vadami.”
u Ye te, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahanto khmasava vusitavanto
katakaraniya ohitabhara anupattasadattha parikkhma bhava-
samyojana sammad-annavimutta : sohain bhikkhunam chasu
phassayatanesu nappamadena karanlyan ti vadami. ||1||
a Tam kissa hetu? Katan tesu appamadena abhabbate
pamajjitum. Ye ca kho • te, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sekha
appattamanasa anuttaram yogakkhemam patthayamana vi-
haranti; nes&ham bhikkhave bhikkhunam chasu phassaya-
tanesu appamadena karanlyan ti vadami. ,, ||2||
“Tam kissa hetu? Santi bhikkhave cakkhuviiineyya,
rupa manorama pi amanorama pi. Tyassa phussa cittam na
pariyadaya titthati cetaso apariyadana araddham hoti viri-
yam asalilnam upatthita sati apamuttha passaddho kayo asa-
raddho samahitam cittam ekaggam: imam khvaham, bhi-
ed by CjOO^Ic
DEVADAHASUTTA.
137
kkhave, appamadassa phalam samphassa-mano tesam bhi-
kkhunam chasu phassayatanesu appamadena karaniyan ti
vadami. || 3 ||
Santi bhikkhave ghanavifineyya gandha manorama pi
amanorama pi. || 4 ||
Santi bhikkhave jivhavinneyya rasa manorama pi amano-
rama pi. II 5 1|
Santi bhikkhave kayavinfieyya photthabba manorama pi
amanorama pi. || 6 ||
Santi bhikhhave manovinneyya dhamma manorama ama-
norama pi.
Tyassa phussa cittam na pariyadaya titthati cetaso
apariyadana araddham hoti : viriyam asalllnam upatthita sati
apamuttha passaddho kayo asaraddho samahitam cittam
ekaggam : imam khvaham bhikkhave appamadaphalam
samphas8amano tesam bhikkhunam chasu phassayatanesu
appamadena karanlyan ti vadami. || 7 1|
Labha vo bhikkhave suladdham vo bhikkhave khano vo
patiladdho brahmacariya vasayati.
Dittha maya bhikkhave cha phassayatananika nama niraya.
Tatha : yam kinci cakkhuna rupam passati anittharu-
pan iieva passati neva ittharupam akantarupan iieva passati
no kantarupam amanaparupan neva passati no manaparupam.
Yam kinci sotena saddam sunati — pe — .
Yam kinci ghanena gandham ghayati — pe — .
Yam kinci jivhaya rasam sayati — pe — .
Yam kinci kayena photthabbam phusati — pe — .
Yam kinci manasa dhammam vijanati anittharupam yeva
vijanati, no ittharupam akantarupam yeva vijanati, no kanta-
rupam amanaparupam yeva vijanati no manaparupam. ||8||
Labha vo, bhikkhave, suladdham vo, bhikkhave, khano vo,
bhikkhave, patiladdho brahmacariyavasaya.
Dittha maya, bhikkhave, cha-phassayatanika nama sagga.
Tattha : yam kinci cakkhuna rupam passati ittharupam
ed by CjOO^Ic
138
DEVADAHASUTTA.
yeva passati no anittharupam : kantarupam yeva passati no
akantam rupam : manaparupam yeva passati no amanapa-
rupam.
— pe — .
Yam kinci manasa dhammam vijanati ittharupam yeva
vijanati, no anittharupam : kantarupam yeva vijanati, no
akantarupam: manaparupam yeva vijanati, no amanapa-
rupam. ||9||
Labha vo bhikkhave, suladdham vo bhikkhave, khano vo
patiladdho brahmacariya vasay&ti.
Ruparama, bhikkhave, devamanussa ruparata, rupasamu-
dita rupaviparinama-viraganirodba dukkha bhikkhave
devamanussa viharanti.
Saddarama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Gandharama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Rasarama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Photthabbarama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Dhammarama, bhikkhave, devamanussa dhammarata
dhammasamudita dhammaviparinama viraganirodha du-
kkha, bhikkhave, devamanussa viharanti. ||10||
Tathagato ca kho, bhikkhave, Araham Sammasambuddho
rupanam samudayanca atthagamafica assadanca adinavanca
nissaranaftca yathabhutam viditva na ruparamo, na ruparato
na rupasamudito na rupaviparinama viraganirodha sukho
bhikkhave Tathagato viharati.
Saddanam — pe — .
Gandhanam — pe — .
Rasanam — pe — .
Photthabbanam — pe — .
Dhammanam samudayanca atthagamarica assadanca adina-
vanca nissarananca yathabhutam viditva : na dhammaramo,
na dhammarato, na dhammasamudito, na dhammaviparinama
viraganirodho sukho bhikkhave Tathagato viharatiti. || 11 1|
Idam avoca Bhagava. Idam vatva ca Sugato : athaparam
etad avoca sattha : —
ed by CjOO^Ic
DEVADAHASUTTA.
139
Rupa sadda gandha rasa phassa dhamma ca kevala
Ittha kanta manapa ca yava tattha ti vuccanti. II 1 II
Sadevakassa lokassa ete vo sukhasammata
Tattha ce te mrujjhanti tam tesam dukkham samma-
tam. || 2 1|
Sukham tam ditthamariyehi sakkayassa nirodhanam
Faccanlkam idam hoti sabbalokena passatam. ||3||
Tam pare sukhato ahu tad ariya ahu dukkhato
Tam pare dukkhato ahu tad ariya sukhato yidu. ||4||
Passadhammam duvijanam sammulhettha aviddasu
Nivutanam tamo hoti andhakaro apassatam. || 5 1|
Satanca vivatam hoti aloko passatam iva
Santike na vijananti maggadhammassa kovida. ||6||
Bhavaraga-paretebhi bhavayoganusaribhi
Maradheyy an upann ebhi nayamdhammosusambuddho. ||7||
Ko nu annatram ariyebhi padi sambuddham arahati
Tam padam sammadannaya parinibbanti anasava ti. ||8||
DEYADAHASUTTAM.
PARITTAM NITTHITAAI.
ed by CjOO^Ic
ed by CjOCK^Ic
A COLLECTION OF KAMMAVACAS.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Chap. I.
THE ORDINATION OF A PRIEST.
Pathamam upajjham gahapetabbo, upajjham gahapetva
pattacivaram acikkhitabbam :
* Ayan te patto P 9 “ Ama bhaIlte. ,,
‘ Ayam sanghatl ? 9 “ Ama bhante.”
‘ Ayam uttarasango ? 9 “ Ama bhante.”
‘ Ayam antaravasabo ? 9 “ Ama bhante.”
* Gaccha amumhi, okase titthahi ! 9
Sunatu me bhante sangbo ! Nago ayasmato Tissassa upa-
sampadapekho. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, abam Ndgam
anusaseyyam.
Sunasi Naga ! ayan te paccakalo bhutakalo. Yam jatam,
tarn sanghamajjhe puccbante : santam attbiti vattabbam,
as ant am nattbiti vattabbam.
Ma kbo vitthasi ! ma kbo manbu abosi !
Evam tarn pucchissan ti.
Santi te evarupa abadha P
‘ Kuttham P * “ Nattbi bhante.”
* Gando P 9 “ Natthi bhante.”
* Kilaso P 9 “ Natthi bhante.”
‘ Soso ? 9 “ Nattbi bhante.”
‘ Apamaro P 9 “ Nattbi bhante.”
ed by CjOCK^Ic
142
UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.
‘ Manusso' si P' “ Ama bhante.''
‘ Puriso' si ? ' “ Ama bhante.''
* Bbujisso , si P ' “ Ama bhante.''
‘ Anano' si P' “ Ama bhante.''
‘ Na' si rajabhato P 9 “ Ama bhante.”
* Anunnato’ si matapituhi ? ' “ Ama bhante.”
€ Paripunna-ylsati- vasso 'si P ' “ Ama bhante.”
* Paripunnan te patta-clvaram ?' “ Ama bhante.”
* Kinnamo 'si P' " Aham bhante Nago nama.”
‘Ko naino te upajjhayo P' “TJpajjhayo me bhante dyasmd
Tissathero nama.”
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Nago ayasmato Tissassa
upasampadapekho. Anusittho so maya.
Tadi sanghassa pattakallam, Nago agaccheyya.
Agacchahiti vattabbo :
Sangham bhante upasampadam yacami : Ullumpatu mam
bhante sangho, anukampam upadaya !
Dutiyam pi bhante sangham upasampadam yacami : Ullum-
patu mam bhante sangho, anukampam upadaya !
Tatiyam pi bhante sangham upasampadam yacami : Ullum-
patu mam bhante sangho, anukampam upadaya !
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam Nago ayasmato Tissassa
upasampadapekho. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam aham Nagam
antarayike dhamme puccheyyam :
Sunasi Naga ! ayan te saccakalo bhutakalo. Yam jatam
tarn pucchami: San tarn atthiti vattabbam, asantam natthiti
vattabbam.
Santi te evarupa abadha :
‘ Kuttham P ' “ Natthi bhante.”
* Gando ?' “ Natthi bhante.”
‘ Kilaso P ' “ Natthi bhante.”
‘ Soso ?' “ Natthi bhante.”
‘ Apamaro P' “ Natthi bhante.”
‘ Manusso' si P ' “ Ama bhante.”
‘ Puriso' si ? ' “ Ama bhante.”
( Bhujisso' si P ' “ Ama bhante.'
‘ Anano' si P ' “ Ama bhante.”
ed by CjOCK^Ic
UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.
143
* Na* si rajabhato P , “ Ama bhante. ,,
* Anunnato’ si matapituhi ? ’ “ Ama bhante.”
‘ Paripunna-v^8ati-vas80 , si ? , “ Ama bhante.”
‘ Paripunnan te pattacivaram ? 9 “ Ama bhante.”
i Kinnamo’ si P * “ Aham bhante Ndgo nama.”
‘ Ko namo te upajjhayo ? 9 “ Upaj jhayo me bhante ayasmd
Tissatthero nama.”
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam Ndgo ayasmato Tissassa
upasampadapekho, parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi, pari-
punn* assa patta-clvaram Ndgo sangham upasampadam yacati
ayasmata Tissena upaj j hay ena.
Tadi sahghassa pattakallam sangho Nagam upasampadeyya
ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena.
Esa Natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam Nago ayasmato
Tissassa upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dham-
mehi paripunn’ assa pattacivaram Nago sangham upasampa-
dam yacati ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Nagam
upasampadeti ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yass&yasmato
khamati Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena,
so tunh* assa. Yassa na kkhamati, so bhaseyya.
Dutiyam pi etam attham vadami :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam Nago ayasmato Tissassa
upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi pari-
punn’ assa pattacivaram Nago sangham upasampadam yacati
ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Nagam upasampa-
deti ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati
Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, so tunh J
assa. Yassa na kkhamati, so bhaseyya.
Tatiyam pi etam attham vadami.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam Nago ayasmato Tissassa
upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi paw-
paw* assa pattacivaram Nago sangham upasampadam yacati
ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Nagam upasampa-
deti ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati
Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, so t tinh *
assa. Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
144
UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.
TJpasampanno sahghena Nago ayasmata Tissena upajjha-
yena : khamati sanghassa : tasma tunhl evam etam dhara-
yamiti. —
Tavadeva chaya metabba ;
Utupamanam acikkhitabbam ;
Divasabhago acikkhitabbo ;
Sahglti acikkhitabba. —
Cattaro nissaya acikkbitabba
Cattari ca akaranlyani aeikkhitabbani :
1) “ Pindiyalopabhojanam nissaya pabbqjja : tattha te yava-
jivam ussaho karanlyo. Atirekalabho : Saiighabhattam,
uddesabhattam, nimantanam, salakabhattam, pakkhikam,
uposathikam, patipadikam. ,, “ “ Ama bhante ! ” ”
2) “ Pamsukulacivaram nissaya pabbajja : tattha te yava-
jlvam ussaho karanlyo. Atirekalabho : khomam, kappasi-
kam, koseyyam, kambalam, sanam, bhahgam. ,, “ “ Ama
bhante. ,> 99
3) “ PuJckhamulasendsanam nissdya pabbajja : tattha te
yavajivam ussaho karanlyo. Atirekalabho: viharo addha-
yogo, pasado, hammiyam, guha. ,> “ “ Ama bhante ! 99 99
4) u Putimuttabhesajjam nissdya pabbajja: tattha te yava-
jivam ussaho karanlyo. Atirekalabho : Sappi, navanltam,
telam, madhu, phanitam. ,> " “ Ama bhante ! 99 99
1) “ Upasampannena bhikkhuna methuno dhammo na patisevi-
tabbo antamaso tiracchanagataya pi. Yo bhikkhu methunam
dhammam patisevati assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyya-
thapi nama : Puriso slsacchinno abhabbo tena sarlrabandha-
nena jlvitum, evam eva bhikkhu methunam dhammam pati-
sevitva assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Tan te yavajivam
akaranIyam. ,, “ “ Ama bhante ! 99 99
2) “ Upasampannena bhikkhuna adinnam theyyasahkhatam
na adatabbam antamaso tinasalakam updddya. Yo bhikkhu
padam va padaraham va atirekapadam va adinnam theyya-
sankhatam adiyati, assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyyathapi
nama : Pandupalaso bandhana pamutto abhabbo haritattaya
evam eva bhikkhu padam va padaraham va atirekapadam va
ed by CjOO^Ic
TICIVARENA AVIPPAVASA.
145
adinnam theyyasankhatam adiyitva, assamano hoti asakya-
pufctiyo. Tan te yavajlvam akaranlyam.” “ “ Ama
bhante ! ” 99
3) “ Upasampannena bhikkhuna sancicca pano jivita na voro -
petabbo antamaso kunthakipillikam upadaya : Yo bhikkhu
sancicca manussaviggabam jivita voropeti antamaso gabbha-
patananx upadaya assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyyathapi
nama puthu sila dvedha bhinna appatisandhika hoti, evam eva
bhikkhu sancicca manussaviggaham jivita voropetva assamano
hoti, asakyaputtiyo. Tan te yavajlvam aka^anIyam. ,, “ <f Ama
bhante. ,, ”
4) " Upa8ampannena bhikkhuna uttari-manmsa-dhammo na
ullapitabbo antamaso sunhagdre abhiramlti. Yo bhikkhu pa-
piccho icchapakato asantam abhutam uttari-manussa-dham-
mam ullapati jhanam va yimokkhain va samadhim va sama-
pattim va maggam va phalam va assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo.
Seyyathapi nama : talo matthaka chinno, abhabbo puna vi-
rujhaya evam eva bhikkhu papiccho icchapakato asantam
abhutam uttari-manussa-dhammam ullapitva, assamano hoti
asakyaputtiyo. Tan te yavajlvam akaranlyam.” “ “ Ama
bhante .” 99
Chap. II.
THE INVESTITURE OF A PRIEST WITH THE
THREE ROBES.
Sunatu me bhante sangho. Yo so sanghena ticlvarena
avippavaso sammato. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho
tarn ticlvarena avippavasam samuhaneyya.
JEsa natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho : Yo so sanghena ticlvarena
avippavaso sammato, sangho tarn ticlvarena avippavasam
samuhanati. Yass&yasmato khamati etassa ticlvarena avippa-
10
ed by CjOO^Ic
146
UPOSATHA KAMMAVACA.
vasassa samugghato, so tunh’ assa. Yassa na kkhamati so
bhaseyya. Samuhato so sanghena ticlvarena avippavaso.
Khamati sanghassa tasma tunhl evam etam dharayamiti.
Chap. III.
THE FIXING OF A BOUNDARY FOR THE PER-
FORMANCE OF THE UPOSATHA.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ya sa sanghena slma samma-
nnita samanasamvasa ek J uposatha : yadi sanghassa patta-
kallam sangho tam slmam samuhaneyya.
Esd natti:
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ya sa sanghena slma sarama-
nnita samanasamvasa ek’ uposatha, sangho tam slmam samu-
hanati. Yassayasmato khamati etissa slmaya samanasamva-
saya els’ uposathaya samugghato so tunh’ assa. Yassa na
kkhamati, so bhaseyya. Samuhata sa slma sanghena samana-
samvasa ek’ uposatha. Khamati sanghassa tasma tunhl evam
etam dharayamiti.
* Puratthimaya disaya kin nimittam ?’ " Pasano bhante ! ”
‘ Eso pasano nimittam ! ,
‘Puratthimaya anudisaya kin nimittam ?’ “Pasano
bhante ! ”
‘ Eso pasano nimittam ! ’
€ Dakkhinaya disaya kin nimittam ? ’ " Pasano bhante ! ”
* Eso pasano nimittam ! ,
‘ Dakkhinaya anudisaya kin nimittam ?’ “Pasano bhante l”
* Eso pasano nimittam ! ,
‘ Pacchimaya disaya kin nimittam ?’ “ Pasano bhante ! ”
‘ Eso pasano nimittam ! ,
‘ Pacchimaya anudisaya kin nimittam ?’ “Pasano bhante !”
‘ Eso pasano nimittam ! ,
‘ Uttaraya disaya kin nimittam p' *' Pasano bhante ! ”
‘ Eso pasano nimittam ! ,
ed by CjOO^Ic
KATHINA KAMMAVACA.
147
* Uttaraya anudisaya kin niinittam ?' “ Pasano bhante !”
‘ Eso pasano niinittam ! 9
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Tavata samanta nimitta
kittita: yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho etehi nimittehi
si mam sammanneyya samana-samvasam ek’ uposatham.
Esa natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Yavata samanta nimitta kittita
sangho etehi nimittehi simam sammannati samanasamvasam
ek J uposatham. YassS-yasraato khamati etehi nimittehi sl-
maya sammuti samana-samyasaya ek’ uposathaya, so tunh’
assa ! Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya ! Sammata sa slma
sanghena etehi nimittehi samanasamvasa ek J uposatha. Kha-
mati sanghassa tasma tunhl evam etam dharayamiti.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ya sa sanghena sammata sa-
manasamvasa ek’ uposatha : Yadi sanghassa pattakallam
sangho tarn simam ticlvarena avippavasam sammaneyya tha-
petva gamanca gamupacaranca.
Esd natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ya sa sanghena slma sammata
samanasamvasa ek’ uposatha sangho tarn simam ticlvarena
avippavasam sammannati thapetva gamanca gamupacaranca.
Yass&yasmato khamati etissa slmava ticlvarena avippava-
saya sammuti thapetva gamanca gamupacarafica, so tunh 1
assa ! yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya.
Sammata sa slma sanghena ticlvarena avippavasa thapetva
gamanca gamupacaranca. Khamati sanghassa tasma tunhl
evam etam dharayamiti.
Chap. IY.
THE BESTOWMENT OF THE KATHINA ROBE.
Sunatu me bhante sangho! Idam sanghassa kathina-
dussam uppannani. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, sangho
imam kathinadussam itthannamassa bhikkhuno dadeyya
kathinam attharitum.
ed by
Google
148
XATHINA KAMMAVACA.
Esa natti,
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Idam sanghassa kathina-
dussam uppannam. Sangho imam kathinadussam itthanna-
massa bhikkhuno deti kathinam attharitum. Yass&yasmato
khamati imassa kathinadussassa itthannamassa bhikkhuno
danam kathinam attharitum so tunh’ assa. Yassa na kkha-
mati so bhaseyya. Dinnam idam sanghena kathinadussam
itthannamassa bhikkhuno kathinam attharitum. Khamati
sanghassa, tasma tunhl, evam etam dharayamiti.
Kathinadayakassa vattham atthi sace so tarn ajananto
pucchati : “ Bhante katham kathinam databban ti ? 99
Tassa evam acikkhitabbam : “ “ Tinnam clvaranam aiina-
tara-pahonakam suriyuggamana-samaye vattham kathinacl-
varam dema ti datum vattatiti :
“ “ Attharakena bhikkhuna sace sanghatiya kathinam
attharitu kamo hoti, poranika saiighati paccuddharitabba :
nava sanghati adhitthatabba, “imaya sanghatiya kathinam
attharam^ti, ,, vaca bhinditabba. Tena kathinattharakena
bhikkhuna sahgham upasankamitva ekamsam uttarasahgam
karitva anjalim paggahetva evam assa vacaniyo :
4< Atthatam, bhante, sanghassa kathinam dhammiko kathi-
nattharo, anumodatha ! ”
“ “ Atthatam avuso sanghassa kathinam dhammiko kathi-
nattharo anumodama ti ! 99 99
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Yadi sanghassa pattakallam
sangho kathinam uddhareyya.
Esa natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Yadi sanghassa pattakallam
sangho kathinam uddharati. Yassayasraato khamati kathi-
nassa ubbharo so tunh > assa ! yassa na kkhamati, so bha-
seyya. —
Fbbhatam sanghena kathinam ! Khamati sanghassa tasma
tunhl evam etam dharayamiti.
ed by CjOO^Ic
THERA-SAMMUTI-KAMASAMMUTTI. 149
Chap. Y.
THE ELECTION OF A PRIEST.
Aham bhante itthannamam thera-sammutim icchami !
soham, bhante, sangham ittbannamam therasammutim
yacami ! Dutiyam pi yacapetva, tatiyam pi yacapetva
byattena bhikkhuna patibalena sangho napetabbo :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam itthaunamo bhikkhu
sangham ittbannamam tberasammutim yacati. Yadi san-
ghassa pattakallam sangho itthannamassa bbikkbuno ittban-
namam tberasammutim dadeyya.
Esa natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam itthannarao bhikkhu
sangham ittbannamam therasammutim yacati, sangho itthan-
namassa bhikkhuno itthannamam therasammutim deti. YassA-
yasmato khamati itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam
therasammutiya danam, so tunh’ assa. Yassa na kkhamati
so bhaseyya. — Dinna sanghena itthannamassa bhikkhuno
itthannamam therasammuti : khamati sanghassa tasma tunhl
evam etam dharayamiti.
Chap. YI.
THE GIYING OF A NAME TO A PRIEST.
Aham bhante itthannamam namasammutim icchami, soham
bhante sangham itthannamam namasammutim yacamiti.
Dutiyam pi yacapetya tatiyam pi yacapetva byattena bhi-
kkhuna patibalena sangho napetabbo :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam itthannamo bhikkhu
sangham itthannamam namasammutim yacati. Yadi sanghassa
pattakallam sangho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam
namasammutim dadeyya.
Esa natti :
ed by CjOO^Ic
150
VIHARA KAMMAVACA.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam itthannamo bhikkhu
sangham itthannamam namasa mmutim yacati : sangho
itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam namasammutim deti.
Yass&yasmato khamati itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthanna-
mam nama sammutiya danam so tunh’ assa ! Yassa na kkha-
mati so bhaseyya.
Dinna sanghena itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam
namasammuti : Khamati sahghassa tasma tunhi evam etamr
dharayamiti. —
Evam kammavacam katva byattena bhikkhuna patibalena
databbo ti.
Chap. VII.
THE DEDICATION OF A VIHARA.
Sunatu me bhante sangho; Yadi saiighassa pattakallam
sangho itthannamam viharam kappiyabhumim sammanneyya.
Esa natii :
Sunatu me bhante sangho! Sangho itthannamam viha-
ram kappiyabhumim sammannati. Yass&yasmato khamati
itthannamassa viharassa kappiya bhuraiya sammuti so tunh*
assa : Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya. Sammato sanghena
itthannamo viharo kappiyabhumi. Khamati sahghassa tasma
tunhi evam etam dharayamiti.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
III. GLOSSARY.
ed by CjOCK^I
GLOSSARY.
A.
A, and before vowels AN, a negative
particle; used only in composi-
tion.
AMSO, a part, a period of time.
AlifSO, AlClSAM, shoulder.
a-kattho (adj.), not ploughed.
a-kapo, rice freed from the red coat-
ing which underlies the husks.
a-kanto (adj.), unpleasant, disagree-
able.
a-kaliko (adj.), without delay (epi-
thet of the dhamma), immediate.
a-kuppo (adj.), firm, immoveable.
a-kmalo (adj.), had, evil, sinful.
a-kkuddho (adj.), not violent.
akkha-dhutto , gambler.
akkhata (no.), one who tells.
a-kkhati, to tell.
AKKHO, a die.
AGGAM, point, top, extremity.
AGGI (m.), fire.
AGGO (adj.), first, foremost.
ANGAlif, limb ; share, quality, at-
tribute.
acceti, to pass beyond, to over-
come ; p. p. p. atito, past.
AJJA (adv.), now, to-day.
ajjatagge , henceforward.
AJJHATTASr, individual thought.
ajjhattam (adv.), relating to the in-
dividual.
ajjhattiko (adj.), internal, belonging
to the individual.
AJJHAYAKO, a preceptor.
AftjALI (m.), the hollow of the
joined hands.
annataro , one, a certain.
ANSA (f.) knowledge.
anhatra (adv.), otherwise, with the
exception of.
ANftO, other.
AT^O, a case, a cause.
ATTHA (num.), eight.
atthahgiko (adj.), eightfold.
atthamo , eighth.
AXTHI (n.), bone; caus. atthiyati ,
to treat as a bone.
ATTHIMINJA (f.), marrow.
ATTHO, reason.
APDHAYOGO (t. t.), large ball.
anuko (adj.), very small.
ANIjTAVO, the sea, the ocean.
ATI (adv. and prep.), over, beyond,
exceeding, before vowels acc.
ati-go (adj.), escaping from. [gant.
ati-mannati , to despise, to be arro-
ati-mani (adj.), proud.
ATIREKAIiABHO (t. t.), extra
allowance.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
154
GLOSSARY.
ATT A (n.), self, mind (for declen-
sion, see Grammar).
ATTHA (adv.), here. [ance.
ATTHAM (Skr. asta ), disappear-
attha-gamo , atthan° 9 disappearance,
annihilation.
a-ttharati, to spread out.
atthdya (adv.), for the good of.
ATTHI, to be (for conjugation, see
Grammar).
ATTHO, reason, desire ; property.
ATHA, ATHO (adv.), and ; but.
a-thtuo (adj.), free from husk.
a-dinnddanam , taking what is not
given.
ADDHANA]fi[, a road ; a long time.
ADHAMO (adj.), lowest.
ADH I (adv. and prep.), above, over;
frequently in composition before
vowels ajjh .
adhi-titthati, to devote oneself.
adhi-tthdnam 9 resting-place.
ADHI-PATI (m.), lord, chief.
adbi-bhdsati, to address ; aor. ajjha -
bhdsi.
adhi-vahanam> carrying.
adhi-vasanam , the assent, [accept.
adhi-vdseti (cans.), to consent, to
a-nano 9 free from debt.
an-attd (m.), not a self.
an-atto (adj.), without individu-
ality, unreal.
an-attha-samhito, profitless.
an-anu-giddho 9 without greediuess.
an-anu-88uto (adj.), unheard of.
an-anto 9 without end, innumerable.
ANA-BHAVO, non-existence; ana-
bhavath gacchati , to come to
nothing, to perish.
an-dbhirati 9 dissatisfaction.
an-arahd 9 not being a saint.
an-ariyo 9 ignoble.
anavajjata (f.), blamelessness.
anavajjo (adj.), blameless.
an-aoayho (adj.), not to be given in
marriage.
an-ava8eso 9 without remainder.
an-avilo, clear from.
andkulo , untroubled.
andgato 9 future, coming. [less.
andlayo 9 free from desire, passion-
A-NICCO (adj.) (t. t.), perishable,
not lasting.
anittho (adj.), unpleasant.
ANU (adv. and prep.), after, later ;
along, again, in consequence.
anu-kathyati , to recite.
anu-kampako 9 compassionate.
anu-kamp\ 9 compassionate.
anu-jdndti , to permit ; p. p. p. anun-
nato .
an-utthanam, want of energy.
anu-tthitati 9 to make to follow.
an-uttaro (adj.), than which none is
higher, the highest.
anudUd (f.), an intermediate point
of the compass.
an-up-pagacchati 9 not to embrace.
anu-para-yati, to walk round and
round.
anu-passi (adj.), looking at, contem-
plating.
anu-pubbaso (adv.), in regular order.
anuppanno , not arisen.
an-uppddo 9 not arising.
anu-ydti 9 to follow.
anu-yogo , being addicted to.
anu-rakkhati 9 to protect.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
155
ANU-SAYO (t. t.), repentance.
anusdrl (adj.), following.
anu-sasati , to teach.
anussaratt, to call iu mind.
anu-88aveti (caus.), to cause to be
heard, to proclaim.
an-ejo (adj.), free from desire.
an-ottapi (adj.), fearless of sinning.
ANTAlfiT, the intestines, bowels.
ANTAGUNA*, mesentery.
antamaso , even.
ANTARA (adv. and prep.), within,
between, among.
antara-dhdnam , disappearance.
antara-dhdyati , to vanish, to hide ;
p. p. p. antarahito, vanished.
antardyiko, causing an obstacle.
ANTARA- VASAKO (t. t.), under-
garment worn by a Buddhist
priest.
ANTALIKKHAM, sky, air.
ANTIMO, last, final.
ANTO (adv. and prep.), within, in,
inside ; see also antara .
ANTO (also neuter), end, limit.
ANDHO (adj.), blind.
andha-kdro , darkness.
ANNA*, food.
APAM ARO, epilepsy.
a-pamuttho (adj.), not left behind.
a-pardjito , unconquered.
a-parimdno (adj.), immense, unde-
fined.
a-pariydddnum , not taking up, not
laying hold of.
APARO (adj.), other, subsequent;
western.
a-pddako , having no feet.
APAYO [going away], hell.
API, PI (part.), also, even.
a-pisuno (adj.), not calumnious.
ap-eti , to go away.
appa-kicoo f having few cares.
a-ppagabbho, not arrogant.
a-ppati-8andiko , that cannot be
united.
appa-nigg/ioso, free from noise.
a-ppa-matto , vigilant, careful.
a-ppamdno (adj.), infinite.
a-ppa-mddo 9 vigilance, zeal.
appasaddoy free from noise.
a-ppa-sanno, dissatisfied.
a-ppiyo, not dear, hateful.
APPO (adj.), small, weak ; fre-
quently in composition.
abbh-ug-gacchati, to reach, [sire.
A-BY-APADO (t.t), abseuce of de-
a-bhabbatd (f.), non-liability.
a-bhabbo (adj.), incapable.
a-bhayam , safety from danger.
ABHI (adv. and prep.), exceeding;
in, into.
abhi-kkanto, handsome, beautiful.
abhi-kkanto (p. p. p.), abhikkamati ,
advanced.
abhi-kkamati , to step forward.
abhi-kkamo, advancing.
abhi-gxtOy (p. p. p.), recited.
abhijdndti , to know ; ger. abhinna .
ABHIJJHA (f.), covetousness.
abhi-titthati, to surpass.
ABHITTHANA* (t. t.), crime,
deadly sin. %
ABHINHA* (adv.), repeatedly.
abhinhaso (adv.), repeatedly, [with.
abhi-nandati , to rejoice, to be pleased
ABHI-NIBBATTI (f.) (t.t.), re-
birth in another existence.
ed by CjOO^Ic
156
GLOSSARY.
a&hi-niveso, adhering to.
abhi-paleti, to guard, to keep.
abhi-ppa-modayariij rejoicing.
abhi-ramati , to delight.
abhi-rudo , cooing, singing.
abhi-ruhati , to mount.
abhi-vassati, to cause to rain.
abhi-vadeti, cans, of abhivadati , to
salute.
abhisameti, to penetrate.
a-bhojaneyyo , not to be eaten.
a-mato (adj.), immortal.
a-manapo (adj.), unpleasing, un-
pleasant.
a-manoramo (adj.), unpleasant.
a-mitto , enemy.
ARAfifiAM, forest.
ARAHA ARAHAM (m.), a vener-
able person.
ARAHO (adj.), worth.
ARIYO (adj.), honourable, vener-
able, noble.
ARIYA-SACCA * (t.t.), sublime
truth.
ALAlfr (adv.), sufficient.
ALASO (adj.), idle.
ALOKO, intuition.
alliyati , to be attached, to adhere.
alliko (adj.), being addicted, ad-
hering.
AVA and O (prep, and adv.), away,
off; down.
ava-janati , to despise.
ava-ruddho (adj.), obstructed.
a-viddasu, ignorant.
a-vippavaso , not parting.
a-vi-rufho (adj.), not grown.
a-viuayho (adj.), not marriageable.
avihimsa (f.), mercy, humanity.
avecca, gerund, of am + ^ i, to
penetrate.
a-veram , friendliness.
a-santo (adj.), not good, wicked.
a-sammoho (adj.), without infatua-
tion.
a- sal lino, not cowering, resolute.
ASlTI (uum.), eighty.
ASU (pron.), this, that (see Gram-
mar) ; amumhi (loc.), here.
a-suci (adj.), unclean.
a-mbho (adj.), bad.
ASURO, an asura.
a~sem (adj.), without rest ; all, every.
asoko, free from sorrow.
ASNATI, to eat. [ness.
ashddot tasting; enjoyment, happi-
a-88a8ati t to inhale air.
ASSO, horse.
A HAM (pron.), I (see Grammar).
A HI (m.), a snake.
AHO (inteijection).
A.
A (prep.), until, as far as.
a-kankhati, to desire.
a-kappo, ornament, disguise.
a-gaechati , to come.
d-cikkhati> to tell, to announce, to
investigate.
ajahno (adj.), of noble birth, [hood.
a-jlvo , livelihood, means of liveli-
ATAPO, sunshine.
ATAPl (adj.), ardent, zealous.
a-dati, to take ; pass, ddiyati.
ADICCO, the sun.
ADlNAVO, distress, suffering ;
evil result.
I dnantariko (adj.), uninterrupted.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
GLOSSARY.
157
ANAPANAlfr (t. t.), inhaled and
exhaled breath.
ANISAMSO, advantage, profit.
anubhavava possessing power.
anu-bhavo , power, dignity.
a-neti, to bring home.
dpddetd (m.), inflicter, causer.
abadhiko (adj.), affected with illness.
A BAD HO, illness.
b-bhujati , to bend, to turn.
AM A (inteij.), yes, truly.
b-mantetiy to address. [sphere.
AY ATANAM (t. t.), organs of sense ;
b-yatiko , future.
AYASMA, old, venerable.
AYASO, despair.
AYU (u.), life.
b-yuto (adj.), endowed with.
d-raddho (p. p. p. to dradhati ), ac-
complished.
d-rabhati, to begin, to attempt,
to exert oueself ; ger. drubbha ;
p. p. p. draddho .
ArAMO, pleasure, pleasure-garden.
d-ruhati, to ascend.
d-varanam , covering.
dvaso , abode.
bvahati % to convey.
AVI (adv.), manifestly, in full view
(see Grammar).
a-visati, to enter, to approach.
AVUSO (voc. to ayasma ), friend !
asanam, a seat.
A-SAVO (t. t.), literally influence;
human passion ; khlnasavo, one in
whom human passion is extinct.
ASEVl (adj.), addicted to.
AHA, to speak (see Grammar).
dhanati, to strike.
AhARO, food.
b-huti (f.), offering.
bhuneyyo (adj.), sacrificial, wor-
shipful, worthy of offerings.
I.
INGH A (interj.), come ! pray !
ICCHAT1, to wish.
ICCHA, wish, desire, lust.
IN J ATI, to move, to be shaken.
IN AM, debt. [sant.
ITTHO (adj.), desired, good, plea-
ITI, TI (conj.), thus.
ITTHATTAM, present condition.
itthan-namOy having such and such
a name, thus named.
ITTHI (f.), woman (for declension,
see Grammar).
IDDHI (f.) (t. t.), supernatural
power.
iddhiko (adj.), possessed of iddhi
(supernatural power).
iddhimdy possessed of supernatural
power.
IDHA (adv.), here, hither, [gate.
indakhiloy pillar in front of a city
INDO, king, chief.
INDRIYO (t. t.), faculty.
IS I, a priest ; mahesi (idem).
isiariyariiy dominion.
ISSARO, master, chief.
ISSA, jealousy, envy.
I.
ISA, pole of a plough.
U.
uk-kujjetiy to set up again.
ug-gacchati, to rise.
ed by CjOO^Ic
158
GL08SARY.
ug-ganhati, to rise, to lift up, to
learn.
ug-gamanath, rise.
UGGO, violent.
UCCA (indecl.), as first part qf
compounds high ; uc cos ay an am ,
high seat.
UC-CARO, excrement.
UJU (adj.), straight.
uj-jhayati, to be irritated, annoyed.
u-tthahati , to rise, to stand up, to
exert oneself ; p. p. p. vutthito,
UNNA-NABHI (m.), spider.
UNHAM, heat.
UNHO (adj.), hot.
ULARO (adj.), mighty, great.
UTU (m. f. n.), season. [most.
UTTAMO (superl.), highest, ut-
UTTARA-8ANGO, the upper yel-
low garment of a Buddhist priest.
UTTARO (adj.), higher; northern.
UTTANO, supine ; open, evident,
clear, easy ; adv. uttdni and
uttdndj clearly.
ut-trasati , to tremble.
UD (prep., only used in composi-
tion), above, away ; outside, out.
UDAKA1VI, water.
UDARAM, belly.
udariyam, stomach.
UDANAM, solemn utterance.
uddneti (cans.), to breathe forth.
ud-eti, to come up.
UDDHA1VT, upwards.
ud-dharati f to draw out ; to lift up.
UPA (adv. and prep ), near to ;
below, less.
upa-cdro , approach ; gamupacdro ,
the approach to a village.
upa-jivatiy to subsist by.
upajjhdpeti , to command.
UPAJJHO, preceptor.
upa-tthanam , attendance.
upa-tthito (p.p.p.)> ready, present.
upaddho , half, partial.
upa-dissati, to be seen, discovered.
UPADHI (t. t.), a substratum of
being.
upandmeti (caus.), to offer.
UPA-NAHl (adj.), bearing hatred.
upa-ni-pajjati, to lie down.
upanissdya, near, close to.
upa-nisso , residing in.
upa-pajjati, to come to, to attain.
upamo , highest.
uparimo (adj.), uppermost.
upa-vadati, to blame.
upa-san-kamatiy to go to, to ap-
proach.
upa-samoy quietude, calm.
UPASAMPADA (f.) (t. t.), the upa-
sampada ordination.
upasampaddpekhoy wishing for ordi-
nation.
UPAdANAIVI (t. t.), clinging to
existence, attachment ; okhandhd ,
element of being.
upd-diyatiy to take hold ; anukam -
pam upaddyay taking pity.
updydsoy despair.
UPAYO, means of success.
UPASAKO, fem. UPASIKA (t. t.),
a lay devotee.
UPEKHA (f.), indifference, equa-
nimity.
upekkhako, resigned, patient.
up-etiy to go, to approach; panu-
petoy living, possessed of breath*
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
159
UPOSATHIKAjfr (t. t.), food
offered on full- moon days.
UPOSATHO (t. t.), the Buddhist
Sabbath-day.
up-pajjati, to arise.
uppannOy p. p. p. to uppajatx .
UBBHARO = UDDHARO (t. t.),
rooting up.
ul-lapati, to lay claim to, to assert.
ul-lumpati, to lift up.
ul-loketiy to look up.
U8~sah0y exertion.
E.
ekaggo (adj.), calm, tranquil.
eka-cco (adj.), one, a certain.
eka-m-antam (adv.), on one side.
EKO (num.), one ; alone.
EKO (adj.), single, solitary.
EKODIBHAVO (t. t), unity, per-
haps ‘ predominance.’
etarahi (adv.), now.
etadisoy such like.
ETI, to go, to enter (with acc.).
EVA and EVAM (adv.), thus.
ESANA (f.), wish, desire.
ESI (adj.), seeking, desiring.
ehi-pamko (adj.), inviting (epithet
of the dhamma).
O.
o-kdsoy room, place.
o-kkanti (f.), descent.
OGHO, flood, torrent
opanayiko , leading to perfection
(epithet of the dhamma).
otthavo (adj.), steady.
ODATO, white, pure.
opako, without result
o-pilapetiy to let float.
o-bhasatiy to shine.
o-bhaso, light.
o-hito (p.p.p.), put down, deposited.
K.
KAMSO, metal, bronze.
KANKHATI, to doubt.
KACCHURO, scab.
KA^HINAM (t. t.), a robe made
for a Buddhist priest in a single
day, out of the rough material.
KATHINO (adj.), hard, solid.
KANDU (f.), itch.
KANNO, ear.
KANHO (adj.), black, sinful.
katapunnatdy meritoriousness.
KATAMO (pron.), what ? which ?
KATHAJd (adv.), how.
KATHA (f.), discourse.
kad-ariyOy a bad man.
KANTO (adj.), loved, agreeable.
KAPPASIKAM, cotton.
KAPPIYO (adj.), fit, right, proper;
kappiyabhumiy a suitable site.
KAPPETI (caus.), to enter upon, to
arrange.
KAPPO, time; rule; ordinance; all,
the whole ; kevalakappo , whole.
KAMPATI, to shake.
KAMBAKAM, woollen garment.
K AM MAM, doing, action.
k ammantd (f.), calling.
kammantOy conduct ; occupation,
work.
k amma-vipdkoy result of actions.
kamyatd (f.), desire.
KARAISTAfld, making.
KARlSAM, excrement.
ed by CjOO^Ic
160
GLOSSARY.
KAHUNA (f.), compassion.
KAROTI, to make (see Grammar);
manasikaroti , to pay attention;
kalankaroti , to die ; anjalim
karoti , to salute respectfully.
KALEBARAJtf, a corpse.
K AS ATI, to plough.
ham, ploughing.
kassako , a ploughman.
KAMO, wish, desire ; lust, passion.
KAYO, body.
kdyiko (adj.), bodily, physical.
KARl (adj.), doing, acting.
KARO, making, constituent part.
kdlakiriyd (f.), death.
KALO, time ; kalena , in due time ;
bhattakalo , meal-time.
kalam mannati, he deems it right.
KASO, a cough.
Kllft (adv.), why, pray? what.
kimsu , what.
kinci(d) 9 anything, whatsoever.
KlftCIKKHAM, a trifle.
KITTAYATI, kitteti , to proclaim.
KITTI (f.), fame.
KIPILLIKO, an ant. [tion.
KILAMATHO, fatigue, mortifica-
KILASO, scab, dry leprosy.
KlRAJVf, meat.
KlVA (adv.), how?
KUKUCCAIVI, misconduct.
KUKUTTHAKO, Phasianus gal-
lus, a bird.
KUCCHI (f.), belly.
KUNJARO, elephant.
KUTTHA*, leprosy.
KUNTHO, an ant.
KUMARO, boy.
kumdrx (f.), a girl.
KULAfld, flock, herd; family.
kulaputto, son of noble family ;
high caste.
KULlRAKO, a crab.
KUSALO (adj.) (t. t.), skilful.
KCLAM, rag. [complished*
KEVALl (m.)(t.t.), one who is ac-
KEVALO (adj.), whole, entire.
KESO, hair.
KO (inter, pron.), who ? which ?
what ? (see Grammar).
kociy whosoever.
KOftcA, heron.
KODHO, anger.
kovido , knowing, acquainted with.
KOPlNAM, pudenda.
KOSEYYAfi, silken stuff.
KH.
KHANO, moment (brief measure
of time).
khandiccam , state of being broken.
KHATTIYO, warrior.
KHANTl (f.), patience.
KHANDO, the shoulders ; 1. 1. ele-
ment of being.
KH AM ATI, to endure ; to forgive ;
to he approved.
KHAYO, extinction, vanishing.
KHARO, solid; harsh.
KHASA (f.), scab.
KHIPATI, to throw.
KHlYATI, to decrease, to waste
away; to murmur; p.p. p. khlno,
KHlLO, a pin, a stake.
KHUDDO (adj.), mean.
KHURO, hoof of a horse or ox.
KHELO, saliva, phlegm.
KHETTASl, land, district.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
161
KHEMAJfr, safety, well-being ;
yogakkhemarh , nibbana.
KHEMO, fem. KHEMl (adj.),
secure.
KHO (inteij.), indeed.
KHOMAA, linen.
G.
GACCHATI, to go (see Grammar).
GANO, multitude.
GANDO, goitre.
GA1JJH ATI, to take, to seize ; p. p. p.
gahito.
GANTHETI, to tie, to bind.
GANDO, smell, odour.
GABBHARO, a cleft.
GABBHO, womb, belly.
GAMBHlRO (adj.), deep.
gammOy accessible.
GARAHA (f.), blame.
GARU (m.), parent, teacber.
garu-karoy respect.
GAHATTHO, a householder.
GATH A, stanza.
gamini (adj.), leading.
GAMO, village.
gdrayho (adj.), blameable; contemp-
tible.
GARAVO, reverence.
gdviy cow.
GIJVfHO, heat.
GIMHANAIVT, hot season.
GIRA, voice, speech.
GIRI, mountain.
GILATI, to devour.
GILANO (adj.), sick, ill.
GlTAM, singing, a song.
GUTTI (f.), guarding.
GUMBO, a bush, a thicket.
GUHA (f.), rock-cave.
GEDHO, greediness.
GO (m. f.), ox, cow (see Grammar).
GOTTAM, family, lineage.
GOP ATI, to protect, to guard ;
p. p. p. gutto , cp. kdyagutto .
i GH.
GHARAIVT, house.
gharamesiy leading the life of a
householder.
GHARO, bouse.
GHANAM, nose.
GHAYATI, to smell.
C.
CA (conj.), and, also.
CAKKHU (n.), eye, insight.
cakkhumd (adj.), having eyes,
having insight.
CANDO (adj.), wrathful, passionate.
catuttho, fourth ; catutthaniy for
the fourth time.
catud-dUaihy the four cardinal
points.
catup-padoy having four feet.
CATTARO (num.), four; cataso
(f.), cattdri (n.).
CARANAJd, good conduct.
CARATI, to go.
CAVATI, to disappear; p. p. p.
cuto .
CAVAN AM, disappearance, death.
CAGO, liberality, self-sacrifice ;
abandoning.
CICCITAYATI, to splash.
CITTAIVT, mind.
cittako (adj.), mindful.
CINTETI, to think.
11
ed by CjOO^Ic
162
GL088ARY.
ClVARA*, robe.
CUTI, disappearing, death.
cetasiko (adj.), mental.
CETO, mind.
ceto-vimutti , emancipation of mind.
CORO, a thief.
CH.
CHA (num.), six.
CHATTHO, sixth.
CHApDETI, to throw away, to
renounce.
CHANDO, wish, resolve, intention.
CHAMBHATI, to be alarmed.
CHAMBHITATTAM, trembling.
CHAYA (f.), shadow.
CHINDATI, to cut off.
J.
janapado , a country.
janeti (caus. jayati ), to bring forth,
to produce.
JANETTl, a mother.
JANO, man, person, being.
JAR A (f.), old age, decay.
JARO, fever.
JALATI, to burn.
JAHATI, to leave behind.
JATARCPAM, gold.
JATI (f.), birth.
JATU (adv.), verily.
jato (p. p. p.), lomahatthajato , the
hair standing on end terrified.
JAN ATI, to know. [duced.
JAYATI, to be born, to be pro-
JALA (f.), flame.
JIGUCCHATI, to dislike.
JIGHACCHA (f.), hunger.
jinnako (adj.), old.
JIVHA (f.), tongue.
JlRANAlfr, growing old ; decay.
JlRATI, to grow old.
JlVrKA (f.), livelihood, life.
JlVlTAJd, life.
jIVl (adj.), living.
JUTI (f.), splendour; jutimd , pos-
sessed with splendour.
JO, at last part of a compound
* arising from/
JH.
JHANAM (t. t.), meditation.
ft
SAIT! (f.), announcement, declara-
tion, formula.
SANAM, knowledge.
NATAKO, a relative.
fJATI, kinsman.
ftAYO, right method.
P.
DAMSO, a gad-fly.
PA8ATI, to bite ; p. p. p. dattho .
pAHO, burning.
TH.
THANl (adj.), having breasts ;
timbarutthani , having breasts
like a tinduka fruit.
THANAlil, standing.
thanaso (adv.), causally, necessarily.
THITI (f.)> durability ; life.
T.
TAGGHA (adv.), verily.
TACO, skin.
TANDULO, rice ready for boiling.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
m
TANHA (f.), lust, desire; maha -
tanho , having great desire.
tatiyo , third ; tatiyam , for the
third time.
TATRA (adv.), there.
TAPASSl (m.), hermit.
TAPO, penance.
TAMO, darkness. [tini.
TAYO (num.), three; f. iisso, n.
TAR AT I, to cross, to overcome. .
TALAM, surface, level.
TASO (adj.), moving, moveable.
TALO, fan-palm. [mar).
TITTHAT1, to stand (see Gram-
TINAM, grass.
TIDDANAJVf, destroyer.
TIMBARU (m.), the tinduka-tree.
tiracchdnagato , a beast, an animal.
TIRI YAM (adv.), across.
TU (particle), now, but.
TUNDlKIRO, cotton-tree.
TUNHl (adv.), silently.
TUVATAAf (adv.), quickly.
TEJO (n.), splendour.
TELAM, rape-oil.
TV AM (pron.), you, thou (see
Grammar).
TH.
THADDHO (adj.), firm, stubborn,
proud ; jati-tthaddho, proud of his
birth.
THANAYATI, to thunder.
THAVARO (adj.), stationary, firm.
THERO, a priest, an elder.
THCLO (adj.), big.
D.
DAKKHATA (f.), skill.
DAKKHINO (adj.), right-handed;
southern.
DAKKHINEYYO (adj.), worthy of
offerings.
DALHO (adj.), firm.
DANpO, a staff.
DAD ATI, to give (see Grammar,
p. 56).
DADDALLATI, to blaze, to shine
brilliantly.
DADDU (f.), leprosy.
DANTO, a tooth.
DAMO, self-command.
dam mo (adj.), to be tamed.
DAYA (f.), mercy, pity.
DARI (f.), a cave.
DA VO, amusement.
DASA (num.), ten.
DASSANAM, insight, discernment.
DANAM, alms.
DANI (adv.), now.
DAYADO, kinsman.
DAYO, a forest.
DARO, DARA, wife.
DASO, slave.
di-jo , twice born.
ditthapado , one who has seen the
state ( i.e . Nibbana).
DIXTHA (inteijection).
DITTHI (f.), view, belief.
DIBBO (adj.), celestial.
DIVASO, a day.
divasd (adv.), during the day.
diva ca ratto , day and night.
DJSA (f.), a point of the compass.
dmati (pass, of passati ), to be seen.
DlGHO (adj.), long.
DUKKHAJVI (t.t.), pain.
DUG-GATI, hell, bad place.
ed by CjOO^Ic
164
GLOSSARY.
dutiyo , second ; dutiyam (adv.), for
the second time.
duvijano , difficult to understand.
DUSSAM, cloth.
DOBHATI, to illtreat
durato (adv.), from far.
DCRE (adv.), far.
deva-koy god.
devatdy a deva.
devaputto , a god.
DEVO, a god.
DESAYATI, desetiy to preach.
DESO, country.
DESSl, hater.
DEHO, body.
domanaMaihy dejection, gloom.
DOSO (Skr. dvesha ), anger, hatred.
DOSO (Skr. dosha), defect, blemish.
DVAYO, of two sorts, divers.
dvi-padakoy having two feet.
DVE (num.), two.
doedha (adv.), in two parts.
DH.
DHAJAGGAAf, flag.
DHANAAf, property, wealth.
DHAMMO (t. t.), law, condition ;
ditthadhammo , the visible condi-
tion, the present world.
uttarimanussa-dhammo, superhu-
man condition.
dhamma-vicayoy religious research.
DHAMMO (adj.), religious ; fem.
dhammu
DHATU (n. and f.), substance ;
principle.
DHARANAlfr, bearing in mind.
dhdrayati (caus.), to bear in mind.
DHITI (f.), wisdom, energy.
DHlRO (adj.), w ise.
DHUTTO, fraudulent.
DHUNATI, to shake.
dhuravdy taking the yoke.
DHURO, a yoke.
DHORAYHO, beast of burden.
N.
NA (neg.), not.
NAKHO, nail of the finger.
NAG A RAM, a town.
NANGALAM, plough.
NACCAM, dancing.
NANDI (f.), joy.
NAMATI, to bow down.
NAM ASS ATI, to honour.
NAMO (indecl.), honour, reverence
(with the dative).
NARASABHO, chief of men.
NARO, man.
NALINl (f.), a pond.
NAVA (num.), nine.
NAVANlTAM, cream.
navamOy ninth.
NAVO (adj.), new.
NAHATAKO (t. t.), one in whom
spiritual instruction is complete ;
who is cleansed, pure.
NAHARU, tendon, muscle.
NAGO, a serpent ; 8U8unago t a
young serpent.
NALIKERO, coconut-tree.
NANATTAM, diversity.
NANA (adv.), various, different ;
away from.
ndna-ppakaroy of various sorts.
NAMA (adv.), by name ; indeed.
NAMAm, name ; namarupam (t. t.).
ndmaso (adv.), with name.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
165
NJKAYO, assembly, multitude ;
sattanikayo , assemblage of beings.
NI (prep., ouly in composition),
downwards.
NI and NIR (prep., only in com-
position), outward.
ni-kubbati , to deceive.
nik-kamt (adj.), free from desire.
nik-kujyito, what has been over-
thrown.
nik-khamati , to go out.
nik-khamati, to devote.
h i-kkhepo, putting down ; inter-
ment.
NIGAMO, a town.
ni-gdhako , an oppressor, enemy.
NIGRODHO, banyan-tree.
NICCO (adj.), perpetual.
ni-jigimsati, to covet.
ni-pako (adj.), prudent.
ni-patati, to fall down.
NIBBATI (t.t.), to be extinguished,
to go out.
NIBBANAM (t. t.), the summum
bonum of the Buddhists.
NIBBUTI, tranquillity ( Nibbana ).
nibbuto (t. t.), free from care, or
having attained Nibbana.
nibhdst (adj.), shining.
NJM ANTANAM (t. t.), invitation.
NIMITTAM, sign, mark; subject
of thought.
niyydniko , leading to salvation.
NIYO (adj.), own.
NIRAYO, bell.
ni-rujjhati (pass.), to cease, to perish.
NIRODHO (t.t.), cessation.
NIVATO, humility. [off.
ni-vdreti (caus.), to keep off, to ward
ni-vdsi (adj.), dwelling.
ni-vdseti 9 to dress.
ni-vesanath, house, abode.
ni-vuto , obstructed.
ni-8dmeti f to attend, listen to.
nisidati , to sit down.
NI8SAYO (t. t.), resource ; cattdro
nmayd .
nissaranam , outcome, result.
nti-sdya (ger.), dependent upon.
nihino (adj.), low, vile.
NlCO (adj.), low, mean, base.
ni-yati, to go out.
NONA (adv.), surely.
nekkhammam , giving up the world.
ne-katikoy fallacious.
NETTAM, eye.
P.
PA (prep.), frequently in composi-
tion, before, onward.
PAMSU (n.), dust, dirt.
pa-kdsati, to be visible, to manifest.
PAKKHANDIEA (f.), diarrhcea.
PAKKHI (adj.), possessed with
wings.
PAKKHIKAM (t. t.), a feast held
on the eighth day of the month.
pa-kkhipati, to throw.
pa-gumbo, thicket.
pu-gganhati, to hold out, to bri ug
forth, to get ready.
PACATI, to cook.
pa-cdro t attendant.
pacca-kdlo , present time.
PACCATTAM (adv.), singly.
paccamko (adj.), adverse, hostile,
opposite.
PACCAYO, a requisite.
ed by CjOO^Ic
166
GLOSSARY.
pacca-vekkhati , to look at.
pacc-ud-a-vattatiy to retreat.
paccekoj each one, single, several.
PACCHIMO (adj.), hindermost,
last ; pacchima disci, the west.
pa-jahati , to abandon.
PAJA (f.), progeny, race.
pa-jjalati , to burn, to blaze.
pa-janati, to know, to understand ;
caus. pahnapeti , to make known ;
p. p. p. pahhatto.
pajayati , to multiply.
pajjalati , to shine.
pajjoto, light, lustre, lamp; tela -
pajjoto , an oil-lamp.
PANCA (num.), five.
pahcamo , the fifth.
PANNA, wisdom, intellect, under-
standing.
PANHAM {panham), question.
PATI and PATI, towards, back,
in return; in composition before
vowels, pace .
pati-kkamati, to step backwards.
pati-kkamo, retreating.
pati-ggahanarh , acceptance, receiv-
ing (to ganhati).
pati-ghato , repulsion, warding off.
PATI-GHO, anger.
pati-cchddanam , concealment.
pati-cchadi, covering.
pati-cchadeti , to conceal.
pati-janati , to know, to personate;
aor. paccahnasi .
pati-nis-sago (t. t.), forsaking.
patipada (f.), step, way.
pati-pujeti, to honour.
pati-ppa-88ambhatiy to be calmed, to
subside, to come to an end.
pati-bujjhati, to awake.
pati-bhdtiy to appear, to be evident.
pati-rupo (adj.), suitable, fit.
pati-labhati, to obtain, to receive.
pati-labho, obtaining ; attainment.
pati-vatteti, to subvert ; with a, not
to be subverted.
pati-vijjhatiy to acquire.
patisankhatiy to reflect.
patisan cikkh a ti, to consider.
patisam-oedi (adj.), experiencing.
patisaranoy refuge, help.
patisundtiy to assent ; aor. pace-
o88osi , paccas 808 um .
patisevati, to practise, to receive.
PATHAVl (f.), earth.
pa-namatiy to bend. ^ '
pa-ni-dahatiy to stretch.
PANIDHI (m.), aspiration (t. t.).
panito (adj.), accomplished, excel-
lent ; as neuter, a term for
nibbana .
PANDITO, wise man.
PANDU (adj.), yellow.
PANHO and PANHO, question.
PATATI, to fall ; caus. patdyatu
pati-rupo , suitable.
pati-sallanam , solitude.
pati8alldndrdmOy delighting in soli-
tude.
PA-TITTHA (f.), fixity, resting-
place.
PATTAM, a leaf.
pattakallam , seasonableness, time-
liness.
pattacivaraihy bowl and robe.
PATTI (f.), obtaining, acquisition.
PATTO, bowl.
pat to , p. p. p. of pdpundti .
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
16?
PATTHAYATI, to wish for, to
desire.
PA DAM, step; nibbana.
pa-dahatiy to strive, to exert.
PA-DlPO, lamp.
pa-duttho , wicked, evil.
PAN A (adv.), now, further (the
same as puna).
pa-nudati, to remove, to reject.
PANT HO, a road ; also neuter.
PAPPOTI, see pdpupdti.
PAPPHASAM, lungs.
pa-bba-jati, to go forth.
PA-BBAJITO (t. t.), one who has
given up the world.
PABBAJJA (f.), monastic life.
PABBAJJA (f.) (t.t.), the pabbajja
ordination.
PABBATO, mountain.
pabhamkaroy light-giving.
PABHASO, splendour.
pa-majjati, to delay. [fill.
pamattOy p. p. p. to pamajjatiy sloth-
pa-maddi (adj.), crushing, destroy-
ing.
PA-MAN AM, measure.
PAM ADO, carelessness.
pa-muncati, to release.
pa-mussatiy to leave behind.
PAMOCANAM, deliverance.
payirupasatiy to honour.
pa-yuttoy tied.
PARAM (adv.), beyond, after.
paramoy highest.
parabhava, suffering, loss.
PARABHAVO, decay, loss.
PARI (prep.), around, about, fre-
quently used in composition, where
it appears also as PALI.
PARIKKHARO, apparatus.
pari-kkhmoy wasted.
pari-cito (p. p. p.), accumulated.
PARINAMO, change, alteration ;
digestion.
PARITTA (f. and n.), protection.
PARIDEVO, lamentation.
pari-nibbati (t. t.), to attain Nibbana.
pari-pakoy maturity, perfection.
pari-punnoy completed.
pari-bhcutati, to revile.
pari-mukham (adv.), in front, before.
pariy-adati, to seize, lay hold of.
pariy-apunatiy to learn thoroughly ;
p. p. p. pariyaputo.
pari-yayoy succession, order, way.
pari-yo8dnariiy termination.
pari-rundhati, to surround ; to lay
siege.
pari -vat toy circle, succession ; modi-
fication.
pari-vannetiy to describe, to praise.
pari-oareti (caus.), to surround, to
accompany.
PARI-VESANA (f. and n.), distri-
bution of food.
PARISA, assembly.
parisujjhati (pass.), to be purified.
parisuddho (adj.), pure, clear.
PARISSAYAM, danger.
PARIHARO, attention.
paretoy dead, destroyed.
PARO (adj.), distant, further ;
other.
PARO (adv.), beyond, more than.
PALASO, a leaf.
palighoy an obstacle.
PA- VAC AN AM, the word of the
Buddha.
ed by CjOO^Ic
168
GL088ART.
pa-vatteti (cans.), to set rolling- 5
pavattite dhammacakke , having
founded the kingdom of truth.
PA VAN Alii, side of a mountain.
pa-vapatiy to sow.
pa-vassati, to rain.
pa-visati , to enter.
palayatiy to run away.
pali-gunthatiy to envelop, to en-
tangle.
PALLANKO, a couch.
pasattho (p. p. p.), praised. [fied.
pasanno, p. p. p. to pasidatiy satis-
pasahatiy to use force.
pasadoy brightness, clearness, glad-
ness.
pa-8a8atiy to rule.
PASU, cattle.
PASSATI, to see.
passaddhi (f.), calming down.
pa-88ambhatiy to calm down ; p. p. p.
pas8uddho.
passambhayathy calming down.
pa-88a8atiy to exhale air.
PASSAVO, urine.
PAHANAM, abandoning.
pa-hitattOy resolute.
pahutoy much, abundant.
pa-hotiy to be able.
pa-honako (adj.), sufficient.
pdkimo (adj.), cooked, dressed,
ripened.
PACANA$f, a goad.
PANAlVf, living being.
pdndtipdti (adj.), taking life.
PANO, breath.
PANAKO, worm, insect.
PANI (m.), hand.
pdtikankhoy to be expected.
PATIPADIK A* (t. t.), food offered
on the day following full- moon
day.
PATANAM, causing to fall.
gabbhapdtanathy causing miscar-
riage ; abortion.
PATl (f.), a bowl.
PATU (adv.), manifestly.
patu-bhavatiy to become visible 5
aor. patur-ahosi .
patu-bhavOy appearance.
pdda-talaihy sole of the foot.
PA DO, a small silver coin.
pddarahoy worth a pdda .
PADO, foot.
PANAM, drinking.
papako (adj.), bad.
papicchoy having sinful desires.
PAPUNATI, PAPCNOTl, PAPP-
OTI, to attain ; pattabbo, attain*
able.
PAPO (adj.), evil, bad.
PAYASO, rice-milk.
PARAM, the other shore.
param Gangaya, across the Ganges.
parisajjo (adj.), belonging to an
assembly ; brahmaparisajjoy be-
longing to the retinue of Malia-
brahma.
pdri-suddhiy purity, perfection.
PALAYATI, to guard, to preserve.
paliccaihy hoariness, greyness of
bair. [season.
pa-vu88akoy belonging to the rainy
PASANO, a stone.
PASADO, house of more than one
storey, tower, palace.
pdhuneyyo (adj.), worthy of being
guests.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
169
pitthi-mamsiko (adj.), backbiting.
pilakd (f.), a boil.
PINDAPATO (t. t.), food received,
in the alms bowl.
PINDI (f.), lump, mass.
PINDO, lump, ball ; food ; alms.
PITA (m.), father (see Grammar).
PITTA*, bile.
PI-NASO, cold in the bead.
PIPASA, thirst.
PIPPHALl (f.), long pepper.
PIYO (adj.), dear.
PISUNO (adj.), backbiting.
PIHAKAM, spleen.
PlTI, joy, delight.
PUGGALO, individual.
PUCCHATI, to ask, to question.
PUNNO (adj.), good, virtuous.
PUTTO, son. [wide.
PUTHU (adv.), separately, far and
PUNA, see PANA.
punab-bhavo , rebirth.
PUPPHAM, flower.
pubbanho , forenoon.
PUBBO (adj.), former, early.
PUBBO, pus, matter.
PURAM, town.
pura-kkharoti , to put in front.
purato (adv.), in front of.
puratthimo (adj.), eastern.
PURA (adv.), formerly, previously.
PURANOj former.
PURIMO, east.
PURISAKO, minister, attendant.
PURISO, man, a male.
pujako , honouring.
PCJA, attention, veneration.
POJETI, to honour.
POTI, stinking, foul.
PCRO, full.
PEKHA (f.), desire ; punnapekho ,
looking for good works.
pecca (ger.), having departed.
peseti (caus.), to send.
POKKHARASAKATO, a bird.
POTAKO, youth, cub.
potika (f.), maiden.
pothujfaniko, belonging to an un-
converted person ; sensual.
ponobbhaviko , connected with re-
birth.
PORANO and PORANAKO, old.
POSO, man.
PLAVATI, or piluvati , to float;
caus. pilapeti.
PH.
PHARATI, to flash, to shine forth.
PHARUSO, harsh, unkind.
PHALAM, fruit.
PHALATI, to split asunder, to
break open.
PHANITAM, sugar.
phdleti (caus.), to split, to cleave.
PHALO, ploughshare.
PHASU (adj.), comfortable.
pham-viharo, comfort, ease.
PHUTO, thrilled, pervaded.
PHUSATI, to touch, to reach ;
p. p. p. phuttho.
PHUSSITO (adj.), flowering, blos-
soming.
PHOTTABBA* (t. t.), touch.
B.
BANDHATI, to bind.
BANDHANAM, binding ; bonds,
fetter.
ed by CjOO^Ic
170
GLOSSARY.
BANDHU (m.), kinsman.
BALI (m.), religious offering.
BALIVADDO, an ox.
BAHCJ (adj.), many.
bahu-ppado , having many feet.
BALHO (adj.), hard, severe, as first
part of a compound * very/
BALO (adj.), young, foolish.
BAHIRO (adj.), external.
BlJAM, germ, seed.
BUDDHO, an epithet of Gotama,
and used as a designation of
Gotama ‘ the Enlightened.’
BOJJHANGO (t. t.), constituents
of wisdom.
BODHI (f.), wisdom.
BRAVlTI, BROTI, to say, to tell.
BRAHMAM, practice of devotion.
BRAHMACARIYAM (t. t., also
fern.), a religious life ; the duties
of a religious life.
BRAHMANO, a brahmin.
by-anti-karoti , to abolish, to re-
move.
BYASANAM, misfortune, unhap-
piness.
bya-karoti , to answer.
BYADHI (m.), illness.
BYAPADO, wish to injure.
BYAROSANA (f.), anger.
BH.
BHAKKHO (adj.), eating.
BHAGANDALA (f.), fistula.
BH AGAVA (adj.), worshipful,
venerable ; an epithet of the
Buddha.
BHAGINl (f.), sister.
BHANGAM, hempen cloth.
BHAJATI, to serve, to honour; to
cultivate.
BHANATI, to shine.
BHA1VATI, to speak; pass, bha-
nnati .
BHATTAM, food; uddeta (t.t.),
food given on special occasions ;
talaka° (t. t.), ticket food.
BHADANTO, term for addressing
a Buddhist monk.
BHADDO, BHADRO (adj.), good.
BHAYA*, fear.
BHARATI, to bear, to support.
BH A VAST, lord, sir (see Grammar).
BHAVATI, to be, to exist.
BHAVANAM, being, existence ;
realm.
BHAVO, corporeal existence, birth.
BHAGO, portion, part, share.
BH AT A RO, brother.
BHATA (m.), brother.
BHARO, burden.
bhaveti (caus. to bhavati ), to in-
crease, to cause to exist.
BHAVO, property.
BHASATI, to tell.
BHIKKHU, title of a Buddhist
monk.
BHIKKUNf (f.), female mendicant.
BHISMO (adj.), terrible.
BHlYO, BHIYYO (adj.), more.
BHlRU (adj.), timid.
BHUJISSO, a free man; a freed
slave.
BHUNJATI, to enjoy ; to eat.
bhummo (adj.), terrestrial.
BHUSAM (adv.), much, exceed-
ingly.
bhutakalo , time to speak the truth.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
171
bhutapubbo (adj.), tbat has been
before.
BHCTO, spirit, being.
BHCMI (f.), the earth.
BHEDO, parting.
BHERAVO (adj.), frightful.
BHESAJJAM, medicine.
BHO, sir, master (see Grammar).
BHOGO, wealth ; appa-bhogo ,
having little property.
BHOJANAM, food.
M.
MAMSAM, flesh.
MAKASO, a gnat, mosquito.
MAKKH1 (adj.), concealing; pa -
pamakkhi , hypocritical.
MAGGO, path.
MANKU, troubled, restless.
MANGALO (adj.), happy.
MACCU (m.), death.
MAJJAM, strong drink.
majjhimo (adj.), middle.
MAJJHO, middle.
MANfiATI, to think.
MANDANAM, adornment.
MANDALl (adj.), having a disc.
MATTA (f.), measure ; quality.
MATTHAKAM, head.
MATTHALUNGAlPl, brain.
MADO, enjoyment.
MADHU (n.), honey.
madhumeho , diabetes.
MANAPO, pleasing, pleasant,
charming.
MANUSSO, man, human being.
MANO, mind (also neuter).
manor amo (adj.), pleasant, delight-
ful.
MANTETI, to consult, to advise.
MANTO, hymn ; the Vedas.
MANDIYO, slowness, stupidity.
mamayito , concerning oneself ; own.
MAYURO, MORO, peacock.
MARANAJif, dying, death.
mahab-balo , having great strength.
MAHA, great (see Grammar).
maha-matto , king’s minister, great
noble.
maha-raja, king, great king.
MA, negation.
MALUTO, wind.
MANAVAKO (adj.), young ; a
young man.
MATA (f.), mother (see Grammar).
MANASO, lust.
MANUSO, MANUS! (f.) (adj.),
human.
MANO, pride, arrogance.
MAYA (f.), illusion, deceit; mayavi,
deceitful.
MARISO, venerable person; term
of address.
MALA (f.), a garland.
MASO, month.
MIGO, antelope, deer.
MICCHA (adv.), falsely, wrongly.
miccha-caro, wrong conduct.
MITTO, friend.
MIDDHAM, sleep; vigatamiddho,
awake.
MINATI, to measure ; p. f. p.
metabbo .
MUKHAM, mouth, face; means,
cause.
MUKHO, face.
MUCCHA (f.), faintness.
MUNCATI, to release.
ed by CjOO^Ic
172
GLOSSARY.
MUN1JAKO, shaveling, term of
reproach.
MUTT AM, arine ; putimuttam ,
urine of cattle.
MUTTI (f.), release.
MUDU (adj.), soft.
MUDDHA (m.), head.
MUDHA (adv.), gratis, for nothing.
MUSA (adv.), wrongly.
musa-vado, lying, falsehood.
MUHUTTO, second, brief measure
of time.
MOLHO, stupid.
MULAM, root.
M0SIKO, a fly.
MEGHO, cloud, storm, rain.
METHUNO (adj.), relating to
sexual intercourse.
ME DO, fat, blubber.
MERAYAJVI, intoxicating liquor.
MOD ATI, to rejoice.
MORO, see MAYURO.
MO HO, ignorance.
Y.
YAKANAM, the liver.
YAKKHO, a superhuman being, a
yaksha.
YATI, to restrain ; p. p. p. yato.
YATO (adv.), since.
YATTHA (adv.), the same as
‘ yatra ,* inasmuch.
YATHA (adv.), as.
yathabhutam (adv.), according to
the reality.
YADA (adv.), when, whenever.
YASO, fame, renown.
yasassivd , surrounded by eminent
men.
yasam (adj.), famous.
YACATI, to ask, to beg, to entreat.
YATI, to go.
YATRA (f.), livelihood.
YANAM, going, preceding; car-
riage, car.
yani-kato , used as a vehicle.
YAPANAM, maintenance.
YAPANATI, to live.
YAVA (adv.), as long; yarn ki-
vancdy and as long as; in con-
junction with eva , ydvad eva , so
long as.
YUGAM, pair ; generation.
YUGO (also neuter), yoke. [to.
YUNJATI, to turn one’s attention
YEBHUYYO (adj.), abundant;
yebhuyyena , in great numbers.
YO (pron.), who (see Grammar).
YOGAKKHEMO, security ; t. t. ‘
Nibbana.
YOTTAM, tie.
YONI (f.), womb; source, origin.
YONISO, really.
YOBBANAM, youth.
R.
RAKKHATI, to protect.
RAKKHA (f.), protection.
RAJATAM, silver.
RAJJAM, kingdom.
RATTI (f.), night.
ratti-n-divo , day aud night.
RABHASO (adj.), contemptuous,
fierce.
RAM ATI, to enjoy oneself, to de-
light in ; ratoy delighting.
RASO, sap, juice ; sweet thing ;
taste.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
173
rassako (adj.), short.
RASSO (adj.), short.
RAH ADO, a deep pool, a lake.
RAHO, solitude.
RAGO, evil desire, greed, attach-
ment, lust.
rajadhani , royal city.
rajabhato , king’s soldier.
RAJA (m.), king, see Grammar.
RAMO, joy, delight.
RITTO [ruhta] , injured.
RUDDO (adj.), cruel.
RUKKHO, a tree.
RCPAM (t. t.), form, figure.
ROGO, illness.
ROCETI (caus.), to approve.
ROSAKO (adj.), wrathful.
L.
LABHATI, to take ; p. p. p.
laddho.
LAYO, instant (brief measure of
time).
. LASIKA (f.), the fluid which lubri-
cates the joints.
LABHA (adv. dat.), for the ad-
vantage of.
LUDDO (adj.), cruel.
LOKO, world.
loka-jettho , chief of the world.
LOKA-DHAMMO (t. t.), things of
the world, worldly condition.
loka-dhatu , world-system.
loka-vidu , knowing the world (epi-
thet of the Buddha).
LOMAlVf, hair of the body.
LOMAHASfSO, horripilation.
LOHITAM, blood.
LOHITO (adj.), red.
V.
VAKKAM, kidney.
vaggiyo (adj.), belonging to a group.
VAGGU (adj.), beautiful.
VACCO, lustre.
VAJATI, to walk.
VAJIRO, Indra’s thunderbolt.
VAffCANIKO, deceitful.
VANCETI (caus.), to deceive.
VADDHATI, to grow, to increase;
to pour out.
VANNO, appearance, beauty, form ;
caste ; vannava (adj.), having
beauty.
VATA (interj.), indeed! verily!
VATTATI, to take place.
VATTHAM, cloth ; raiment.
YATTHU (u.), substance.
VATTHU (m.), a site, a building
(Skr. vdstu ).
V AD ATI, to declare ; to speak.
VANAM, wood, forest.
VANATHO, desire, lust.
VANIBBAKO, mendicant.
YANDAKO, praising.
VAN D ATI, to praise.
VAPATI, to sow.
VAPPO, sowing.
varannu, knowing what is excellent.
varado, giving what is excellent.
v araharo, bringing what is excellent.
VARO (adj.), excellent.
VALl (f.), a wrinkle.
valittaro (adj.), wrinkled.
VASATI, to dwell.
vcualako, wretched, outcast.
VASA (f.), serum ; marrow of the
flesh.
ed by CjOO^Ic
174
GLOSSARY.
VASALO, outcast.
VA8SO, rain ; a year.
VA (conj.), va — va , either . . or.
VACA (f.), word, saying, speech.
VATO, wind.
VADITAM, music.
VADO, speaking, speech.
VAYAMATI, to struggle, to strive.
VAYAMO (t. t.), exertion, endea-
vour.
VASO, dwelling, living, abode.
VAH ANAM, carrying ; a vehicle ;
an animal used in riding.
VI (prep.), used in composition,
asunder, apart from.
vi-kdlo, wrong time.
VIGGAHO, body ; mantissa 0 , a
human being. [persing.
vi-kirano (adj.), squandering, dis-
vi-kkandati, to cry out.
vi-gahati, to obtain.
vi-cakkhano , knowing, wise, dis-
cerning.
vi-carati, to wander.
vi-cbro , investigation.
VICI KICCHITAM, doubt.
VICCHIKO, scorpion.
vi-jana-vato (adj.), understanding.
vi-jeti, vi-jinuti, to conquer.
VIJJATI, to know (see Grammar).
VIJJATI, to be, to exist.
VIJJA (f.), knowledge, wisdom.
VIJJU (f.), lightning.
vijjuko (adj.), lightning.
VINfiANAM, consciousness, in-
telligence.
vinnapeti (caus. to vijdndti ), to
speak to, to address, to inform.
Vlft&C (adj.), intelligent.
VI-TAKKO, reflection, thought.
VITACCHIKA (f.), scabies.
VITTAM, property, wealth.
vittharati , to declare, to amplify ;
aor. vitthdsi . [cation.
vitthdro, detail, extension, amplifi-
VIDC (adj.), knowing, wise.
VI-NAYO, training.
VINA (adv.), without.
vi-naseti, to waste.
vxneti , to remove, to put away.
vinodanam, removal, dispelling.
vinodeti (caus.), to dispel.
VINDATI, to acquire.
v i-pdceti, to be indignant.
VI-PARI-NAMO, change, reverse.
vi -ppa-mutto (p. p. p.), released.
vi-ppa-yogo , absence.
vippa-vasati , to go abroad; p.p. p.
vippavuttho .
vippavdso , absence ; tictvarenca
avippavdso , not parting with the
three robes.
vi-ppa-sddati, to become calm.
vi-bJiajati , to divide, to distinguish.
VIBHAVO, power, prosperity.
VI-BHAVO (t. t.), absence of ex-
istence, formless existence.
vibhavayati, to understand.
vibhusanam, adornment.
vi-muhcati, to release ; p. p. p.
vimutto,
VI-MUTTI (f.), release.
VI-MOKHO, release.
VI-MOCAYAlVf, releasing.
vi-rajo, free from corruption, pure ;
free from dust.
vi-rajjati , to be displeased ; p. p. p.
viratto.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
175
VIRATI (f.), abstinence.
vi-ramati , to abstain.
vi-ravati , to cry aloud.
vi-ragOy absence of desire.
virweti (caus.), to put away.
VIRIYAM, exertion, strength.
vi-ruhati, to go on.
vi-rocatiy to be brilliant.
VILEPANAM, toilet perfume.
vi-varatiy to open ; p. p. p. vivato .
VI-VEKO, separation, seclusion ;
discrimination.
viviccati (pass.), to separate oneself.
VISAM, poison.
visamo (adj.), uneven.
vi-suddhoy (adj.), pure.
VISCKAM, show, spectacle.
VISCCIKA (f.), cholera.
VISESO, distinction.
vi-88uto (adj.), renowned.
v iharatiy to dwell.
VI-HARO, living; Buddhist temple.
vi-himsatiy to hurt.
VIHIMSA (f.), hurting.
vita-maloy spotless.
VlTO (adj.), devoid of ; a-tnlo, not
free from.
vitipatatiy to transgress.
vi-ti-sareti, to remind mutually.
YlRO, hero.
VlS ATI (num.), twenty.
VUTTHI (f.), rain.
VUTTI (f.), conduct.
vusitavdy dwelling, residing.
vuri-ma (adj.), dwelling.
vupakattho, distant, removed.
VCPASAMO, pacification.
VE (inteij.), indeed.
VENU (m.), a bamboo, a reed.
VEDAGC (t. t.), knowing the law.
VEDANA (f.) (t. t.), perception,
sensation.
VEPULLA&, development.
veyya-karanathy explanation.
VEYYABADHIKO, sick, ill; to
byabddho. [ahl.).
VERAMA^I (f.), abstinence (with
VEROCANAKO, bright.
VELA (f.), time, occasion.
VELO, time.
VEVANNIYAM, change, diversity.
VESl (f.), harlot.
VEHASO, sky.
VOROPETI (caus.), to deprive of.
S.
SA, as first member of a compound
4 with.*
SAMYOJANAM (t.t.), bond, at-
tachment.
samhantiy to strike.
SAKO (adj.), own.
SAKKACCA (adv.), attentively.
SAK-KAYA-DITTHI (t.t.), con-
ceit.
SAK-KAYO, own body or person.
SAK-KARO, hospitality.
8ak-karotiy to receive hospitality, to
honour.
SAKKO (adj.), able.
SAKKHl, witness.
SAKHA (m.), companion, friend
(see Grammar).
SAGGO, heaven.
SANKAPPO (t.t.), thought, imagi-
nation, aspiration.
san-kampati, to quake, to tremble.
san-kuddho, angry.
ed by CjOCK^Ic
176
GLOSSARY.
SAN-KHARO (t. t.), the elements,
matter.
san-khipati , to shorten, to abridge.
san-khittena , concisely, briefly.
SAN-GAHO, protecting.
SAN-GAMO, conflict, battle.
SAN-GHATl (t. t.), one of the three
robes of a priest.
SANG HO, the Buddhist clerical
community.
SACE (conj.), if.
SACCAlJf, truth.
sacchikaroti , to see face to face ;
p. p. p. sacchikato .
SACCHIKIRIYA (f.), realization.
sancicca (adv. ger.), intentionally.
SANJATI (f.), birth.
sannamo , refraining.
SANNA (t. t.) (f.), perception.
SATHO (adj.), wicked, crafty.
SATTHI (num.), sixty.
SANHO (adj.), soft ; smooth, gentle.
SATAM (num.), a hundred.
SATI (f.), thoughtfulness, remem-
brance.
satima (adj.) of retentive memory ;
thoughtful, reflecting.
8 ato , p. p. p. sarati, recollecting,
mindful.
SATTA (num.), seven.
S ATT ATI, seventy.
8 attava 8 o , abode of beings.
SATTO, being.
SATTHAM, weapon.
SATTHA (m.), teacher.
sad-attho, one’s own advantage.
SADA (adv.), always.
SAD-DAHATI, to believe ; p. p.
saddahano .
SADDO, sound.
SADDHA, faith.
SADDHIM (adv.), with.
SANTA M (a term for Nibbana).
san-tatto , scorched.
san-tarati , to be in haste.
SANTIKE (adv.), in the presence of.
SANTUTTHl (f.), contentment.
SANTUSSAKO, contented.
SANTO, true, good.
8 an-da 88 eti (caus.), to show, to teach.
san-ditthiko (adj.), visible.
8 an-dhupayati, to smoke.
san-nayhati , to bind, to fasten.
8 an-ni-patati , to assemble.
sannipatiko (adj.), gathered together.
SAP AD AN AM (adv.), constantly ;
8 ap° pin day a carati , goes his
begging-rounds constantly.
SAPPI, cow’s butter.
sap-puri80y good man.
sabbattha (adv.), everywhere.
8 abbatth,Oy in every respect.
8 abba-dhi, from all sides.
SABBO (pron. adj.), every one, all
(see Grammar).
SABHA (f.), an assembly.
samanako , wretched samana .
SAMAtyO, an ascetic.
SAMATTO (adj.), complete.
SAMATHO, tranquillity.
SAMANTO, all, entire; samanta ,
from every side.
8 amanndgato , endowed with.
SAMAYO, time, assembly, agree-
ment ; ekam samayam , once upon
a time.
8 ama-vekkhati , to take into con-
sideration.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
177
sam-d-gacchati , to assemble.
sam-a-caratiy to follow.
st am-a-dapeti (caus. samadiyati ), to
instigate, to advise.
sam-a-dahati , to put together ; pass.
samadhiyati , to become tran-
quilized. |
SAMADH I (f.) (t. t.), meditation.
SAMANO (adj.), equal, same, j
similar. [ment.
SAM-A-PATTI (f.) (t.t.), attain-
sam-a-hito , steadfast.
sam-ikkhati , to consider, to reflect.
SAM-ITI (f.), assembly.
sam-uk-kamsati , to exalt.
sam-ug-ghato , removal.
sam-ut-thanam , rising, originating.
sam-ut-tejeti (cans.), to stir, to excite.
SAM-UD-AYO, rise, origin.
8am ud-etiy to arise ; samudito , ele-
vated.
SAMUDDO, sea.
sam-upabbulho (p. p. p.), set up.
sam-uhantiy to remove.
SAMO, equal. '
8am-pa-kampatiy to tremble, to
shake ; asam-pa-kampiyOy that
cannot he shaken.
8am-pajanOy conscious.
sam-patto (p.p.p.), endowed with.
8am-pa-dhupayatiy to smoke in
volumes.
8am-panno (p. p. p.), endowed with.
SAM-PA-YOGO, union, presence.
8arn-parayiko (adj.), relating to the
future.
SAM-PARAYO, future state, next
world.
8am-pa-vedhati, to tremble.
sam-pa-sadananty making serene ;
tranquilization.
8am-pa88atiy to behold, to discern.
8am-pa-harii8eti (caus.), to gladden,
to delight, to praise.
8ampha-ppa-lapOy frivolous talk.
8am-pha8sa-joy arising from contact.
SAM-PHASSANAM (t.t.), contact.
sam-phassoy contact.
8am-bahulo (adj.), many.
8am-badh.Oy pressure, straits.
SAM-BOJJHANGO (t. t ), con-
stituent of bodhi.
8ambhav-e8t (adj.), seeking rebirth.
SAM-BHAVO, production.
8am-mannatiy to agree to, to decide ;
to sanction.
SAMMA (indecl.), fully, thoroughly
(used frequently in composition) ;
Sammd sambuddho, the All Wise.
8am-mukhi-bhuto, confronted.
8am-mukho (adj.), face to face.
SAM-MUTI (f.), consent, choice,
determination.
8am-muyhatiy to be stupefied ; p.p. p.
sammulho.
sam-modatiy to agree with ; saddhirh
8°y to exchange friendly greetings.
SAMVARl (f.), night.
8am-vas0y living with.
8am-viggOy excited.
SAY ATI, to lie down.
SAY AN AM (SENA*), lying, sleep-
ing ; bed, couch.
S ARAN AM, refuge.
SARABC (f.), a lizard.
8ari(o (p. p. p.), flowing.
SARIRAM, body.
SARO, sound.
12
ed by CjOO^Ic
178
GLOSSARY.
S ALAKA, a peg ; slip, bit of wood.
sal-lahuko (adj.), light.
SALLINO, bent together.
SAVANAM, hearing.
SASSU (f.), mother-in-law.
SAHA (in composition), together,
with.
sahagato , accompanied.
8ahasd (adv.), with violence.
SAHASSl, thousand (in composi-
tion).
SAHA (adv.), with.
8aha-8tli (adj.), being fond of society.
SAKACCHA (f.), conversation.
SADHU (adv.), well, good.
SANAM, hempen cloth.
SAMlCl (f.), correctness.
SAYANHO, evening.
SAYATI, to taste.
SARATHI, charioteer.
8drdniyo (adj.), that which should
be remembered.
sa-ruppo (adj.), fit, proper.
SALI (m.), rice.
S ALIK A (f.), the maynah-bird.
SAVAKO, a disciple.
saveti (caus. to sunotx ), to impart,
to inform.
S AS AN AM, order, command.
Buddhas 3 , the teaching of the
Buddha.
SASO, asthma.
SIKKHATI, to learn.
S1KHA (f.), peak, summit; aggi-
sikha, flame of fire.
S1KKHAPADAM (t.t.), sentence of
moral training.
SINGHANIKA, mucus of the nose.
SITO (Skr. grita), resting upon.
SIPPA&, skill.
SIRIMSAPO, a snake.
8iri-ma (adj.), having maguificence,
glory.
SFRl (f.), fortune, prosperity.
SILA (f.), a rock.
SILOKO, a stanza, a qloka.
SIVIKA (f.), a palanquin.
SI VO (adj.), auspicious, blest, happy.
SIMA (f.). boundary, limit.
SlTAlVI, coldness.
SlTO (adj.), cold, cool.
SlLAM (t. t.), nature, character ;
moral character, piety.
SlLABBATAM (t.t.), affection of
good rites.
tdla-va (adj.), virtuous.
SlLl (adj.), having a habit, dispo-
sition ; nidda-aP , drowsy, slothful.
SlSAM, head.
SlHO, lion.
SU (in composition), well, good.
SUKO, a parrot.
SUKHO (adj.), blest, happy.
SUKHO, bliss.
SU-GATO, happy (epithet of the
Buddha).
8u-gandho , of good smell.
su-ggahito (adj.), grasped.
SUCI (f.), purity.
8u-cinno, well done.
S UNNAG ARAtfl, solitude, place
void of houses.
SUNOTI, SUNATI, to hear (see
Grammar).
suto (p. p. p.), heard, renowned.
8udam (part.), sma + idam.
su-dul-labho, very difficult to obtain.
SU-DH AMM ATO (t. t.), perfection.
ed by CjOO^Ic
GLOSSARY.
179
SUDDHO (adj.), clean.
su-pati-panno , well-conducted.
SUPATI, to sleep.
SUPINAJif, sleep. [joined.
m-ppa-yutto (p. p. p-)> thoroughly
m-bhavo , easily supported.
8u-mano , satisfied.
m-mapito (adj.), well-built.
SURA (f.), intoxicating liquor.
SURIYO, the sun.
su-vi-jano , easily known.
SUSU, a boy.
SUSSOSA (f.), desire to hear.
SOJU (adj.), conscientious.
SOLO, rheumatism.
SEMHAlVf, phlegm.
SEKHO (t.t.), one who is under
training.
SETTHO (adj.), best, foremost.
SEDO, sweat, moisture.
SENA (f.), army.
SEN-ASANAA, [sleeping and sit-
ting] dwelling.
seyyako (adj.), lying, sleeping.
SEVATI, to serve, to follow.
SEVANA (f.), addicted to, devotion
to ; A-sevana , not addicted to.
SO (pron.), this (see Grammar).
SO (adj.), own; 8am (adv.) by
oneself.
SOKO, sorrow, grief.
SOCATI, to grieve.
socanattam , mourning.
SOCANAM, mourning.
SONIJO (adj.), addicted to drink;
fern. SON1?I.
SOTAIVI, ear. [tion.
SOTAPATTI (f.), (t. t.), sanctifica-
SOTTHANAIVI, blessing.
SOBHATI, to shine.
SORACCA]Vf, tenderness.
sovacassata (f.), pleasant speech.
SOSO, consumption.
8v-akkhato f well told.
H.
HA (interj.), truly.
HATTHI (m.), elephant.
HATTHO (p. p. p.), bristling.
HATTHO, hand.
HAD A YAM, heart.
HANTI, to kill.
H ANDA (interj.), come on 1
HAMMIYAM, house surrounded
by walls.
HARATI, to carry away.
HARI (adj.), green.
HARITAIVT, grass.
haritattam , greenness, yellowness.
HAVE (interj.), truly.
HI (part.), for, because ; certainly,
indeed ; also.
H IMS ATI, to hurt.
HIRANNAM, gold.
HIRl, modesty, shame.
HITO (p. p. p. and adj.), beneficial.
hino (p. p. p.), wasted, decayed.
HETHETI, to injure.
HETTHIMO (adj.), lower, lowest.
HETU (adv.), on account of, by
means of.
HOTI, to be ; see bhavati.
ed by CjOO^Ic
SINHALESE ALPHABET,
Vowels.
CL a. Q i. zf t. (^y U. u & e c$ o.
Vowel Symbols.
O. °. '\ <y. J. S'. & 0 .
KS I fat. 23nK iS>M fe> £5 tSjJku. tSylkiSSSilte. (925»to.
^khu. khu.
Nasal Vowels.
The symbol is <? . <¥><? am. It is also used
for any nasal before another consonant
Consonants.
25) ka.
" 2 ) . kha
GO ga.
¥50 cjha
rta
O ca
i cha
sT > a .
fifojha
0 ta
6 S tha
€D <2a
13$ dlyt
/^S °0 zuz
23) ?a
& tha
q, da
6 t) d/ia
25) me
23 7*1
£$ pha
Ef) ba
(§0 bha
ma
60 l/a
ra 1
QU
va
€o> sa
60 %a
& U
Consonant Symbols
23 y.
fry#
r.
Yirama ^
is k.
Compound Consonants.
Qft nga (£) yica <XS~ nja (S) nda (6b llha.
EE) ddha tE) cca. Qa) b-ba. &%) wba.
kkha. 2^05^0 jjha 23$ llha 35?k) ndha
5612
ed by CjOCK^Ic
Burmese Alphabet.
Vowels.
SD a. 3D0 a 9\ i . 2 } i • g u . § u. Q e.(5jo.
Voivcl \OorH ° ° & * (? 3
SYMBOLS ./ ^ 1 * r. h, b J
Croka. <JDokd.\ cBki. cBki. Cf^ku. cr^ku. Ccokeccooko.
® 9% \ go) go.
Nhsal Vowels. The symbol for the nasoil vowels is 0
o
3D curt . 11 is algo used to express any nasal before
another consonant.
Simple Consonants.
OO ka
0 kha
O ga
VO gha
C ha
0.9 ca
DO cha
0 ja
cy jha
po ha
5 h
Cj lha
3 4 a
33 dha
COO na
OO la
OO lha
3 da
Q dha
«> na
1
O pa
O pha
O ba,
OO bha
(3 ma
(JO ya
5} ra
Co la
O va
DO sa
OO ha
S l - a
Consonhn
t Symbols.
C
ha.
OD^ hka
< JO
y«- 0
yy a
Dt khya
<1
ra C
(0 kra
^9 bra.
O
va. ^
c>
Og tva
OO
hce J
COJ nha
O mha.
VS
Virama
° b5
t.
Compound Consonants.
OJ kkha ccha g ttha ddha
Q? *4* gg ttha g ddha
O) ppa o ppha (D mma
OOO ssa.
66(2
3 Tina
OO . OQ sm a
^=3
ed by CjOCK^Ic
KAMBODIAN AL PHAB ET.
Vowels.
^ i. <Q\W. QjjU Ole
o.
. i . i
W « C$4
Vowel Symbols.
* T , , ■« « ^
#T ka. ka d^ki <n ki. tfTku. ku. Gf’S ' ke C-’PS} ko.
Nasal Vowels. The symbol ^ is added, to the simple
vowel: am, . It is also used as a nasal before
another consonant .
Simple Consonants
f? ka o kha A* ga
£j ca $3 eha
& ta & tha
m •
<a*5 ta tha
ZJ> pa pha
^JL$ ya $ ra
ha
& j a
da
Ca da
(f^ ha
£tl la
*L£_£ gha. •O ria
‘fZJLS jha <?T^ na
G^S dha £)& yya
£3" dha $V yu</
^3 Vha %S ma
v-a
%J u
Compound Consonants
Symbol for Ta |0 bra ndra
” ” fna hma <s$ sma
Vs — 1>
»» « gemination ^fj'ssa ppa
§ Mb* ^jT Q ceJU Q3 W<* |6
AA nda <?*£ ddha ^ <^va
nria mba.
y Google
£5/2
ed by '
HERTFORD:
PAINTED BY STEPHEN AUSTIN AND 80N8.
Digitized by Google
Pali Grammar by Oscar Frankfurter
Anónimo